MapInfo Manual

Reference Guide
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying without the written permission of MapInfo Corporation, One Global View, Troy, New York 121808399.
19921998
MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.
MapInfo Help 19921998 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved. MapInfo, MapInfo Professional, MapBasic and the MapInfo Logo are registered trademarks of MapInfo Corporation. Contact MapInfo Corporation on the Internet at: http://www.mapinfo.com
MapInfo Corporate Headquarters:

Voice: Fax: (518) 2856000 (518) 2856060 England voice: fax:
MapInfo Europe Headquarters:

Germany +49 6196 6700 0 +49 6196 6700 11 +44 (0)1753 848 200 voice: +44 (0)1753 621 140 fax:
Sales Info Hotline: (800) 3278627 Federal Sales: (800) 6192333 Technical Support Hotline: (518) 2857283 Technical Support Fax: (518) 2856080
Tollfree telephone support is available in the U.S. and Canada. Contact your MapInfo sales representative for details. For international customers, please use the Technical Support Fax number.
WARNING: This software uses patented LZW technology for .GIF image compression and/or decompression. (Unisys United States patent No. 4,558,302 and corresponding patents in Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan and the United Kingdom). GIF images compressed or decompressed for transmission via the Internet or via any other online communica tion capability may not be sold or licensed for revenue, or used by an Internet Service Provider or in paid advertisements unless the user first enters into a written license agreement with Unisys. For information concerning licensing, please con tact: Unisys Corporation Welch Licensing Department C1SW19 Township Line & Union Meeting Roads P .O. Box 500 Blue Bell PA 19424 Fax: 2159863090 The MapInfo Professional font sets were provided by Galapagos Design Group of Littleton, MA. libtiff 19881995 Sam Leffler, copyright 19911995 Silicon Graphics, Inc. libgeotiff 1995 Niles D. Ritter Portions of the software are derived from the Standard C Library, copyright 1992, by P .J. Plauger, published by PrenticeHall, and are used with permission. HIL Media Cybernetics, Inc. 1993. Halo Imaging Library is a trademark of Media Cybernetics, Inc.
Crystal Reports is a proprietary trademark of Seagate Software Information Management Group (Canada) INc. Vancouver, BC or its affiliates and is licensed to MapInfo by Seagate" Seagate Crystal Reports Copyright 1997 (manual and software) Seagate Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Seagate Software, Seagate, and the Seagate logo are registered trademarks of Seagate Technology, Inc., or one of its subsidiaries. Seagate Crystal Reports, Seagate Crystal Info, the Seagate Crystal reports logo, and Smart Navigation are trademarks or registered trademarks of Seagate Software, Inc. This documentation was written by Marie Costa, with the help of Dan Fitzgerald, Tony Maritato and Gayle Patenaude. Colleen Cox, Editor. Dianne Ritter produced the pdf. Ed McElroy authored the online help. MapInfo welcomes your comments and suggestions. August 1998
About MapInfo Command Help Menu ......................................... Add District Command Redistrict Menu ....................................... Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar .............................................. Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu ................ Align Objects Command Layout Menu ........................................ Autotrace ..................................................................................... Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu ......................... Arc Button Drawing Toolbar ........................................................ Arrange Icons Command Window Menu ..................................... Assign Selected Objects Button Main Toolbar ............................ Assign Selected Objects Command Redistrict Menu .................. Boundary Select Button Main Toolbar ......................................... Bring To Front Command Layout Menu ...................................... Buffer Command Objects Menu .................................................. Calculate Statistics Command Query Menu ................................ Cascade Windows Command Window Menu ............................. Change ODBC Table Symbol Button ODBC Toolbar.................. Change ODBC Table Symbol Command Table > ....................... Change View Button Main Toolbar .............................................. Change View Command Map Menu............................................
13 14 15 16 19 21 22 23 26 27 27 28 30 31 34 36 37 37 39 39
Change Zoom Command Layout Menu ...................................... Clear Command Edit Menu ......................................................... Clear Cosmetic Layer Command Map Menu .............................. Clear Map Objects Only Command Edit Menu ............................ Clear Target Command Objects Menu ........................................ Clip Region Off Command Map > Clip Region Off ...................... Clone View .................................................................................. Close All Command File Menu .................................................... Close Table Command File Menu ............................................... Combine Command Objects Menu ............................................. Combine Objects Using Column Command Table Menu ............ Convert to Polylines Command Objects Menu ............................ Convert To Regions Command Objects Menu ............................ Copy Command Edit Menu ......................................................... Create Drop Shadows Command Layout Menu .......................... Create Legend Map Menu ........................................................... Create Points Command Table Menu ......................................... Create Thematic Map Command ................................................ Crystal Reports ............................................................................ Custom Colors Command Options Menu ....................................
41 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 50 53 61 63 65 66 68 70 80 82 111 112
Cut Command Edit Menu ............................................................ Delete Table Command Table > Maintenance ............................ Delete Target District Command Redistrict Menu ....................... Digitizer Setup Command Map Menu .......................................... Digitizer Setup ............................................................................. Digitizer Mode ............................................................................. Common Digitizing Problems and Solutions ............................... Drag Button ................................................................................. Drawing Toolbar .......................................................................... Ellipse Button Drawing Toolbar ................................................... Erase Command Objects Menu .................................................. Erase Outside Command Objects Menu ..................................... Exit Command File Menu ............................................................ Export Command Table Menu .................................................... Expression Dialog ....................................................................... Find Command Query Menu ....................................................... Find Selection Command Query Menu ....................................... Frame Button Drawing Toolbar ................................................... Functions ..................................................................................... Geocode Command Table Menu ................................................
113 115 116 117 117 121 125 128 129 131 133 134 136 137 143 149 153 154 158 161
Get Info Command Edit Menu ..................................................... Grabber Button Main Toolbar ...................................................... Graph Type Command Graph Menu ........................................... Hide MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar ............................ Hide MapBasic Window Command Options Menu ...................... Hide Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar ............................... Hide Statistics Window Command Options Menu ....................... Hide StatusBar Command Options Menu ................................... Hide Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu ............. Import Command Table Menu ..................................................... Info Button Main Toolbar ............................................................. Infotips ......................................................................................... Interleaved Line Styles ................................................................ Join Update Column Dialog ......................................................... Label Axis Command Graph Menu ............................................. Label Button Main Toolbar .......................................................... Layer Control Button Main Toolbar ............................................. Layer Control Command Map Menu ........................................... Legend Button Main Toolbar ....................................................... Line Button Drawing Toolbar .......................................................
167 168 169 175 175 176 176 177 178 179 189 191 192 193 197 199 203 203 222 223
Line Style Button Drawing Toolbar .............................................. Line Style Command Options Menu ............................................ Line Width ................................................................................... Main Toolbar ............................................................................... Make Table Mappable Command Table > Maintenance ............. MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network ................................... MapInfo Help Topics ................................................................... MapInfo on the World Wide Web ................................................ Marquee Select Button Main Toolbar .......................................... Modify Image Registration Command Table > Raster Menu ...... Modify Thematic Map .................................................................. New Browser Window Command Window Menu ........................ New Graph Window Command Window Menu ........................... New Layout Window Window Menu ............................................ New Map Window Command Window Menu .............................. New Redistrict Window Command Window Menu ...................... New Row Command Edit Menu .................................................. New Table Command File Menu ................................................. ODBC Toolbar ............................................................................. Open ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar ..................................
225 225 227 229 232 235 236 237 238 239 240 244 248 250 253 256 262 263 268 269
Open ODBC Table Command File Menu .................................... Open Table Command File Menu ............................................... Open Workspace Command File Menu ...................................... Options Command Browse Menu ................................................ Options Command Layout Menu ................................................. Options Command Map Menu .................................................... Options Command Redistrict Menu............................................. Overlay Nodes Command Objects Menu .................................... Pack Table Command Table > Maintenance .............................. Page Setup .................................................................................. Paste Command Edit Menu ........................................................ Pick Fields Command Browse Menu........................................... Polygon Button Drawing Toolbar ................................................. Polyline Button Drawing Toolbar ................................................. Preferences Command Options Menu ........................................ Previous View Command Map and Layout Menus ...................... Print Command File Menu ........................................................... Print Setup Command File Menu ................................................ Projection Button ......................................................................... Quick Start ...................................................................................
269 283 291 293 294 297 299 301 303 305 308 309 313 316 319 327 328 337 338 340
Radius Select Button Main Toolbar ............................................. Rectangle Button Drawing Toolbar ............................................. Redraw Window Command Window Menu ................................. Refresh ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar ............................... Refresh ODBC Table Command Table > Maintenance .............. Region Style Button Drawing Toolbar ......................................... Region Style Command Options Menu ....................................... Register Raster Image ................................................................ Rename Table Command Table > Maintenance ......................... Reshape Button Drawing Toolbar ............................................... Reshape Command Edit Menu ................................................... Revert Table Command File Menu.............................................. Rounded Rectangle Button Drawing Toolbar .............................. Ruler Button Main Toolbar .......................................................... Run MapBasic Program Button Tools Toolbar ............................ Run MapBasic Program Command File Menu ............................ Save Copy As Command File Menu ........................................... Saving a Copy of Access and MapInfo Tables ............................ Saving an Access Table as a MapInfo Table .............................. Saving an Access Table as Another Access Table .....................
341 342 344 345 345 346 346 349 356 358 358 362 363 365 366 366 369 371 373 373
Save Cosmetic Objects ............................................................... Save Query File Menu ................................................................. Save Table Command File Menu ................................................ Save Template in the Select and SQL Select Dialogs ................ Save Thematic Settings .............................................................. Save Window As Command File Menu ....................................... Save Workspace Command File Menu ....................................... Select All Command Query Menu ............................................... Select Button ............................................................................... Select Command Query Menu .................................................... Select Control Point From Map Command Table > Raster ......... Send Mail .................................................................................... Send to Back Command Layout Menu ........................................ Series Command Graph Menu .................................................... Set Clip Region Command Map > Set Clip Region ..................... Set Target Command Objects > Set Target ................................ Set Target District From Map Button Main Toolbar ..................... Set Target District From Map Command Redistrict Menu ........... Shortcut Menus ........................................................................... Show Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu ............
374 375 376 382 384 385 388 390 391 394 396 397 398 399 402 404 405 405 406 408
Show MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar........................... Show MapBasic Window Command Options Menu .................... Show Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar ............................. Show Statistics Window Command Options Menu ..................... Show StatusBar Command Options Menu .................................. Smooth Command Objects Menu ............................................... Snap to Node Options > Preferences >Map Window .................. Split Objects Menu ...................................................................... SQL Select Command ................................................................. Standard Toolbar ......................................................................... Startup.wor .................................................................................. StatusBar ..................................................................................... Status Bar Popups ...................................................................... Symbol Button Drawing Toolbar .................................................. Symbol Style Button Drawing Toolbar ......................................... Symbol Style Command Options Menu ....................................... Table Structure Command Table > Maintenance ........................ Text Button Drawing Toolbar ....................................................... Text Style Button Drawing Toolbar .............................................. Text Style Command Options Menu............................................
409 409 411 411 412 413 414 416 419 432 434 436 437 438 440 440 444 448 452 452
Tile Windows Command Windows Menu .................................... Toolbars Command Options Menu.............................................. Tool Manager .............................................................................. Tools Menu .................................................................................. Tools Toolbar .............................................................................. ToolTips ....................................................................................... Universal Translator .................................................................... Undo Command Edit Menu ......................................................... Unlink ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar ................................. Unlink ODBC Table Command Table > Maintenance ................. Unselect All Command Query Menu ........................................... Unsmooth Command Objects Menu ........................................... Update Column Command Table Menu ...................................... Value Axis Command Graph Menu ............................................. View Actual Size Command Layout Menu .................................. View Entire Layer Command Map Menu ..................................... View Entire Layout Command Layout Menu ............................... Zoom-in Button Main Toolbar ...................................................... Zoom-out Button Main Toolbar ....................................................
454 455 458 463 464 465 466 471 472 472 473 474 475 480 482 483 484 485 486
About MapInfo Command Help Menu
About MapInfo Command Help Menu

Use About MapInfo to:
D
display a dialog indicating which version of MapInfo you are using, licensing information and Technical Support information.
About MapInfo is available when:

D
About MapInfo is always available.
Menu Path
"
Help > About MapInfo
To return to the previous window:

"
Choose OK.
MapInfo Reference
13
Add District Command Redistrict Menu
Add District Command Redistrict Menu

Use Add District to:
D
add a new district to an existing Districts Browser window.
Add District is available when:

D
a redistricting session is in effect.
Menu Path
"
Redistrict > Add District or
Display Shortcut Menu
Using Add District

Choose Add District to create a new district and add the district to the bottom of the Districts Browser. MapInfo assigns a default name (district #) to the new district, and highlights it for editing.
Changing a Districts Name

To change a district's name: 1. 2. Click on the name in the Districts Browser. Enter the new name. Do not use Districts" as a name for your base tables. MapInfo uses Districts" internally as a system table when beginning a redistricting session.
See:
Assign Selected Objects Command New Redistrict Window Command Set Target District From Map Command User's Guide: Chapter 14
14
MapInfo Reference
Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar
Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Add Node button to:
D
access the Add Node tool. Use the Add Node tool to add a node to regions, polylines, and lines.
Add Node button is available when:

D
a Map window is active and Reshape mode is on or a Layout window is active and Reshape mode is on.
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button
Adding a Node
Nodes can be added only to lines, polylines and regions. The maximum number of nodes for regions and polylines is 1,048,572 nodes for a single polygon region or polyline. The limit drops by seven nodes for every two additional polygons. If an object with more than 32K nodes is saved and the table is read in a version of MapInfo prior to version 4.5, the object(s) will not be visible. Objects in the table that do not exceed the 32K limit will be visible. To add a node: 1. 2. 3. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button. Move the cursor to the point on the segment where you want to add a node. Click to add the node.
See:
Overlay Nodes Command Reshape Button/Command Select Button User's Guide: Chapter 13
MapInfo Reference
15
Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu
Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu

Use Adjust Image Styles to:
D
adjust the contrast or brightness of a raster image, or display a color raster image in grayscale mode.
Adjust Image Styles is available when:

D
one or more raster image tables is open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Raster > Adjust Image Styles
Using the Adjust Image Styles Dialog

The Adjust Image Styles dialog lets you control how a raster image appears in MapInfo. Through this dialog, you can adjust an image's contrast and brightness settings, you can set a color image to display in shades of gray instead of in color, and you can designate a color image to display in a transparent color. The Adjust Image Styles dialog does not modify the raster image file; instead, it changes the way MapInfo displays the raster image file. Every raster image table consists of two or more files: a raster image file (e.g. photo.gif), and a table file (e.g. photo.tab). When you change the image display styles, MapInfo stores the new style settings by modifying the table file. MapInfo does not modify the raster image file in any way. You can display additional map layers, such as StreetInfo street maps, on top of a raster image. Since overlaying raster and vector data may make it difficult to tell which lines are part of the raster image and which lines are part of the vector data, adjusting the display style of the raster image can make it easier to differentiate the separate layers. If you set the image Contrast to a low setting, such as 30%, and set the image Brightness to a high setting, such as 70%, MapInfo displays the image in a subdued style, which is appropriate if you want the raster layer to act as a backdrop." If you change the display options and choose OK, MapInfo stores the new display styles immediately; you do not need to choose File > Save. To display the Adjust Image Styles dialog:
"
Choose Table > Raster > Adjust Image Styles.
16
MapInfo Reference
Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu Adjust Image Styles Dialog
Adjustments
Contrast Brightness Transparent Adjust the contrast in the image. The default contrast setting is 50%. Adjust the brightness in the image. The default brightness setting is 50%. When checked, a color from the image is made transparent. A rectangular box of this color is displayed. On the dialog, the transparent color is displayed as white. Very slight differences in the image may result in smaller transparent images than anticipated. If the transparent box is checked, press the Select Color button to choose a transparent color.
Select Color
MapInfo Reference
17
Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu Conversions

Original Image Gray Scale + Button, Button OK Display a color raster image in color. Gray Scale: display a color raster image in shades of gray instead of in color. +: zoom in on the raster image. : zoom out from the raster image. Store the new contrast, brightness, and grayscale settings in the table file that corresponds to the raster image. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Cancel Help
See:
Modify Image Registration Command Register Raster Image User's Guide: Chapter 15
18
MapInfo Reference
Align Objects Command Layout Menu

Use Align Objects to:
D
align objects with each other in a layout or with the horizontal and vertical frame of the Layout window.
Align Objects is available when:

D
a Layout window is the active window and one or more objects are selected in the layout.
Menu Path
"
Layout > Align Objects or
Aligning Objects
To align one or more objects in the Layout window: 1. Choose one object. Press <SHIFT> to select several objects. or Choose Query > Select All to select all objects in the layout. 2. Choose Layout > Align Objects. The Align Objects dialog displays.
Align Objects Dialog
MapInfo Reference
19

Horizontal Horizontal settings govern the lefttoright positions of objects. selected objects Choose alignment from the dropdown list: Don't change, Align left edges of, Align center of, Align right edges of, or Distribute. Distribute places an even amount of space between objects. Choose to align objects with respect to each other or the entire layout.
with respect to
Vertical Vertical settings govern the toptobottom positions of objects. selected objects Choose alignment from the dropdown list: Don't change, Align top edges of, Align center of, Align bottom edges of, or Distribute. Distribute places an even amount of space between objects. Choose from the list of relationships for specifying alignment. Choose to align objects with respect to each other or the entire layout. The objects selected are aligned according to the specified settings. Alignment settings are saved from one use to the next within a session.
with respect to
OK
Cancel Help
Cancel the dialog options.

Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
New Layout Window Command User's Guide: Chapter 17
20
MapInfo Reference
Autotrace
Autotrace
Use Autotrace to:
D
trace the nodes of a polyline or polygon.
Autotrace is available when:

D
snap mode is activated.
Menu Path
D
Activate Snap Mode by pressing the S" key
Using Autotrace
To use Autotrace: 1. 2. 3. Activate Snap mode by pressing the "S" key. Click on a node of the polyline/polygon you want to autotrace. Move the mouse to another node of the same object. To trace the shortest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Shift key and click. To trace the longest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Ctrl key and click. Pressing the Shift or Control keys highlights the autotrace path. Click to automatically trace the segments between the nodes and add them to the polyline/polygon you are drawing. To autotrace more than one polygon, click on a node common to both polygons. The autotraced border(s) are placed in the editable layer. To see the autotraced object, select it and drag it away from the existing object. You may also find it helpful to autotrace a border and place it in the Cosmetic Layer. To do so, make the Cosmetic Layer editable before you begin the autotrace process. Autotrace the polygon(s) or polyline(s) and save the Cosmetic Objects to a new layer.
See:
Reshape Snap to Node Polygon Button User's Guide Chapter 13
MapInfo Reference
21
Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu
Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu

Use Append Rows To Table to:
D
attach the records from one table to another table. The tables you are appending should have the same set of columns, in the same order.
Append Rows to Table is available when:

D
two tables are open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Append Rows to Table
Appending One Table to Another

When appending data, MapInfo takes data from columns in one table and puts that data into columns having corresponding positions in the other table. When the corresponding columns do not have the same data type, a best fit" is done to convert data to the appropriate type. When the columns of the two tables are not ordered properly, so that columns with corresponding positions do not have corresponding data, use Modify Structure to change the order of the columns in one of the tables. You also can use SQL Select to reorder the columns of one of the tables and then append the results. If you have information from another table that you want to combine with your table, use the Join command. To append one table to another:
"
Choose Table > Append Rows to Table. The Append Rows to Table dialog displays.
Append Rows to Table Dialog Append table to table OK Cancel Help Specify the table containing the records you want appended. Specify the table to which the records will be appended. The status of the append displays. Cancel the append. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
New Row Command Table Structure Command User's Guide: Chapter 18
22
MapInfo Reference
Arc Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Arc button to:
D
access the Arc tool. Use the Arc tool to draw an arc the shape of one quarter of an ellipse.
The Arc button is available when:

D
a Layout window is active or a map with an editable layer is active.
Menu Path
D
Drawing Toolbar > Arc button
Drawing an Arc
Use the Arc tool to draw an arc in an editable map or layout. The arc will be the shape of one quarter of an ellipse. The endpoints are at 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees on the ellipse. Once you have drawn an arc, you can reshape it. To draw an arc: 1. 2. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Arc button. Move the cursor to the location where you want to begin drawing the arc. To draw an arc that is a quarter of a circle, press <SHIFT> while drawing. 3. 4. 5. Press and hold the mouse button. Move the cursor. The arc appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you move the cursor. Release the mouse button. If the arc does not curve in the correct direction, redraw it in the same place, but move the mouse in the opposite direction.
Using the Arc Object Dialog

To specify arc object attributes: 1. 2. Select the arc. Choose Edit > Get Info. or Doubleclick the arc with the Select tool. The Arc Object dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
23

Arc Object Dialog
Center X,Y Radius X Radius Y Start Angle End Angle Style OK Cancel Help
The center of the arc's ellipse specified in X and Y coordinates. The horizontal distance from the center of the arc's ellipse to the rightmost (or leftmost) point. The vertical distance from the center of the arc's ellipse to the topmost (or bottommost) point. The angle of the arc's starting point on its ellipse. The angle of the arc's end point on its ellipse. Display the Line Style dialog. See Line Style Button/Command. Apply the designated attributes. The arc is reshaped to fit the specified starting and ending angles. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Repositioning an Arc
To reposition an arc manually: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make the arc's map layer editable. Position the Select tool at one of the two endpoints. Press and hold the mouse button. The cursor displays as a fourway arrow. Drag the arc to a new position. Release the mouse button. The arc moves to the new position.
24
MapInfo Reference

To reposition an arc using coordinates: 1. Double click the arc. The Arc Object dialog displays. See the preceding : Arc Object Dialog. 2. Enter the new center coordinates.
Resizing an Arc
To resize an arc manually: 1. 2. Make the arc's map layer editable. Choose the arc by clicking on either end with the Select tool. Four edit handles (small squares) appear around the arc, indicating that it is now selected for editing. 3. Choose any of the four edit handles and drag it in the appropriate direction. When you drag an edit handle, a dotted box appears around the arc. Drag the edit handle until you have resized the arc appropriately. 4. Release the mouse button. The arc resizes according to the size of the box. When the mouse button is released, the arc resizes so that it extends to the lower right corner of its bounding rectangle. To resize an arc using coordinates: 1. Double click the arc. The Arc Object dialog displays. See the preceding: Arc Object Dialog. 2. Type the new beginning and ending coordinates.
Reshaping an Arc
To reshape an arc manually: 1. 2. Select the arc by clicking on either end with the Select tool. Four edit handles (small squares) appear around the arc, indicating that it is now selected for editing. Choose Edit > Reshape. A small box (node) appears at both the start and endpoints of the arc. 3. 4. Position the cursor over one of the nodes. Click the node and drag it to a new location. The selected node becomes hollow. This node moves along the arc's ellipse and the angle between the two end nodes changes, reshaping the arc. 5. Continue dragging until the arc has the appropriate shape.
See:
User's Guide: Chapter 13
MapInfo Reference
25
Arrange Icons Command Window Menu
Arrange Icons Command Window Menu

Use Arrange Icons to:
D
order the icons of the minimized windows so they are more accessible.
Arrange Icons is available when:

at least one of the following is open and in icon form (minimized):
D D D D D D
Browser window Map window Graph window Redistrict window MapBasic window Layout window
Menu Path
"
Window > Arrange Icons
26
MapInfo Reference
Assign Selected Objects Button Main Toolbar
Assign Selected Objects Button Main Toolbar Assign Selected Objects Command Redistrict Menu
Use the Assign Selected Objects button and command to:
D
permanently assign all selected map objects to the target district.
Assign Selected Objects is available when:

D
a redistricting session is active and the Districts Browser is the active window.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Assign Selected Objects Button or
"
Redistrict > Assign Selected Objects or
Using Assign Selected Objects

If you select map objects while a redistricting session is in effect, those objects are tentatively assigned to the current target district. To make this assignment permanent:
"
Choose Main Toolbar > Assign Selected Objects Button. or
Redistrict > Assign Selected Objects. When you choose Assign Selected Objects, the target district's name is stored in the row of each of the selected objects. If you assign objects to a district named NorthEast, MapInfo stores NorthEast in the row of each selected object. Changes to the table are not permanent until you save the table.
See:
Add District Command New Redistrict Window Command Set Target District From Map Command User's Guide: Chapter 14
MapInfo Reference
27
Boundary Select Button Main Toolbar

Use the Boundary Select button to:
D
access the Boundary Select tool. Use the Boundary Select tool to search for and choose objects within a given region.
The Boundary Select button is available when:

D
a Map window is active.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Boundary Select button
Searching for Objects Within a Region

To search for objects within a region (polygon, ellipse, or rectangle): 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Boundary Select button. The cursor displays as a cross in a map window. Click on a region in a selectable layer that contains other objects, such as points. All objects in the topmost selectable layer, including the cosmetic layer, within the region will be selected. The tool chooses all objects within any polygonal region, ellipse, or rectangle on the map, such as a state or county boundary, a police patrol district or a sales territory. When the region is a complex one, with several component polygons, it includes all the component polygons in its search. If an object's centroid is located in another region, it will not be included the search. Two layers must be selectable:
D
the layer containing the objects for which you are searching and the layer containing the region within which you want to search. These can be the same layer.
Click on the region you want to search. All the objects (points, lines, polylines, text, arcs, ellipses, rectangles and rounded rectangles) within that region are selected. MapInfo searches for objects in the topmost selectable layer in which it find objects (including the cosmetic layer). For example, if you want to see all the crimes committed in a particular patrol district, both the patrol districts layer and the crime locations layer must be selectable. To select all the crimes committed in Central Park, click on the Central Park region with the Boundary Select tool.
28
MapInfo Reference

Again, if you want to select all customers in Texas, the customer locations layer and the states layer must be selectable. Click on Texas, and MapInfo highlights all the customers. If you do not have a boundary layer available, you may wish to create your own region, then select that region with the Boundary Select tool.
Searching for Objects in Other Layers

There may be occasions when you want to work with more than one layer of regions. In this situation, MapInfo ordinarily chooses the topmost layer when you click on the map window with the Boundary Select tool.
Adding Objects to the Selection Set

Press <SHIFT> while using the Boundary Select button to add objects to the previous selection.
See:
Marquee Select Button Radius Select Button Select Button User's Guide: Chapter 8
MapInfo Reference
29
Bring To Front Command Layout Menu
Bring To Front Command Layout Menu

Use Bring to Front to:
D
bring an object from behind objects that are covering it in a layout.
Bring to Front is available when:

D
any layout object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Layout > Bring to Front or
Changing Objects to be Frontmost in a Layout

Bring to Front, in conjunction with Send to Back, is used to reorder overlapping objects. You can then move any number of objects simultaneously. The selected objects maintain their relative fronttoback order and are placed in front of all other objects. To bring an object to the front of a layout: 1. 2. Choose the object or objects you want to move. Choose Layout > Bring to Front.
When the object you want to choose is behind other objects:

"
Press <CONTROL> while using the Select tool.
The Select tool cycles through overlapping objects starting with the topmost one.
See:
New Layout Window Command Send to Back Command User's Guide: Chapter 17
30
MapInfo Reference
Buffer Command Objects Menu

Use Buffer to:
D
create a buffer polygon around one or more selected object(s). A region object is created and added to the editable layer.
Buffer is available when:

D
a Map window is active and the map has an editable layer and one or more objects are selected in any layer in the map.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Buffer
Creating a Buffer
Use the Buffer Objects dialog to specify the radius of the buffer. There are two methods of determining the buffer radius: value and computed. Use computed to buffer each object by a different amount. For example, if you have a point layer of cities, you can buffer each object proportional to its population. You may create each buffer separately, or combine all buffered objects into a single object. Before buffering you should: make the layer containing the object(s) for which you want to create a buffer selectable and nmake the layer in which the buffer objects will be created editable. To create a buffer: 1. 2. Select the object or objects around which you want to create a buffer. Choose Objects > Buffer. The Buffer Objects dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
31

Buffer Objects Dialog
Radius
Radius Specify the buffer radius, the distance between the object (or objects) and the border of the buffer polygon. Enter a number for the buffer radius in coordination with the appropriate units. Specify a column or display the Expression dialog. The buffer radius can be determined from a table value or by specifying an expression in the Expression dialog. See Expression Dialog. See Functions. Specify the units. The following units are available: US Survey Foot yards, rods, chains, miles, nautical miles, millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers. The default unit is the distance unit for the map. Specify the segments per circle to determine the resolution of the curves in the Buffer polygon; enter a number between 2 and 100. The default value is 12 segments per circle. More segments produce a smoother curve; fewer segments make a more jagged curve. The higher the smoothness (more segments), the longer it takes to create a buffer.
Value From Column
Units
Smoothness
32
MapInfo Reference

One buffer of all objects Create one buffer for all objects. For example, if you are buffering Pennsylvania, New York and New Hampshire, one buffer will be created for all three of these objects. Create one buffer for each object. For example, if you are buffering Pennsylvania, New York and New Hampshire, each object will have a separate buffer. Display appropriate Help topic. Cancel the dialog options. Place the buffer polygon in the editable layer.
One buffer for each object
Help Cancel OK
See:
Functions New Row Command User's Guide: Chapter 16
MapInfo Reference
33
Calculate Statistics Command Query Menu

Use Calculate Statistics to:
D
perform statistical calculations on a column in a table or query/selection. These statistics can then be used in other applications.
Calculate Statistics is available when:

D
at least one table is open and there is at least one numeric column in that table.
Menu Path
"
Query > Calculate Statistics
Performing Statistical Calculations

To perform statistical calculations on a column:
"
Choose Query > Calculate Statistics. The Calculate Column Statistics dialog displays. Use this dialog to specify the table and column used for the calculation.
Calculate Column Statistics Dialog
Table
Display all available open tables. Choose the table that contains the column that you want to use to calculate statistics. Display the numeric columns in the specified table. Choose a column for calculating statistics; the column must be numeric. The Column Statistics dialog displays listing statistics for the specified column. These statistics can now be used in other applications. See the following: Specifying Thematic Ranges By Standard Deviation. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Column
OK
Cancel Help
34
MapInfo Reference

Column Statistics Display
Table Column Count Minimum Maximum Range Sum Mean Variance Standard Deviation OK Help
The name of the table containing the column for which statistics have been calculated. The name of the column for which statistics have been calculated. The number of records in the table. The smallest value in the column. The largest value in the column. The difference between the maximum and the minimum value. The sum of all values. The mean (average) of all values. The standard statistical measure of the variance in a distribution. The square root of the variance. Removes the dialog from the screen. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
Show Statistics Window Command Hide Statistics Window Command
MapInfo Reference
35
Cascade Windows Command Window Menu
Cascade Windows Command Window Menu

Use Cascade Windows to:
D
resize and arrange windows vertically. Only the contents of the topmost window is visible. The titles of the other windows with which you are working display, if space is available to display all titles.
Cascade Windows is available when:

D
a Browser, Map, Graph, Layout or MapBasic window is open.
Menu Path
"
Window > Cascade Windows
Cascading Windows
When you choose Cascade Windows, only the contents of the topmost window is visible. The topmost window is always the active window. To make another window the active window:
"
Click on its title bar or
"
Choose a window from Window menu.
Choose Windows > More Windows to select a window when you have more than nine windows open.
See:
Tile Windows Command
36
MapInfo Reference
Change ODBC Table Symbol Button ODBC Toolbar
Change ODBC Table Symbol Button ODBC Toolbar Change ODBC Table Symbol Command Table > Maintenance
Use Change ODBC Table Symbol to:
D
change the symbol for a mappable ODBC table.
Change ODBC Table Symbol is available when:

D
ODBC support is installed.
Menu Path
D
Table > Maintenance > Change ODBC Table Symbol
Using Change ODBC Table Symbol

The Change ODBC Table Symbol command allows you to change the symbol attributes for a mappable ODBC table. To change the symbol on an ODBC table:
"
Choose Table > Maintenance > Change ODBC Table Symbol. The Select ODBC Table displays for you to select a mappable ODBC table in order to change its symbol. The dialog will only display mappable ODBC tables.
Select ODBC Table Dialog
MapInfo Reference
37
Change ODBC Table Symbol Button ODBC Toolbar

Connection New Database Owner If there are multiple connections open, choose a connection from the pulldown list. A list of tables for that connection will display in the Tables field. Press the New button to make a new connection from the SQL Data Sources dialog. Displays the database to which you have connected. This field does not display for every database. Displays the owner of the database to which you have connected. Selecting a different owner displays that owner's tables if you have been granted access. This field does not display for every database. Highlight the name of the table you want to select to make mappable. The Filter button lets the user select which types of tables to list. The default shows Tables, View, and Synonyms, and hides System tables. Selects the table brings up the Symbol Style dialog. Cancels the selection. Access online help.
Table Filter OK Cancel Help
Once you have selected an ODBC Table, the following dialog appears:
Change Table Object Style Dialog
Use the Change Table Object Style dialog to specify new symbol attributes for the objects in the selected table.
See:
Make ODBC Table Mappable Command
38
MapInfo Reference
Change View Button Main Toolbar
Change View Button Main Toolbar Change View Command Map Menu
Use the Change View button and command to:
D
access the Change View dialog to specify settings for map window width, map scale, map resizing, and center point of a map.
Change View is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Change View button or
"
Map > Change View or
Zooming, Scaling and Positioning a Map Using Change View

To re-center a map or change the map's zoom or scale:
"
Choose Main Toolbar > Change View. or Choose Map > Change View.
The Change View dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
39
Change View Button Main Toolbar

Change View Dialog
Zoom (Window Width)
Type in a distance, in geographic units (such as miles or kilometers). When you click OK, the map window will redraw, showing an area that wide. To access the Map Unit dropdown list, select Map > Options > Distance Units. Specify the distance that one unit represents on the map. Choose the unit: inches, points, picas, millimeters centimeters, from the Paper & Layout units dropdown list. To access this list, select Options >Preferences>System Settings. Change the X and Y coordinates of the map's center. Accept the options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Map scale
Center of window OK Cancel Help
See:
Grabber Button Zoomin Button Zoomout Button
40
MapInfo Reference
Change Zoom Command Layout Menu
Change Zoom Command Layout Menu

Use Change Zoom to:
D
display the magnification factor at which the Layout is currently being displayed and specify a zoom level.
Change Zoom is available when:

D
a Layout window is active.
Menu Path
"
Layout > Change Zoom
Specifying a Zoom Level in a Layout

To specify the zoom level in a layout: 1. Choose Layout > Change Zoom. The Layout Zoom dialog displays. The magnification factor at which the layout is currently being viewed displays in the Zoom box. 2. Type a new value in the Zoom box. A zoom of 25% means the contents of the current Layout is being displayed at 25% of its actual size. 3. Choose OK.
Additional Zoom Level Information

The minimum zoom level is 6.25%; the maximum is 800%. The keyboard numbers 18 can be used to specify the Layout Zoom. Click one of these keys when a layout is active, and MapInfo changes the layout's zoom.

KEY ZOOM
1 6.25 2 12 3 25 4 50 5 100 6 200 7 400 8 800
See:
Zoomin Button Zoomout Button
MapInfo Reference
41
Clear Command Edit Menu
Clear Command Edit Menu

Use Clear to:
D
delete selected text or objects.
Clear is available when:

D
a Browser window is active and at least one row is selected or a Layout window is active and at least one object is selected or a Map window is active, a layer is editable, Reshape is not active, and at least one object is selected or a Map window is active, a layer is editable, Reshape is active, and one or more nodes is selected or MapBasic window text is selected.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Clear
Deleting Text or Objects

When in a Map window, a layer must be editable. The selection is not placed on the clipboard. The <BACKSPACE> or <DELETE> key has the same effect as the Clear command. Use the Edit > Undo command immediately after using Clear to reverse the action. Choose Options > Preferences> System Settings to designate the maximum number of objects that can be undone. See the Undo command. Use Clear with the Reshape command to eliminate a selected single node from an object, or multiple selected nodes. Position the cursor over the node you want to eliminate and click to select it. Click on a node; shift/click or control/click on another node to select multiple nodes. Choose Edit > Clear. The node(s) is removed and the graphic object is reshaped.
See:
Layer Control Command Reshape Command Undo Command
42
MapInfo Reference
Clear Cosmetic Layer Command Map Menu
Clear Cosmetic Layer Command Map Menu

Use Clear Cosmetic Layer to:
D
clear all objects from the cosmetic layer.
Clear Cosmetic Layer is available when:

D
a Map window is active and objects reside in the cosmetic layer.
Menu Path
"
Map > Clear Cosmetic Layer or
Removing All Objects from the Cosmetic Layer

To remove all objects from the cosmetic layer: 1. 2. Choose Map > Clear Cosmetic Layer. Choose Discard. All objects are removed from the cosmetic layer.
See:
Save Cosmetic Objects Command
MapInfo Reference
43
Clear Map Objects Only Command Edit Menu
Clear Map Objects Only Command Edit Menu

Use Clear Map Objects Only to:
D
remove graphic objects from a table.
Clear Map Objects Only is available when:

D
an editable Map is the active window and at least one object in the editable layer is selected.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Clear Map Objects Only
Removing One or More Graphic Objects from a Table

To remove one or more of the objects in a table: 1. 2. 3. Make the table you are working with the editable layer of the active map. Select the object(s). Choose Edit > Clear Map Objects Only.
Removing All Graphic Objects from a Table

To remove all the objects in a table: 1. 2. 3. 4. Make the table you are working with the editable layer of the active map. Make this layer the topmost selectable layer. Choose Query > Select All. Choose Edit > Clear Objects Map Only.
See:
Clear Command Layer Control Command
44
MapInfo Reference
Clear Target Command Objects Menu
Clear Target Command Objects Menu

Use Clear Target to:
D
clear as a target any object that was previously set for object editing.
Clear Target is available when:

D
a Map window is active and a target object exists and Erase, Erase Outside, Split or Overlay Nodes have not been performed on the object.
Menu Path
D
Objects > Clear Target
Clearing a Target
If you do not want to edit an object after it has been set as the target, use Clear Target to make the object revert to normal. An object also will be cleared as a target automatically if it has been deleted or modified by Erase, Erase Outside, Split, Overlay Nodes, or if you have chosen a new target.
See:
Set Target Command
MapInfo Reference
45
Clip Region Off Command Map > Clip Region Off

Use Clip Region Off to:
D
redisplay an entire map after using the Set Clip Region command.
Clip Region Off is available when:

D
a map window is active and the Set Clip Region command has been enabled.
Menu Path
"
Map >Clip Region Off or
"
Main Toolbar > Clip Region Button
Using Clip Region

Use Clip Region to isolate a region of a map for display and/or printing. Designate the region to be clipped using the Select tool; the region may be a predefined map region, such as a state, or one you define using a drawing tool. Thematic maps and seamless layers, labels, and points displayed on the map will be included in the clipped region. Raster tables (registered or unregistered) cannot be clipped. To use Clip Region: 1. Use the Select Tool to select the region of the map you want to clip. Only one region can be selected. If you select another clip region, you will be prompted to replace or retain the current clipped region. 2. Choose Map > Set Clip Region. or Click the Set Clip Region button in the Main Toolbar. The map redraws; only the clipped region displays. 3. To redisplay the entire map, choose Map > Clip Region Off or Click the Clip Region On /Off button in the Main Toolbar. To toggle between the map and the clipped region, you may find it useful to use the Clip Region On /Off button. After defining a map clipping object to use as a cutter, you may wish to save the object for reuse. To save a map clipping object in the cosmetic layer:
46
MapInfo Reference

1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Layer Control button and make the Cosmetic Layer editable. Also, make sure each of the layers you want to clip are visible. Use a Drawing Tool to draw the map clipping object. Click the Select Tool and select that object. Choose Map > Set Clip Region. The prompt Retain the object used for clipping in the Cosmetic Layer" displays. 5. Select OK to leave the map clipping object in the Cosmetic Layer. The selected map clipping object displays in the Cosmetic Layer. 6. To view the map region associated with the map clipping object choose Options > Region Style and choose None from the Pattern dropdown list. The layers that comprise the clipped region display.
See:
Set Clip Region User's Guide Chapter 6
MapInfo Reference
47
Clone View
Clone View
Use Clone View to:
D
make a duplicate of a map window.
Clone View is available when:

D
a map window is active.
Menu Path
D
Map > Clone View
Using Clone View

Clone View, an especially helpful feature when creating a layout window, duplicates a map window. You may wish to show the same map with a different zoom level, for example. To use Clone View:
D
Choose Map > Clone View. A duplicate of the map window displays.
See:
User's Guide Chapter 6
48
MapInfo Reference
Close All Command File Menu
Close All Command File Menu

Use Close All to:
D
close all open tables and all Layout windows.
Close All is available when:

D
at least one table is open.
Menu Path
"
File > Close All
Closing All Open Tables

To close all open tables: 1. Choose File > Close All. If you have made no edits to the table(s), all tables will be closed. If you have made edits to the table(s), the Save all layers with edited objects? prompt displays: Close Choose a table to close. Since each window has only one cosmetic layer; that layer contains all edits to cosmetic objects. Each window can contain multiple tables; thematic and label edits are saved on a per table basis. Prompts that display reflect the type of objects the window contains. Discard all edits. Cancel the close operation. Display appropriate Help topic.
Discard Cancel Help
See:
Close Table Command
MapInfo Reference
49
Close Table Command File Menu

Use Close Table to:
D
close tables, including Query tables and Linked tables.
Close Table is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
File > Close Table
Closing a Table
To close a table:
"
Choose File > Close Table. The Close Table dialog displays.
Close Table Dialog
Close
Choose a table to close. Since each window has only one cosmetic layer; that layer contains all edits to cosmetic objects. Each window can contain multiple tables; thematic and label edits are saved on a per table basis. Prompts that display reflect the type of objects the window contains. Close the dialog box; do not close the table. Display appropriate Help topic.
Cancel Help
When closing a window, but not the associated table, click the Controlmenu box in the upper left corner of the window; choose Close.
50
MapInfo Reference
Closing Multiple Tables

To close multiple tables: 1. 2. Choose File > Close Table. The Close Table dialog displays. To close a contiguous block of tables, select the first table you want, hold down the shift key and select the last table you want. To close multiple tables that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the tables. 3. To deselect tables, hold down the control key and click on the tables.
Closing a Query Table

When you make selections using Select, SQL Select, or any select tool, temporary tables are generated from the source table. When displayed in windows, these tables are named Query1," Query2" etc. Closing these tables eliminates them, but does not affect the source table. However, if you close the source table, all associated query tables will be closed and eliminated. To save the contents of a Query table:
"
Choose File > Save Copy As.
Closing a Linked Table

When you close a linked table and there are no edits pending, the file is closed and retains links to its respective ODBC table on the remote database. When you close a linked table and there are edits pending, the Close Edited Linked Table dialog is displayed. This dialog provides three choices for how to close the linked table.
MapInfo Reference
51

Closed Edited Linked Table Dialog
Save Changes to MapInfo Table Save Changes to ODBC Table Discard Changes OK Cancel Help
Save the edits only to the local MapInfo table. Save edits to the ODBC table on the remote database. Edits are also saved to the local MapInfo table. Discard the changes made to the table. Accept the options. Cancel the dialog box; do not close the table. Display appropriate Help topic.
52
MapInfo Reference
Combine Command Objects Menu

Use Combine to:
D
combine separate map objects into a single object. The Combine command also performs data aggregation which allows a new object's data columns to contain sums or averages of the values from the original objects.
The Combine command works with objects that are selected. If you want to apply the Combine operation to an entire table, choose Table > Combine Objects Using Column.
Combine is available when:

D
there is currently no map editing target (you have not chosen Objects > Set Target) and two or more objects are selected in the editable layer of the active Map window or there is currently a map editing target that consists of exactly one object and one or more map objects are selected in any layer of the active Map window.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Combine
Combining Map Objects

When you choose Combine, MapInfo:
D
geographically combines the selected objects. The new object represents the geographic union of the original objects. if you select two adjacent region objects and choose Combine, MapInfo combines the regions into a single object, and the border between the regions disappears and performs data aggregation. Data aggregation is a process where MapInfo calculates what the column values for the new object should be, based on sums or averages of the values of the original objects.
For example, if you have a table of sales territories that contains demographic information about the number of households per territory, use the Combine command to combine two of the sales territories into one territory. In the same operation, you could also use data aggregation to calculate the number of households in the new territory by adding the values from each of the original territories.
MapInfo Reference
53
Combining Different Types of Objects

The Combine command can combine different types of closed objects: regions, rectangles, rounded rectangles and ellipses. Closed objects combine to produce a region object. The Combine command also can combine different types of linear objects: lines, polylines and arcs. Linear objects combine to produce a polyline object. However, a single Combine operation cannot involve both linear and closed objects. If you want to combine a region and a polyline, you must first convert one of the objects to a different type. For example, use the Convert To Polylines command to convert the region into a polyline, and then use Combine to combine the two polylines. Do not use Combine with points or text objects.
Combining Selected Map Objects

To combine selected map objects: 1. 2. 3. Select two or more map objects from the editable layer of the active Map window. Choose Objects > Combine. The Data Aggregation dialog displays. Complete the Data Aggregation dialog. In this dialog, specify how to calculate values for the data columns of the new object. Depending on the data, you may want the columns of the new object to contain sums or averages of the values from the selected objects. See the following: Using the Data Aggregation Dialog. Choose OK. MapInfo combines the selected objects into a new region or polyline object; the original objects are deleted. The new combined object replaces the objects you selected in step 1.
4.
Combining Selected Map Objects Using a Target Object

The Combine operation also works with the Edit menu's target option. Before you choose Combine, you can select one map object and designate that object as the editing target. You can then select additional map objects and choose Combine to combine the selected objects with the target. If you set a target before you choose Combine, the Combine operation is more flexible by allowing you to combine objects from different tables. You should assign a target object if one of the objects you are combining is more important than any of the other objects. For example, if you want to add small, unnamed islands to an existing mainland" region, you should make the mainland region the target object. If you designate the mainland region as the target, the mainland region's name is retained after the objects are combined.
54
MapInfo Reference

To combine map objects using the map editing target: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select one object in the editable layer of the active Map window. Choose Objects > Set Target. The object you selected now appears in a different style, indicating that it is the map editing target. Select one or more objects in any layer in the active Map window. Choose Objects > Combine. The Data Aggregation dialog displays. Complete the Data Aggregation dialog. Specify how to calculate the values for the data columns of the new object. Depending on the data, you may want the columns of the new object to contain sums or averages of the values from the selected objects. See the following: Using the Data Aggregation Dialog. Choose OK. The selected objects are combined into a new region or polyline object. This new object replaces the target object you selected in the first step. The objects you selected in the third step are deleted if they came from the same table as the target object. If the objects selected in step 3 reside in a different table, they are not deleted since they are not in the editable layer.
6.
Using the Data Aggregation Dialog

The Combine command rewrites an existing row or writes a new row to a table. This row represents the union of the selected objects. To define the data values stored in this row's columns complete the Data Aggregation dialog.
Choosing Data Aggregation Methods

To specify data aggregation methods: 1. Select one or more columns by clicking in the list at the top of the dialog. Use ShiftClick to select multiple contiguous columns. Use ControlClick to select noncontiguous columns. If you select multiple columns, the aggregation method is applied to all selected columns. 2. Choose a data aggregation method: Blank, No Change, Value, Sum, Average, or Weighted Average. (Depending on whether you specified an editing target, some of these aggregation methods may not be available.) MapInfo updates the column list in the upper half of the dialog to show the chosen method. For example, if you choose Average, you calculate the average of the column values of all the selected objects. This average is stored in the column of the new row. Aggregation methods are described below. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all columns in the table.
If the table contains a large number of columns, it can be timeconsuming to specify aggregation methods for all columns. However, since the specified aggregation methods are retained for the entire session. The next time you choose Combine, you do not need to respecify all aggregation options.
MapInfo Reference
55
Default Data Aggregation Methods

When the Data Aggregation dialog first displays, MapInfo automatically assigns a default aggregation method to every column in the table. For numeric columns (Integer, Small Integer, Float, or Decimal), Sum is assigned as the default aggregation method. For all other types of columns, Value is assigned as the default method. You can choose OK, without changing any of the default aggregation methods. However, the default aggregation methods may not produce meaningful results. By default, MapInfo uses the Sum method for all numeric columns; however, depending on the data, it may not be appropriate to total all of the columns. For example, perhaps the table contains demographic information, such as median income statistics. If two adjacent regions have different median income values ($30,000 and $35,000), and you combine the two regions, it is not appropriate to total the two values; instead, you should choose Average or Weighted Average as the aggregation method.
A Combine Example
Use the Combine command to add island polygons to existing region objects. To add an island to an existing region: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Make the appropriate map layer editable. Select the region to which you want to add an island or lake. Choose Objects > Set Target. Use the Polygon tool to draw the new island. Select the island region. Choose Objects > Combine. The Data Aggregation dialog displays. Check the No Data checkbox. Since you specified an editing target, checking No Data will not to modify any of the target's column values. Choose OK.
56
MapInfo Reference

Data Aggregation Dialog There are three slightly different versions of the Data Aggregation dialog; the dialog which displays depends on whether you have specified a map editing target or whether the currentlyselected objects are in the same table as the target.
Destination Box
Choose one column or a group of columns. To choose one column name from the list, click on that column name. To select a group of column names, shiftclick. To select or deselect one column at a time, controlclick. Once you have selected one or more columns, clicking on an option in the lower half of the dialog applies that option to all selected columns. If you want to choose the Sum or Average method, make sure that all of the selected columns are numeric columns. If any of the selected columns are not numeric, the Sum and Average options are grayed, because Sum and Average cannot be applied to nonnumeric columns.
Aggregate Method No Change Blank Leave the selected column(s) unchanged. The No Change option is available only if you specified a map editing target. Store blank values in the selected column(s). To store blank values in all columns, check the No Data checkbox. Only choose the Blank option when you want to blank out individual columns. The Blank option is available only if you did not specify a map editing target. Store a specific value, the value displayed in the edit field, in the new row. Enter an appropriate value in the field.
Value
MapInfo Reference
57

Sum Calculate a sum based on the column values from all the objects to be combined. MapInfo stores the sum in a column of the new row. The Sum option is available only if you have selected a numeric column or columns. If you have specified a map editing target, and if the editing target is in a different table than the currently selected object(s), the Sum option adds numeric values from both tables, and stores the sum in a column of the target object. See the following: Adding Values from Two Tables. Calculate the average of the column values for all the objects to be combined. MapInfo stores the average in the new row. See the following: Averaging Column Values. The Weight By control is available when you select the Average option. It is not available if the target object is in a different table than the selected objects. Choose a column on which to perform weighted averaging. With weighted averaging, MapInfo adjusts the calculation of averages so that the values from each selected object are weighted more or less heavily. The Weight By column gives some of the selected objects more impact, or weight" than others. See the following: Weight By. If you have not specified a target: check the No Data checkbox to store blank values in all columns of the new row. If you have specified a target: check No Data to leave all column values of the target object unchanged. Display appropriate Help topic. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options.
Average
Weight By
No Data
Help OK Cancel
Adding Values from Two Tables

To add values from two tables: 1. 2. 3. Choose a column name from the list in the upper half of the dialog. This choice designates which of the target object's columns will hold the sum value. Choose a column name other than none" from the dropdown list in the lower right part of the dialog. This dropdown list contains all numeric columns from the selected objects. Choose the Sum option. MapInfo calculates the sum of values of the selected objects' numeric column (the column you chose in step 2), then adds the target object's numeric column (the column you chose in step 1), and stores the grand total in the target object's numeric column.
58
MapInfo Reference
Averaging Column Values

If you choose the Average option, and you do not choose a Weight By column, a simple average is calculated: the data values data values from all the objects to be combined are summed. This sum is divided by the sum by the number of objects to be combined. If you choose a Weight By column, a weighted average will be calculated. See the following: Weight By. The Average option is available if you have selected only numeric columns. If you have specified a map editing target, and if the editing target is in a different table than the currently selected object(s), the Average option only becomes available when you choose a column name other than none" in the columns dropdown list. Weight By The Weight By column gives some of the selected objects more impact, or weight" than others. For example, the table may contain two numeric columns: a median income column, med_inc, and a net population column, net_pop. When you combine two regions in this table, you probably want to use the Average option to calculate the average of the median income values. If one region has a med_inc value of $30,000, and another region has a med_inc value of $36,000, and you combine the two regions, the resultant region might have a med_inc value of $33,000.
MapInfo Reference
59

However, if one of the regions has a larger population than the other region, you would probably want the larger region's med_inc value to be weighted more heavily when the average median income is calculated. In the Data Aggregation dialog, perform these steps: 1. 2. 3. Choose the med_inc column from the list in the upper part of the dialog. Choose Average. MapInfo averages the med_inc values when combining objects. Choose the net_pop column from the Weight By dropdown list. MapInfo weights the average median income calculations. Thus, objects with large net_pop values affect the median income averaging more than objects with small net_pop values.
If you are combining closed objects, the Weight By dropdown list contains a special option: Area. If you choose Area from the Weight By dropdown list, MapInfo weights the average calculations according to the relative geographic areas of the regions to be combined. If you are combining linear objects, do not choose Area as the Weight By option. Linear objects have no width, therefore, they have no area. To choose standard (nonweighted) averaging, choose none" from the Weight By dropdown list.
See:
Combine Using Column Command Set Target Command Split Command User's Guide: Chapter 16
60
MapInfo Reference
Combine Objects Using Column Command Table Menu

Use Combine Objects Using Column to:
D
modify the geographical data and create one map object for each group. Combine Objects Using Column is the reverse operation of a Split. If you have data or have created objects by splitting existing objects, you can again combine them by using a common value.
Combine Objects Using Column is available when:

D
at least one MapInfo table is open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Combine Objects Using Column
A Combine Using Column Example

If you wanted to make a new map of the US based on areas such as Midwest, Pacific Coast, Northeast, etc., you can combine all of the state data and create new objects where some common data value is the key to which new map object the states will belong. Draw a rectangle somewhere on the States map. Select some states around the rectangle and specify them as the target. Select the rectangle and perform a split operation. The new objects will be created and each split object will have its same state initials. Then, use Combine Using Column and specify the state initials fields as the grouping value. The states will be recreated.
Combining Columns
To combine columns: 1. 2. Open at least one MapInfo table. Choose Table > Combine Objects Using Column. The Combine Objects using Columns dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
61

Combine Objects using Column Dialog
Combine objects from table Group objects by column
Specify the table that the contains the objects to be combined. Specify the field (column) in that table that should be used as the basis for creating groups. If you specify a field where all values are unique for each object, no objects will be created. Specify the table in which to place the results. It can be the same as the Combine Objects from table. Display appropriate Help topic. Cancel dialog options. Display the Data Aggregation dialog. See Combine Command, Using the The Data Aggregation Dialog.
Store results in table Help Cancel Next
Specify computations in the Data Aggregation Dialog; the objects will be combined. For information on how to use this dialog, see Combine Command, Using The Data Aggregation Dialog. If you specified a field where all values are unique for each object, no objects will be created.
See:
Combine Command User's Guide: Chapter 16
62
MapInfo Reference
Convert to Polylines Command Objects Menu

Use Convert to Polylines to:
D
change each of the selected objects into a polyline object.
Convert to Polylines is available when:

D
a Map window is the active window and the Map window has an editable layer and one or more objects in the editable layer are selected.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Convert to Polylines
Converting Objects into Polyline Objects

When you choose Convert to Polylines, MapInfo converts each of the selected objects into a polyline. Each object is converted into a separate polyline; MapInfo does not combine all selected objects into one polyline. To combine objects, see the Combine Command. Line, arc, ellipse, rectangle, rounded rectangle and region objects may all be converted to polylines. Point objects, text objects and polyline objects are not affected by the Convert to Polylines command. If a region contains lakes or islands, and you convert that region to a polyline, the polyline has multiple sections. Each lake or island comprises one section of the polyline. When you convert a circle or ellipse into a polyline, the polyline contains 101 nodes. When you convert an arc into an ellipse, the number of nodes depends on the starting and ending angle of the arc. If the arc spans 180 degrees (e.g. the starting angle is zero and the ending angle is 180), a polyline based on the arc will contain 51 nodes; if the arc spans 90 degrees, a polyline based on the arc will contain 26 nodes. MapInfo versions earlier than 3.0 cannot display multisection polylines. If you produce maps for users of MapInfo version 2.x, do not enter any multisection polylines in the maps. To see the number of sections in a polyline object, select the object and choose Edit > Get Info.
MapInfo Reference
63
Using Convert To Polylines

The Convert to Polylines command simplifies the task of creating doughnutshaped buffer regions. If you want to create a buffer representing the area within one mile of a county boundary. You may want the buffer to be doughnutshaped, extending exactly one mile to either side of the county line. You could create a buffer simply by selecting the county region and choosing Objects > Buffer. However, the resultant buffer would not be doughnutshaped; it would contain all of the county, plus an area of one mile outside the county. If you convert the county region into a polyline before you choose Buffer, the resultant buffer region is doughnutshaped. Convert to Polylines also allows you to perform nodeediting operations (e.g. adding and moving nodes) on objects that ordinarily do not allow node editing. For example, MapInfo does not allow you to add nodes to rectangle objects; however, if you convert a rectangle to a polyline, you can then add nodes to the polyline.
See:
Polyline Button User's Guide: Chapter 13
64
MapInfo Reference
Convert To Regions Command Objects Menu
Convert To Regions Command Objects Menu

Use Convert to Regions to:
D
change each selected object into a region object.
Convert to Regions is available when:

D D D
a Map window is the active window, and the Map window has an editable layer, and one or more objects in the editable layer are selected.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Convert to Regions
Converting Objects Into Region Objects

When you choose Convert to Regions, MapInfo converts each of the selected objects into a region object. Each object is converted into a separate region; MapInfo does not combine all selected objects into one region. To combine objects, use the Combine command. MapInfo automatically assigns the current region style to each of the region objects. To specify a region style, choose Options > Region Style. Polyline, arc, ellipse, rectangle, and rounded rectangle objects may all be converted to regions. Point objects, text objects and region objects are not affected by the Convert to Regions command. When you convert a circle or ellipse into a region, the region contains 101 nodes. When you convert an arc into a region, the number of nodes depends on the starting and ending angle of the arc. If the arc spans 180 degrees (e.g. the starting angle is zero and the ending angle is 180), a region based on the arc will contain 52 nodes; if the arc spans 90 degrees, a region based on the arc will contain 27 nodes; etc.
Using Convert to Regions

If you perform extensive map editing, you may need to convert polylines to regions. If you Cut or Copy a group of selected nodes, MapInfo treats the set of nodes as a polyline object, and places the polyline on the clipboard. If you then paste the object, MapInfo places the polyline on the map. At this point, you may want to perform Convert to Regions, depending on whether you want the finished object to be a region. Convert to Regions also allows you to perform nodeediting operations (adding and moving nodes) on objects that ordinarily do not allow node editing. For example, you can not add nodes to rectangle objects; however, if you convert a rectangle object to a region, you can then add nodes to the region.
See:
MapInfo Reference
65
Copy Command Edit Menu

Use Copy to:
D
copy the selected text and/or graphic objects information and place it on the clipboard.
Copy is available when:

D
a Browser window is active and at least one row is selected or a Map window is active and at least one object from the map is selected or a Graph window is active or the MapBasic window is open with text selected or a Layout window is active and at least one object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Copy
Copying Objects to the Clipboard

Before using the Copy command, you may want to specify what is copied and moved to the clipboard. See the following: Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the Clipboard. To copy objects to the clipboard: 1. 2. Select the graphic or text you want to copy. Choose Edit > Copy. A copy of the selected graphic or text is now on the clipboard. You can paste the contents of the clipboard to the appropriate location.
66
MapInfo Reference
Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the Clipboard

What happens when you copy objects to the clipboard depends on the settings in the Copy to Clipboard option in the System Preferences dialog, accessed through Options > Preferences.
"
Choose Options > Preferences > System Settings. The System Settings Preferences dialog displays.
Copy to Clipboard Copy TEXT to clipboard Copy only text to the clipboard. When you do not want text copied to the clipboard during Cut and Copy operations, clear the Copy TEXT to clipboard option. Copy only graphic objects as a bitmap; bitmaps are non-scalable representations of the object. Copy graphic objects as a metafile; metafiles are scalable representations of an object. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Copy BITMAP to clipboard Copy Metafile to clipboard OK Cancel Help
See:
Cut Command Paste Command
MapInfo Reference
67
Create Drop Shadows Command Layout Menu

Use Create Drop Shadows to:
D
create drop shadows behind window frames or objects in a layout.
Create Drop Shadows is available when:

D
a Layout window is the active window and any layout object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Layout > Create Drop Shadows or
Creating Drop Shadows

To create a drop shadow: 1. Click the object with the Select tool. or Press <SHIFT > and click on several objects. or Choose Query > Select All to select all the objects in the layout. 2. Choose Layout > Create Drop Shadows. The Create Drop Shadow dialog displays.
68
MapInfo Reference

Create Drop Shadow Dialog
Distance to offset the drop shadow
The default offset value is .125 inch, or .318 centimeters. When you change the values, MapInfo retains the changes throughout the session or until you change them again. The lefttoright offset. The toptobottom offset. Accept the dialog options. The drop shadow displays behind the selected object(s). To delete or change the fill pattern and line style of a drop shadow, choose Options > Region Style. See Region Style Button/Command. When you move or resize the layout object, the shadow does not resize or move. You may not want to create a drop shadow until you are sure of the position of its source. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Horizontal Vertical OK
Cancel Help
See:
Frame Button New Layout Window Command User's Guide: Chapter 17
MapInfo Reference
69
Create Legend Map Menu

There are two legend windows available in MapInfo Professional 5.0: the theme legend window and the cartographic legend window. The theme legend window is automatically created and details the meaning of the colors, symbols and styles on a thematic map. You can display or hide the theme legend window using the Options > Show/Hide Theme Legend Window menu option. The cartographic legend displays legend frames for any map layer, not just thematic map layers. The legend frames can all be in one window, or can be split among several legend windows for the same map. Therefore, each map can have one or more cartographic legend windows containing the frames of your choice. Additionally, you can customize the text and style of the information presented.
Use Create Legend to:

D
Show cartographic data for any map layer, not just thematic map layers.
Create Legend is Available when:

D
a map is in the active window.
Menu Path
"
Map > Create Legend
Creating a Cartographic Legend

Glossary:
Legend Window: A window containing legend frames. You can create more than one legend window for each map. The legend window can contain more than one frame. For example, you can have one legend window containing four legend frames, or you can have four legend windows, each containing one legend frame. Legend Frames: Each legend frame corresponds to a style or theme layer in the map window; the legend frame displays within the legend window.
70
MapInfo Reference

To create a cartographic legend: Choose Map > Create Legend. The Create Legend Step 1 of 2 dialog displays.
"
From Map Legend Frames
Displays the title of the map window for which the legend will be created. The Legend Window contains a legend frame for each layer listed in the Legend Frames listbox. Legend Frames contains the layers that can contribute to the legend window. A layer must contain style attributes or theme information to appear in the listbox; therefore raster layers are not included in the listbox. When the legend is created, the information about each layer displays in a frame; you can choose to place a border around each frame to make it more distinct. By default, all layers are selected and appear in the Legend Frames listbox. If you want to choose specific layers for the cartographic legend you are creating, use the Remove button to move the layer name to the Layers listbox. Remove layers from the Legend Frames listbox . These layers will not be included in the cartographic legend. Add layers to the cartographic legend. Any layer you move to the Layers listbox will not be included in the legend window.
Remove
Add Layers
MapInfo Reference
71

Next Display the Create Legend Step 2 of 2 Dialog. This dialog sets default options for all frames picked in Step 1. After the frame is created, you can override the settings for any frame by selecting the frame and clicking the right mouse button to display the frame properties dialog. A legend will be created, using one frame for each layer listed in the Legend Frame listbox.
Finish
From Map Legend Properties Window title
Displays the title of the map window for which the legend will be created.
Enter a title for the Legend, or accept <Default> to let MapInfo generate the title based on the title of the Map window. Check to include scroll bars in the legend window. Determines the orientation of frames within the legend window.
Scroll bars Portrait/Landscape
72
MapInfo Reference

Legend Frame Defaults Title Pattern Designates the text that displays at the top of each frame. Each occurrence of a # character will be replaced with the name of the map layer on which the frame is based. For example, # Legend for layers States, will produce the title States Legend. If you prefer to have Legend precede the layer name, enter Legend of #. This will produce Legend of States. To create a title with the # character in it, precede it with a '\' character. For example, "\ # of Customers" produces " # of Customers". Designates subtitle text; uses the # symbol in the same manner as described in Title Pattern. Designates the text that displays next to each symbol in a frame. Use the % character to include the symbol type: point, line, region in the style name text. For example, " % of #" expands to "Region of States". To create a title with the % character in it, precede it with a '\' character. For example, "\ % of Total" produces " % of Total". The % symbol is available only in the style pattern option; the # symbol can be used in Title, Subtitle and Style patterns.
Subtitle Pattern Style Name Pattern
Border Style
Check to place a border around the legend. Click the box displaying the check to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.
Display the legend. If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option.
Finish
Working with the Legend Window Modifying Legend Window Properties

Click the right mouse button anywhere in the legend window to display the Shortcut Menu. or
"
Doubleclick in the legend window, outside of a legend frame. or
"
Choose Legend > Window Properties.
The Legend menu, including the shortcut menu, is context sensitive. When no legend frame is selected, the final item is Window Properties. . ".If a frame is selected the last item is "Properties."
MapInfo Reference
73

The Legend Window Properties dialog displays.
Properties Window title Scroll bars Autoscroll Smart Pan Enter a window title or type <default> to use the default title. Choose to display scroll bars in the window. Choose to activate autoscroll. The Grabber Tool will automatically redraw the exposed area as the legend is moved, otherwise the redraw is not done until the grab is finished.
Working with Legend Frames Adding a Legend Frame

To add a frame to a legend window:
"
Choose Legend > Add Frames. or
"
Right click in the legend window; choose Add Frames from the Shortcut Menu.
74
MapInfo Reference
From Map Legend Frames Add
Displays the title of the map window for which the legend will be created.
Displays only layers that are not currently contributing to the legend.
Add layer(s) from the Layers listbox to the Legend Frame listbox. The layers will be added to the legend frame. Remove layers from the Legend Frames listbox . These layers will not be included in the cartographic legend. Any layer you move to the Layers listbox will not be included in the legend window. Display the legend. If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option. Displays the Add Frames Step 2 of 2 dialog.
Remove
Layers Finish Next
MapInfo Reference
75
Legend Frame Defaults Title Pattern Designates the text that displays at the top of each frame. Each occurrence of a # character will be replaced with the name of the map layer on which the frame is based. For example, # Legend for layers States, will produce the title States Legend. If you prefer to have Legend precede the layer name, enter Legend of #. This will produce Legend of States. To create a title with the # character in it, precede it with a '\' character. For example, "\ # of Customers" produces " # of Customers". Designates subtitle text; uses the # symbol in the same manner as described in Title Pattern. Designates the text that displays next to each symbol in a frame. Use the % character to include the symbol type: point, line, region in the style name text. For example, " % of #" expands to "Region of States". To create a title with the % character in it, precede it with a '\' character. For example, "\ % of Total" produces " % of Total". The % symbol is available only in the style pattern option; the # symbol can be used in Title, Subtitle and Style patterns.
Subtitle Pattern Style Name Pattern
76
MapInfo Reference
Border
Check to place a border around the legend. Click the box displaying the X to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.
Return to previous dialog. Display the legend. If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option.
Back Finish
Modifying Legend Frame Properties

To modify a Legend Frame: Select a frame with the left mouse button; click the right mouse button to display the Shortcut Menu. Choose Properties. or Choose Legend > Properties after a frame is selected. The Frame Properties dialog displays. If you have selected the frame for a thematic map, the Modify Thematic Map dialog displays; choose Legend to display the Customize Legend dialog.
Frame Title Title Font Enter a title for the Legend Frame. Select to display the Text Styles dialog. Choose font; font size; color; effects (including haloing, bold etc.).
MapInfo Reference
77

Subtitle Subtitle Font Enter a subtitle for the Legend Frame. Select to display the Text Styles dialog. Choose a font; font size; color; effects (including haloing, bold etc.). Check to place a border around the selected Legend Frame. Click the box displaying the check to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style. Listbox displays the name of each style object in the selected frame. To edit the style text, doubleclick on a listview item or click once to select, then click the listview item again. Select to display the Text Styles dialog. Choose a font; font size; color; effects (including haloing, bold etc.). To edit the style text, doubleclick on a listview item or click once to select, then click the listview item again; enter text that will replace the selected name. Press enter.
Border Style
Styles
Font
To edit a style name:
Deleting a Legend Frame

To delete a legend frame:
"
Select the frame to be deleted; press the DEL key. If you delete the last legend frame, the legend window will close. or
"
Click on the frame with the right mouse button and select Delete from the menu.
Moving a Legend Frame

"
Use the left mouse button to select and drag the frame to a new location within the legend window.
Legend Refresh
Choose Legend Refresh to redraw the legend window. To access Legend Refresh:
"
Choose Legend > Refresh. or
"
Rightclick anywhere in the Legend window to display the Shortcut Menu: choose Refresh.
78
MapInfo Reference

The Refresh dialog displays.
Refresh Styles
MapInfo will rescan the tables associated with each refreshable" frames. New styles are added to the frame and obsolete styles are removed. Nonrefreshable" frames can be constructed via MapBasic. MapInfo will redraw the frames in the legend using the portrait/landscape setting.Portrait/Landscape: Determines the orientation of the frames when the layout is refreshed.
Refresh Layout
The Customize Legend Dialog

The Customize Legend option in the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog includes the Into Window and Border options. The Into Window dropdown list displays these options: No Legend Window: A cartographic legend window is not created for the theme. If the old theme legend window is open, the theme legend displays in it. New Legend Window: Create a new cartographic legend using the specified options. Legend of (title): Add the theme information to the existing cartographic legend. Note: All legend information, including edited text is saved to the workspace. Embedding cartographic legend windows inside map windows and the shields layer of MapInfo StreetPro are not supported in cartographic legends. A cartographic legend based on a Live Access SpatialWare table displays the object types: points, lines, and regions, stored in the ObjectTypeColumn in MapInfo_MapCatalog. You can edit the ObjectTypeColumn in MapInfo_MapCatalog or edit the cartographic legend and remove the types you do not want to include.
See
Show/Hide Theme Legend Window Legend Button User's Guide Chapter 5
MapInfo Reference
79
Create Points Command Table Menu

Use Create Points to:
D
create point objects for a database with X and Y coordinates. This function is used most often to create point objects for pointfiles imported from MapInfo for DOS. These points can then be displayed on a map. It is not necessary for linked tables.
Create Points is available when:

D
at least one table is open and the table has at least two numeric fields. The table cannot be readonly.
Menu Path
"
Table > Create Points
Creating Points
Use Table > Create Points to create point objects for a database that has X and Y coordinates or longitude/latitude coordinate information. It is most useful when you are working with files imported from other databases. These points can be displayed on a map. When you do not have coordinates in the table, you can use Geocode to match some other geographic information (such as street address or ZIP Code) against a table already containing graphic objects. To create points: 1. 2. Open a table with x and y coordinate information; it cannot be read only. Choose Table > Create Points. The Create Points dialog displays.
Create Points Dialog
80
MapInfo Reference

Create points for table using symbol Get X coordinates from column Get Y coordinates from column Multiply the X coordinates by Choose a table from the dropdown list. Display the Symbol Style dialog from which you can choose a symbol to mark the point on the map. See Symbol Style Button. Specify the column for obtaining X coordinate information. Specify the column for obtaining Y coordinate information. Specify a multiplier for the X coordinate (i.e. multiply all MapInfo for DOS data by 0.000001 to convert to degrees). The default is 1. Multipliers vary depending on the GIS system. You can specify a different multiplier for each coordinate. Coordinates in MapInfo for Windows, Macintosh, Sun, and HP increase up and to the right. Coordinates in MapInfo for DOS increase up and to the left. The default X coordinate multiplier is a negative number to convert between these two systems. Specify a multiplier for the Y coordinate. When the table has no graphic objects, the coordinates are interpreted as longitude and latitude values. When the table already has graphic objects (some rows already have point objects) the coordinate values are treated as native coordinates in the projection saved with the map. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Choose the Projection button to display the Choose Projection dialog. Specify the coordinate system of the coordinates from the X and Y fields. By default, it is the same as the table's coordinate system. If the table is not mappable, it defaults to Longitude/Latitude. See Projection Button. Display appropriate Help topic.
Multiply the Y coordinates by
OK Cancel Projection
Help
See:
Geocode Command User's Guide: Chapter 7
MapInfo Reference
81
Create Thematic Map Command

Use Create Thematic Map to:
D
analyze data values associated with a map. The map objects can be shaded according to the data values (ranged, individual value), or thematic objects are created to display the data values. Create singlevariable thematic maps (ranged, individual value, dot density, graduated symbols, continuous thematic shading/grid) or multivariable thematic maps such as pie and bar charts. save your thematic map settings and use them in other thematic layers in current and future sessions.
Create Thematic Map is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Map > Create Thematic Map
Creating a Thematic Map

Creating a thematic map is a threestep process: Step 1: Choose a type of thematic template. Step 2: Choose the thematic values for the map. Step 3: Customize the thematic map. To create a thematic map:
"
Choose Map > Create Thematic Map. The Create Thematic MapStep 1 of 3 dialog displays.
Step 1: Choosing a Type of Thematic Template

Thematic templates allow you to create a thematic map based on values and settings in our default types, alter these settings and/or save them as a new template you can use again. When you first create a thematic map, you begin by selecting a template which you may modify to suit your requirements. You cannot create a theme without using an existing theme template.
82
MapInfo Reference

Create Thematic Step 1 of 3 Dialog
Template Sort by Name Template Sort by Time Ranges
Display available templates in alphabetical or according to their name. Display available templates according to the time they were created or last modified. Display data according to ranges you set. The ranges are shaded using colors and/or patterns. Choose from templates displayed as shaded lines, points or regions. Ranged thematic maps enable you to illustrate data values across points, lines and regions. They are useful to show a relationship between the data values and geographic area (e.g. sales figures, household income), or to present ratio information such as population density (population divided by area). Ratio information can be shown in other types of thematic maps when you choose Expression in Step 2. Display a bar chart of the thematic variables for each record in the table. Use bar charts to analyze multiple variables per record on the map. Make comparisons between the size of the bars in each chart to obtain information about a record in the table set, or compare one bar in all the bar charts to draw conclusions about a variable across all of the records, or compare the height of the bar charts to obtain information about the entire table. To indicate a negative value in a bar chart, bars extend in the direction opposite to the chart's orientation. Negative values do not display in stacked bar charts.
Bar Charts
MapInfo Reference
83

Pie Charts Display a pie chart of the thematic variables for each record in the table. Pie charts are multivariable. Use pie charts on the map to analyze more than one variable at a time. You can compare the size of the pie wedges in each chart to obtain information about a record in the table, or compare one pie wedge in all the pie charts to draw conclusions about a variable across all the records, or compare the diameter of the pie charts to obtain information about the entire table set. Display a symbol for each record in the table, the size of which is directly proportional to the data values. A graduated symbol map shows data points with specific numerical values. It is useful for illustrating quantitative information, such as hightolow rankings. The size of the symbols is proportional to the data values of the points. Points that have larger data values appear larger, and points that have smaller data values appear smaller. Display the data values as dots on the map, where each dot is equal to a number, and the total number of dots in a region is proportional to the data value for that region. A dot density map enables you to examine raw counts of data (e.g. population). Each dot represents a number of units. That number, multiplied by the total number of dots in the region, equals the data value for that region. Shade records according to individual data values. Individual value templates are multivariable. Choose from shaded lines, points or regions. A thematic map that draws map objects according to individual values is useful when you want to emphasize categorical differences in the data rather than show quantitative information (e.g., types of stores in a given area, zoning classifications in a given area, etc.).
Graduated
Dot Density
Individual
Grid
A grid surface theme is a continuous raster grid produced by an interpolation of point data. MapInfo Professional evaluates an expression for each row in a table and passes the row objects centroid and expression result to an interpolator. The interpolator produces a raster grid file, which appears as a raster table in a map window. The data is displayed as color gradations.
Displays a sample legend for the template type. Displays customized text for the legend. If enabled, the template has custom titles or range labels. Check this to use the custom text. Display appropriate Help topic. Cancel the dialog options and return to the map. Continue to Step 2.
Preview Use Customized Legend Text
Help Cancel Next
84
MapInfo Reference
Deleting a Template
Delete a template by selecting its name and pressing the Delete key. A dialog displays asking you to confirm or cancel the deletion. If no templates of the given type exist, a button to restore a default template displays.
Renaming a Template
Rename a template by selecting and clicking the template name; enter a new name, up to 64 characters.
Saving a Template
The option, Default Template Directory, in the Options > Preferences> Directories. . . dialog allows you to designate the directory where theme templates reside. Once you have selected a thematic template, the steps that follow depend on the type of template.
Step 2: Choosing Thematic Values

Choose the map layer on which you want to base the map, and the field or expression from where you want to obtain the data values (thematic variable). A thematic variable can be the data value that is associated with the graphic objects (regions, lines, and points) displayed on the map, such as the values in a column such as Pop_1990, Buy_Power, or Median Age. You can also obtain the thematic variable from another table using the Update Column dialog. Update Column creates a temporary column in the base table where you can aggregate or calculate information about the data. The Join item in the Pick Field list box of the Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog gives you direct access to Update Column. Join displays in the list when there is more than one table open. See Update Column Command. You can also use an expression for the thematic variable. For example, use the following expression to display population density: Pop_1990/Area(obj, sq mi) You can access the Expression dialog in Step 2 of creating a thematic map. See Expressions in a Thematic Map and Expressions for further information. Your map may have more than one variable, depending on the thematic method you choose. Pie and Bar maps can contain more than one variable. Depending on your choice of a onevariable or multivariable thematic map, the appropriate Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog displays.
One-Variable Thematic Maps

Ranged, graduated symbol, dot density, individual value and continuous shaded(grid) thematic maps use one variable. The Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog that displays for these kinds of maps requires only one field or expression.
MapInfo Reference
85

Create Thematic Step 2 of 3 Dialog for ranged, graduated symbol, dot density, individual value maps
Table
Choose the table on which you want to base the map. If you have objects selected in the Map window, the Selection from TABLE item also displays in the list. Choosing this item enables you to create a thematic map based on the selected items without having to map the selection. You can still base the thematic map on a mapped query table by adding to the map first.
Field Ignore Zeroes or Blanks
Choose the field or expression you want to use. Check this box to ignore zero values and blank values in the table. Since you are creating a thematic map based on one field in a table, any zero or blank values in that field will cause the entire record to be ignored. Disabled for Graduated and Dot Density maps.
Next Help Cancel Back
The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog displays.

Display appropriate Help topic. Cancel the dialog options and return to the map. Return to the previous Thematic dialog.
86
MapInfo Reference

Thematic Step 2 of 3 Dialog for Grid Thematic Maps
Table
Choose the table on which you want to base the map. If you have objects selected in the Map window, the Selection from TABLE item also displays in the list. Choosing this item enables you to create a thematic map based on the selected items without having to map the selection. You can still base the thematic map on a mapped query table by adding to the map first.
Field Ignore Zeroes or Blanks
Choose the field or expression you want to use. Check this box to ignore zero values and blank values in the table. Since you are creating a thematic map based on one field in a table, any zero or blank values in that field will cause the entire record to be ignored. Disabled for Graduated and Dot Density maps.
Grid Options Select a Table of Boundaries to Clip Against: Table Choose a table of regions to clip the grid against. Defaults to none. Grid cells will be written if the cells fall within the selected region.
MapInfo Reference
87

Grid File Name Specify the directory and name of the new grid file that will be created. By default the grid will be named according to the source table and field and saved in the directory specified in Options >Preferences > New Grid. Grid mapping creates a file type called a grid image. The default filename is tablename_fieldname, with the extension: .mig. Open a grid file using the File > Open Table dialog. The grid thematic layer is independent of its base layer and can be reordered in the map window as a separate layer. If data in the base layer changes, the grid map will not automatically update. Click to display a directory picker; select a directory in which to place the new grid file. If you click OK in the directory picker, the directory in the Grid File Name edit control will be updated. Cancel the dialog options and return to the map. Return to the previous Thematic dialog. Continue to Step 3.
Browse
Cancel Back Next
Multi-Variable Maps
Pie, and Bar Chart thematic maps allow you to analyze more than one variable at a time. In the Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog, choose the fields or expressions you want to use as the variables, and list them in an order that is most appropriate to the analysis. Use up to 20 variables. Thematic Step 2 of 3 Dialog for Pie, Bar Chart Maps
88
MapInfo Reference

Table Choose the table on which you want to base the map. If you have objects selected in the Map window, the Selection from TABLE item also displays in the list. Choosing this item enables you to create a thematic map based on the selected items without having to map the selection.
Fields Fields from TABLE Choose the field, or create an expression that contains the data values from all the numeric fields in the table you selected from the Table list. Indicate the fields or expressions you have chosen for the pie or bar chart thematic map. Move the selected field or expression up one place in the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list. Up is unavailable when the selected item is the first item in the list. Move the selected field or expression down one place in the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list. Down is unavailable when the selected item is the last item in the list. The order of the variables in the Field for Pie/Bar Chart list is the order in which the variables will appear in the legend. For bar chart thematic maps, the order in which the variables display in the legend is the order in which the bars display from left to right on the map. For pie chart maps, the first variable in the legend corresponds to the pie wedge that begins at the angle specified in the Pie Charts dialog. Pies are displayed in a clockwise or counterclockwise order as specified in the Pie Charts dialog. To display the Pie Chart Styles dialog, click Styles in the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog and choose Options. Choose to move the selected field in the Fields from TABLE list to the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list. Choose to move the selected field in the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list to the Fields from TABLE list.
Fields for Pie/Bar Chart Up
Down
Add Remove
Step 3: Customizing a Thematic Map

The last step enables you to customize a thematic map, or create the map based on the default settings. You can also preview the map's legend before you display the map, and change the legend's order.
MapInfo Reference
89

Thematic Step 3 of 3 Dialog
Preview Legend Label Order
Display a sample legend of the thematic map you are creating. Determine the order in which range and value labels (for ranged and individual values maps) and field labels (for all other thematic maps) appear in the legend. If you are creating a ranged map, the order you specify is also shown in the Styles dialog. Range display from lowest to highest value. Range display from highest to lowest value. Change the default settings of particular aspects of the thematic map. Customize the size, number settings and color on a dot density map, and the symbol and other settings on a graduated symbol map. Customize ranges on a ranged map. This option is only available for ranged maps. Customize style attributes such as color and size. This option is available for ranged, pie, bar, individual value and grid maps. Customize the legend. This option is available for all types of thematic maps.
Ascending Descending Customize Settings
Ranges Styles Save Customized Legend Text
90
MapInfo Reference
Template
Save As Display the Save Theme to a Template dialog. Type a unique name or select an existing name and overwrite it. If you overwrite an existing template, you will be asked to confirm this action. Templates have a .thm extension. If you have created a grid thematic map, the Grid Theme Options display: Save Inflection Values: select to store the actual values for the inflection points in the template. Save Inflection Percentage: Save the percentiles and calculate the actual values from the minimum and maximum of the data source table. Merge Help Cancel Back OK The Merge button is enabled only when you are modifying an existing theme, not when you are creating a thematic map. Display appropriate Help topic. Cancel the dialog options and return to the map. Return to the previous thematic dialog. Create a thematic map based on either the default or customized settings.
Using Expressions in a Thematic Map

The Expression dialog enables you to build expressions and use them as the thematic variable(s) in a map. See Expression Dialog. For Pie or Bar maps you can use more than one expression per bar or pie thematic map. Instead of choosing a field to represent the thematic variable in Step 2 of creating a thematic map, choose Expression to access the Expression dialog. To access the Expression dialog in a onevariable thematic map: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose Expression from the Field list box in the Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog. It is the last item on the list. The Expression dialog displays. Create the appropriate expression. Choose OK. The Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog displays. The expression is added to the Field list box. Choose Next to go on to the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Repeat to create as many expressions as necessary.
MapInfo Reference
91

To access the Expression dialog in a multivariable thematic map: 1. 2. 3. 4. Double click on Expression in the Fields from TABLE list box. It is the last item on the list. The Expression dialog displays. Create the appropriate expression. Choose OK. The Create Thematic Map Step 2 of 3 dialog displays. The expression is added to the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list.
You can customize three aspects of a ranged map: Ranges Styles Legend Customizing Ranges Calculate ranges using a number of methods. The choice of method depends on the data values and the type of analysis you want to perform. You can determine ranges based on a statistical or mathematical formula that MapInfo calculates automatically, such as standard deviation, or you can break the ranges according to the number of records, the range intervals, certain statistical values, or a value you choose. You also can set your own ranges using the Custom method. To customize ranges on a ranged map: 1. 2. 3. From the Step 3 of 3 dialog displays. Choose Ranges to display the Ranges dialog. Choose the items you want to customize and make the appropriate changes. Choose Options if you are using the Equal Count or Equal Ranges methods to use the Forced Break feature.
Range Dialog
Method
Choose an option from the Method dropdown list to select how the ranges are created. Choose from the methods described below. Display appropriate Help topic.
Help
92
MapInfo Reference

OK Customize the map according to the specifications and return to the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Cancels the customizing and return to the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog.
Cancel Range Methods
Equal Count: Each range contains approximately the same number of records. If the number of records is not evenly divisible by the number of ranges, MapInfo places the remaining records into the most appropriate ranges. Equal Ranges: The difference between the minimum and maximum endpoints in each range is the same. Natural Break: The range breaks are determined using an algorithm that sets the range breaks to minimize the difference between the data values and the average of the data values is minimized on a per range basis. This method produces a more accurate representation of the data. Standard Deviation: The middle range breaks at the mean of the data values, and the ranges above and below the middle range are one standard deviation above or below the mean. Quantile: Determines the distribution of a variable across a segment of the data (e.g. population). When you choose Quantile, a Quantiling box appears at the bottom of the dialog. Choose the field or an expression you want to perform the quantiling operation on from the dropdown list. Custom : Indicates that the ranges are userdefined. When you choose Custom, a Custom Ranges box appears at the bottom of the dialog. Highlight the range you want to change from the list in the middle of the dialog, and edit the minimum and maximum values in the Custom Ranges box. # of ranges : Choose the number of ranges you want from the dropdown list. The minimum number of ranges is 2, and the maximum number of ranges is 16. The default is 4 ranges. Round by: Choose a rounding factor for the range breaks from the dropdown list. Each rounding factor is a multiple of 10. >= Min: Indicates the inclusive lower bound of the range. The data values in the range interval are greater than or equal to the minimum value of the range. The range intervals are displayed so that the minimum value of one range, and the maximum value of the range above it in the list box, are the same number. The records that have that value are counted in the range interval where the value represents the minimum value. For example, one range is 26.2 to 30.9, and the range below it is 30.9 to 31.8. The record (or records) with the value 30.9 is counted in the range interval, 30.9 to 31.8, because 30.9 represents the minimum value in that range interval.
MapInfo Reference
93

< Max: Indicates the exclusive upper bound of the range. The data values in the range interval are less than the maximum value of the range, with the exception of the last range, where the values are <= to the maximum value. For example, there are four ranges and the values in the fourth range are 3040. A data value of 40 falls into the last range. % # Indicates the percentage of the total number of records in the range. Indicates the number of records in the range.
Recalc: Whenever you change a setting with any of the controls explained above, the OK button becomes a Recalc button, and the list box displays this message: Press <Recalc> button to Recalculate ranges." You can make several changes at once before doing a recalculation. Recalculations can be time consuming, depending on the data set and range method you are using.
Customizing Styles
The Styles on a ranged map include the color and size attributes of the map objects. You can customize these attributes to illustrate quantitative information about the data values in each range. To customize styles on a ranged map: 1. 2. 3. From the The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog Choose Styles to display the Customize Styles dialog. Choose the items you want to customize and make the appropriate changes. Choose Options for advanced customizing features.
Customize Range Style Dialog Auto Spread Choose style attribute you want to vary. MapInfo spreads the attribute across the ranges. The spread in the ranges displays in the column of Style Buttons, where each Style Button represents one of the ranges. For the styles that you are not varying, MapInfo uses the same styles in each Style Button. Spread color attributes. Spread size attributes. This radio button displays only when you are working with a map that contains point or line objects. Disable auto spreading. The number of style buttons is the same as the number of ranges with which you are working. The top and bottom range intervals are labeled in the Styles Group box. Clicking on an inner Style Button sets AutoSpread to none and allows you to customize any or all style attributes for any of the ranges. Setting the Style for All Other" Range does not change Autospread.
Color Size None Styles
94
MapInfo Reference

Style Buttons Display style attributes for each of the ranges. The Style Buttons are arranged the same way the range intervals will display in the legend. To change the style attributes of a range, click on a style button to display the Region Style dialog. See Region Style Button/Command. Display style attributes for the All Others" range. Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Display appropriate Help topic. Customize the map according to the specifications and returns you to the Thematic Step 3 of 3 dialog. The dialog expands, displaying advanced customizing features. These feature descriptions follow. Save the customized style settings as default settings. It is active when Autospread is set to Size or Color. It is disabled if Autospread is set to None. Save Styles as Default saves the top and bottom styles in the Style buttons, the All Others style, Inflection and the Autospread Style by Setting. Determine how color and size is spread across the ranges.
All Others Style Button Cancel Help OK Options Save Styles as Default
Auto Spread Style by
If you are spreading by color, these options display: RGB Indicate that the color is spread using the redgreenblue color model. RGB is recommended if you are using a twocolor spread, particularly if one of the colors is white. Indicate that the color is spread using the huesaturationvalue color model.
HSV
If you are spreading by size, these scaling options display: Square Root Constant Log Inflection Scale by square root. Scale linearly. Scale logarithmically (base 10). Insert an intermediate color at a point between the top and bottom styles. The inflection point provides you with a second interpolation of the data. If you want to show profits of sales regions, for example, make the inflection point white (the default) and set it at the range where the minimum value is zero. Set the top style to black, and the bottom style to red. Values above the inflection point spread from black down to white to show profit, and values below the inflection point spread from white to red to show loss. Instead of the top and bottom styles spreading to each other, as in a twocolor spread, they spread to the inflection point color.
MapInfo Reference
95

Inflection at Specify an inflection point from the dropdown list. Choose none, for no inflection, or choose from 2 to 16, depending on the number of ranges you have. The number you choose indicates the placement of the inflection point. Display the Fill Style dialog and make changes in the inflection point style. Determine which attributes from the Style Buttons are applied to objects on the map. The button you choose in the Apply group overrides and in some cases, changes the selection you made in the Autospread group. All styles are applied. The color(s) shown in the style buttons is applied. The Autospread setting changes to color. The size(s) shown in the style buttons is applied. The Autospread setting changes to size. This radio button displays only when you are working with a map that contains point or line objects. When you apply color or size attributes to a thematic layer, the other attributes from other thematic layers are not affected. Since each layer retains its attributes, you can apply different attributes to each layer, so that when the layers are overlapped, a bivariate map results. For detailed information on creating a bivariate map, see Chapter 10 in the User's Guide.
Style Apply
All Attributes Color Size
The Map Legend

MapInfo creates a legend automatically when you create a map. Keep the default settings or customize the legend. Choose the Legend button in the Customize group box of the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog to customize the legend's display. See the following: Customizing a Legend.
Customizing Bar Charts

Customize the bar chart by using the Styles and/or Legend button. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you return to the dialog whose information you want to change. You can customize two areas on a bar chart map:
D D
Styles Legend
Customizing Bar Chart Styles The Customize Bar Styles dialog enables you to customize the styles on a bar chart map. Styles includes the height, width and color of the bars, the type of bar chart, the bars' scale, the charts' orientation, and other bar attributes including the border of the bars and the frame around the bars.
96
MapInfo Reference

To customize bar chart styles:
"
From. The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog displays. Choose Styles to display the Customize Bar Styles dialog.
Customize Bar Styles Dialog
Fields
Display the fields and expressions you are using to build each bar chart. There is one bar chart per record and one bar for each field or expression. Doubleclick on a field or expression to change the brush style for its corresponding bar. Choose Brush when a field or expression is selected in the list box to change the fill style for its corresponding bar. Choose the type of bar chart you want to create from the four choices in the group. Stack the bars for each variable on top of each other, creating a single bar chart. Determine the height of the bars is by using the ratio of the sum of the values for each record to the value in the at value box. Create a multibar chart, one bar for each field. Set the size of the bar charts.
Brush Chart Type Stacked Graduated Stack Multiple Bars Chart Dimensions
MapInfo Reference
97

Independent Scales (MultiBar) Create a multibar chart where the bars are scaled independently of one another. The same bar in each chart is scaled according to the ratio of the height in the Max Height box to the maximum value of its corresponding variable ignoring the at value setting. When you check Independent Scales, at value and the scaling options are grayed. If Independent Scales is clear, all the bars in each chart are scaled according to the ratio of the height in the Max Height box to the value in the at value box. Indicate the maximum height of a bar. The default height is .25 paper units, and the valid range is .1 to 10 inches. You can set the paper units in the System Preferences dialog. See the Preferences Command.
Height
If you choose Stacked, and you also check Graduated Stack in the Chart Type group box, the value in the Height box is the height, in paper units, of a stacked bar when the value in the at value text box is the sum of the bar's data values. If the bar chart is stacked but not graduated, then all the bars are the same height, as specified in the Height box, and the value in the at value box cannot be changed. If the bar chart contains multiple bars with identical scales for each bar, all bars are scaled according to the ratio of Height to at value. If the bar chart contains multiple bars with independent scales, at value is ignored and each bar is scaled according to the ratio of Height to its field's or expression's maximum value. at value Indicate the value at which a bar is a certain height. MapInfo will choose a value, or you can choose your own value. At value is grayed for stacked bars that are not graduated and for multibar/independent scales. Indicate the width, in paper units, of the bar chart. The valid range is .1 to 4 inches. Set the paper units in System Preferences. See the Preferences Command. Customize the map according to the specifications and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog.
Width
OK Cancel
98
MapInfo Reference

Options Orientation Display more customizing options. Choose one of the buttons in the Orientation box to set the bar chart's placement and direction with respect to the object's centroid in the base layer. Each button shows a different orientation. The base layer is the map view of the table on which you have chosen to base the map. For example, if you are making a thematic map with bar charts from the STATES table, the STATES layer is the base layer. The default is to place the bar chart above the object's centroid in the base layer.
Bar Attributes Border Pen Set the pen style for the borders of the bars and the frame. The Line Style dialog displays. The default pen style is a black, single width, solid pen. See Line Style Button/Command. Set the fill pattern of the rectangle that frames each bar chart. If you set the Frame Brush pattern to none (the N" pattern in the Fill Style dialog), there will be no frame around the bar charts. Choose one of the three scaling methods. Choose Square Root to scale by square root. Choose Constant to scale linearly. Choose Log to scale logarithmically (base 10). All bars are scaled to a zerosized bar for a zero value. The default setting is to scale by a constant, which is best for representing data in one dimension. Since you are only concerned with one dimension in bar charts, the height of the bars, we recommend that you stay with the default scaling method. If the data range is extremely large, or the numbers are related in an exponential way, graduate the size by log.
Frame Brush
Graduate Size By Square Root Constant Log
The Map Legend

MapInfo creates a legend automatically when you create a map. Keep the default settings or customize the legend. Choose the Legend button in the Customize group box of the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog to customize the legend's display. See the following: Customizing a Legend. 1. 2. Choose Next. The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog displays. Use this dialog to customize the map or legend. See the following: Customizing Pie Charts. Choose OK.
Customizing Pie Charts

Customize the map using the Styles and/or Legend button. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog you want to change.
MapInfo Reference
99

You may customize two areas on a pie chart map:
D D
Styles Legend
Customizing Pie Charts Styles The Customize Pie Styles dialog enables you to customize the styles on the pie map. The Styles include the diameter of the pies and the color of each pie wedge, the type of pie chart, the pies' scale, the charts' orientation, and other pie attributes such as the border of the pies, the angle at which the first pie wedge begins, and the order of the pie wedges (clockwise, counterclockwise). To customize pie charts: 1. 2. 3. From The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Styles to display the Customize Pie Styles dialog. Choose the items you want to customize and make the appropriate changes. Choose Options for additional customizing features.
Customize Pie Styles Dialog
Fields
Display the fields and expressions you are using to build each pie chart. There is one pie chart per record and one pie wedge for each field or expression. Doubleclick on a field or expression to change the brush style for its corresponding pie wedge. Displays when a field or expression is selected in the list box. Choose it to change the fill style for the field or expression pie wedge.
Brush
100
MapInfo Reference

Chart Type Graduated Half Pies Pie Dimensions Diameter Choose the type of pie chart. Make the size of the pies proportional to the sum of their components. Display half pies instead of full pies. Specify the size of the pies or half pies. Indicate the maximum diameter of a pie. The default diameter is .25 inches, and the valid range is .1 to 10 inches. You can set paper units in System Preferences. See the Preferences Command. When Graduated is checked in Chart Type, the value in the Max Diameter box is the diameter, in paper units, of a pie when the pie's sum is the sum specified in the for sum text box. If the pies are not graduated, then all the pies are the same diameter, as specified in the Max Diameter box, and the value in the for sum box is ignored. Displays when Graduated is checked in the Chart Type group box. Indicates that at this sum, the pie is the maximum diameter in size. Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Customize the map according to the specifications and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Display more customizing options. Set the pie's placement and direction with respect to the object's centroid in the base layer. Each button shows a different orientation. The base layer is the map view of the table on which you have chosen to base the thematic map. For example, if you are making a thematic map with pie charts from the STATES table, the STATES layer is the base layer. The default is to center the pie chart over the object's centroid in the base layer. Specify the pie chart attributes. Specify at what angle you want the first pie wedge to start. Specify the pie wedges to run clockwise. Set the style for the pies' borders. The Line Style dialog displays. The default is a black, single width, solid line. See Line Style Button/Command. Choose one of the three scaling methods for the pies on the map. Scale by square root.
for sum
Cancel OK Options Orientation
Pie Attributes Start Angle Clockwise Border Pen
Graduate Size By Square Root
MapInfo Reference
101

Constant Log Scale linearly. Scale logarithmically (base 10). This option is available when Graduated in the Chart Type group box is checked. All graduated pies are scaled to a zerosized pie for a zero sum. The default setting is to scale by square root. We recommend that you scale by square root for pie charts because the pies' area varies as a square of the radius.
The Map Legend

Customizing a Graduated Symbols Map

Customize a map using the Settings button. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog whose information you want to change. You can customize two areas on a graduated symbols map:
D D
Settings Legend
Customizing Settings The Customize Graduated Symbol dialog enables you to customize the settings for the graduated symbols map. The settings include the type of symbol that displays, its size and color attributes, and the data value on which to base the size of the symbol you choose. Additional options allow you to choose how you are going to scale the symbol, specify the symbol's orientation, and choose a symbol for negative values. To customize a graduated symbols map:
"
From the Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Settings to display the Customize Graduated Symbols dialog.
102
MapInfo Reference

Customize Graduated Symbols Dialog
Symbol
Display the current symbol. To change the symbol's attributes, click inside the Symbol style box to display the Symbol Style dialog. You can change the type of symbol, its color and size. Choose a symbol type from the palette. The default symbol is a circle. Choose a color from the palette. The default color is red. Choose the point size for the symbol. The default size is 36 points. Enter the data value on which you want to base the symbol's proportion. The size of the symbol at this value is the size you specified in the Symbol Attributes dialog. The symbols for the remaining data values will be sized using this value. The default setting is the maximum value of the data, with two significant digits. The symbols are scaled down to a one point symbol for zero values. Cancel customization and displays the Thematic Step 3 of 3 dialog. Customize the map according to the specifications and returns you to the Thematic Step 3 of 3 dialog. Display more customizing options. Choose a symbol for negative data values. Check to display the symbol for negative values on the map. Changing the attributes of the negative values symbol has no effect on the attributes of the positive values symbol. To change the negative values symbol's attributes, click inside the Symbol style box in the Negative Values group. The Symbol Style dialog displays. You can change the type of symbol, its color and size. The default is a 36 point/blue/circle.
Symbol Color Size at Value
Cancel OK Options Negative Values Show Symbol
MapInfo Reference
103

Graduate Size By Square Root Constant Log Choose one of the three scaling methods for the symbols on the map. Scale by square root. Scale linearly. Scale logarithmically (base 10). The default setting is to scale by square root. We recommend that you scale by square root in a graduated symbols map. When you scale by square root, MapInfo assigns symbol sizes in such a way that the area of a symbol is proportionate to the symbol's value. Thus, if one record's value is three times larger than another record's value, the larger record has a symbol that occupies three times as much area on the map. Cartographers have determined that this method of varying symbol sizes produces maps that result in more accurate visual representation of the data values which provide better comparisons.
The Map Legend

MapInfo creates a legend automatically when you create a map. Keep the default settings or customize your legend. Choose the Legend button in the Customize group box of the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog to customize the legend's display. See the following: Customizing a Legend.
Customizing A Dot Density Map

Customize the map using the Settings and/or Legend button in Step 3. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog whose information you want to change. You can customize on a dot density map:
D D
Settings Legend
Customizing Settings The Customize Dot Density Settings dialog enables you to customize the settings for the dot density map. The Settings include how many units each dot represents and the size of the dots. The color of the dots cannot be changed; it is always black. To access the Customize Dot Density Settings dialog:
"
From the The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog choose the Settings button to display the Customize Dot Density Settings dialog.
104
MapInfo Reference

Customize Dot Density Dialog
Each dot represents:____ units MapInfo makes an estimate of how many units each dot should represent and places this estimate in the text box. You can enter a different number. The greater the number of units each dot represents, the fewer the number of dots that appears per region. Dot Size OK Cancel Specify dot size. Choose either small dots (one pixel) or large dots (four pixels). Customize the map according to the specifications and return to the Thematic Step 3 of 3 dialog. Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog.
The Map Legend

Customizing An Individual Values Map

Customize the map using the Styles button. To return any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you return to the dialog whose information you want to change. You can customize two areas on an individual values map:
D D
Styles Legend
MapInfo Reference
105

Customizing Styles The Customize Individual Values dialog enables you to customize the line, fill, or symbol used to shade each individual value. To access the Customize Individual Values dialog: 1. 2. 3. From the The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Styles to display the Customize Individual Values dialog. Choose the items you want to customize and make the appropriate changes. Choose OK.
Customize Individual Values Dialog
Individual Value Style
Indicates each data value, up to 255. Indicates the style for each value. To change the style for a value, highlight the value in the list. Choose the Style button. A style dialog, appropriate for the type of map object with which you are working (e.g. points, regions, lines), displays, enabling you to change the style attributes for that value. Please note that the default symbol for an individual values thematic map corresponds to the symbol from the base table. See Region Style, Line Style, and Symbol Style Buttons/Commands. Apply all attributes of the style to the theme. Apply only the color attribute to the theme. Check to use colors in the styles. Clear to use gray scale. The default is to use color styles.
All Attributes Color Use Color Styles
106
MapInfo Reference

OK Cancel Customize the map according to the specifications and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Cancel customization and display the Thematic Step 3 of 3 dialog.
The Map Legend

Customizing a Continuous Thematic Shading/Grid Map

Customize a Continuous Thematic Shading/Grid map using the Settings and/or Styles button in the Create Thematic MapStep 3 of 3 dialog. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog whose information you want to change. To customize a grid thematic map: 1. 2. From the The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Settings and/or Styles. Descriptions of each option follow. Choose the items you want to customize and make the appropriate changes.
MapInfo Reference
107

Settings Display the IDW Interpolator Settings dialog. The interpolator produces a raster grid file which displays as a raster table in a map window. Cell Size Defines the width and height of a grid cell in distance units. Grid cells are square so both width and height are specified with one value. Note that when you change the cell size, the Grid Dimensions Control is updated to reflect the new dimensions. Defines the exponential influence of nearby data points on the value calculated for each grid cell. Increasing the exponent decreases the influence of data points the further they are from a grid cell. Defines the maximum distance in distance units between one point and its neighboring data points. This distance determines if these points are considered in the distance weighting average. Defines the distance beyond the source table's bounding rectangle by which to expand the resultant grid.
Exponent
Search Radius
Grid Border
Styles The Grid Color dialog displays. A preview of the inflection points, the color spectrum bar, and minimum and maximum options display. Specify inflection values and colors. Add Click to add additional inflection settings. The maximum value is copied and added to the bottom of the Value list. Double click the color box to display the Color dialog and change the color for one of the identical inflection points. Remove a value from the display.
Remove Adjustments
Select a color; or define a color using the Define Custom Colors dialog. To edit the value, leftclick twice over the value: enter a new value. Or, type a value into the value edit control. To edit a percentage, type a number into the percentage edit control. Contrast Brightness Gray Scale Adjust the contrast in the image; the default contrast setting is 50%. Adjust the brightness of the image; the default brightness setting is 50%. Check to display a legend in shades of gray instead of color.
108
MapInfo Reference

Interpolator Interpolator The MapInfo Professional method of interpolation is Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW). The interpolator produces a raster grid file which displays as a raster table in a map window. Apply specifications. Return to previous dialog.
OK Back
Customizing a Legend
To customize the legend for a thematic map, choose the Legend button in the Thematic Step 3 of 3 dialog. The Customize Legend dialog displays; customize the legend's title, subtitle, fonts, or range labels. You also can specify whether or not a legend displays for this thematic layer. To customize a legend:
"
From the The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Legend. The Customize Legend dialog displays.
Customize Legend Dialog
Legend Title Title Font Type the title for the legend. The maximum length is 255 characters. Click the Title Font button to choose the font for the title of the legend.
MapInfo Reference
109

Subtitle Subtitle Font Into Window Type the subtitle for the map. A subtitle is not required. Click the Subtitle Font button to choose the font for the subtitle of the legend. No Legend Window: Do not display a theme or cartographic legend. If the Option: Show Theme Legend Window is selected, click on the option to display the theme legend window. New Legend Window: Create a new cartographic legend using the specified options. Legend of (title): Add the theme information to the existing cartographic legend. Select a border style. Choose to replace any manually entered titles or labels with the defaults.
Border Style Restore Default Title and Labels Range Labels Font Edit selected range here
Choose the font for the range labels. Make changes to the selected range label in this box. The maximum length is 80 characters.
Changing the range values in the legend does not change the range values in a ranged or individual values map. To do so, display the Ranges dialog by either choosing Modify Thematic Map from the Map menu, or doubleclicking anywhere in the legend window. Either method will display the Modify Thematic Layer dialog, where you can access the Ranges button and modify the ranges. # objects Show this Range Show Record Count Indicates the number of objects in the selected range. Check to have the selected range appear in the legend. Check to display the number of records in each range. This option is available only for ranged and individual value thematic maps. Cancel the customizing and returns to the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog. Customize the legend according to the specifications and display the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog.
Cancel OK
See:
Functions Modify Thematic Map New Map Window Command User's Guide: Chapter 10
110
MapInfo Reference
Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports
Use Crystal Reports to:
D
create fullfeatured reports including full customization of the output and the ability to save the report for future use.
Crystal Reports is available when:

D
Open an Existing Report is always available. Create a New Report is available when at least one MapInfo table is open.
Menu Path
D
Tools > Crystal Reports
Creating a New Report

1. 2. Choose Tools > Crystal Reports. Choose New Reports to create a report. If there is more than one table open, the Choose Table dialog displays. Select one table only; you cannot create a report using a raster grid file or seamless map sheets. The Seagate Crystal Report module displays. Other tables may be inserted in the report using the Crystal Report Insert feature. Make appropriate selections to create the report.
For full documentation on creating a report, see the online Crystal Report User's Guide and online Help.
Saving a Report
When you save a report, a .rpt extension is assigned to the report. The report is assigned the default name: (tablename) report.rpt. You may rename the report using the Crystal Reports SaveAs feature. All .rpt files are saved in the directory specified in Preferences > Options> Directories > Crystal Report files.
Opening an Existing Report

"
Choose Tools > Open Report. Select the report from the dialog.
Tables with columns containing underscores, temporary column, or titles over 8 characters do not display in the default Crystal Report. Use the Expert Wizard to access columns containing these elements. Note that columns containing an underscore "_columnname" will not display in the default preview mode. Additionally, MapInfo ODBC drivers cannot be used with the Crystal Reports Database > Add Database option.
MapInfo Reference
111
Custom Colors Command Options Menu
Custom Colors Command Options Menu

Use Custom Colors to:
D
access a palette containing a range of colors that you can use or customize. The color palette is accessible from the dialogs displayed when working with line, region, symbol, and text objects. Custom colors is always available. Options > Custom Colors
Custom Colors is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Creating Custom Colors

To create custom colors: 1. 2. Choose Options > Custom Colors. The Define Custom Colors dialog displays a color palette. Click on a color; customize any color on the palette. See the following: Define Custom Colors Dialog. 3. Click Define. The Pick Color dialog displays. or Doubleclick on the color to display the Pick Color dialog. Pick Colors Dialog Hue, Sat, Val Specify values for Hue, Sat (Saturation), Val (Value) by clicking on the arrows to change a value one increment at a time or type the appropriate value. Specify values for Red, Green, and Blue by clicking on the arrows to change a value one increment at a time or type the appropriate value. Choose OK to customize the color according to the specifications. The Define Custom Colors dialog redisplays, with the customized color on the palette in place of the original color. Display the Pick Color dialog. See the preceding: Pick Colors Dialog. Display appropriate Help topic. Saving the new color automatically adds it to the palette in place of the original color. Choose this option to save the current palette for future MapInfo sessions. If the box is clear, the palette is in effect for the current session only. You might want to record the color settings for the original colors before making changes; once the customized colors are saved, you cannot automatically return to the original colors.
Red Green Blue
OK
Define Help Save Colors
112
MapInfo Reference
Cut Command Edit Menu

Use Cut to:
D
cut selected text and objects and move them onto the clipboard.
Cut is available when:

D
an editable is selected in an active Browser window, and at least one row is selected or a Layout window is active, and at least one object is selected or a Map window is active, a layer is editable, and at least one object in the editable layer is selected or the MapBasic window is open and active with text selected.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Cut
Cutting and Moving Text and Objects to the Clipboard

When you cut from a Map, Layout, Browser, or MapBasic window, MapInfo moves what you have cut to the clipboard. Anything that was on the clipboard is replaced by the new contents; the previous text/objects are deleted. Before using the Cut command, you may want to specify what is cut and moved to the clipboard. See the following: Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the Clipboard. To cut and move text and objects to the clipboard: 1. 2. Select the text and/or objects you want to cut. Choose Edit > Cut. The selected objects are moved to the clipboard. These objects remain on the clipboard until some other objects are cut and moved to the clipboard and take their place. Text and/or objects that you are cutting from the map must be selected. Edit handles appear around selected objects. When data is displayed as a map or table, you can cut an object from the table through the Browser window, even when its map layer is not editable.
Copying from the Clipboard

To copy the contents of the clipboard to the appropriate location:
MapInfo Reference
113

1. 2. Position the cursor in the layout, map, or table where you want the selected objects copied. Choose Edit > Paste. When pasting into a Map, the object is pasted to the currently editable layer. If you are pasting an object with geographic coordinates, the object is pasted to those coordinates. For example, when you are pasting a copy of New York State onto a new map, New York is pasted to the position where New York belongs. When text is currently selected, it is replaced by the text being pasted into the table.
Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the Clipboard

The result of cutting and copying objects to the clipboard depends on the settings in the Copy to Clipboard option in the System Preferences dialog. To specify what is cut or copied to the Clipboard:
"
Choose Options > Preferences > System Settings. The System Setting Preferences dialog displays.
Copy to Clipboard Dialog Copy TEXT to clipboard Copy BITMAP to clipboard Copy Metafile to clipboard OK Cancel Help Check to specify that you want only text copied to the clipboard. Clear to specify that you do not want text copied to the clipboard. Copy only graphic objects as a bitmap; bitmaps are nonscalable representations of the object. Copy graphic objects as a metafile; metafiles are scalable representations of an object. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
Copy Command Paste Command
114
MapInfo Reference
Delete Table Command Table > Maintenance
Delete Table Command Table > Maintenance

Use Delete Table to:
D
remove a table and all its component files.
Delete Table is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Table > Maintenance > Delete Table
Using Delete Table

To delete a table: 1. 2. Choose Table > Maintenance > Delete Table. The Delete Table dialog displays. Choose the name of the table to be deleted from the Delete table dropdown list. A prompt displays indicating that the table will be permanently deleted. When you delete an ASCII, dBASE DBF, Lotus, or Excel file opened in MapInfo, you delete the .tab file MapInfo created and the original file. 3. Choose OK. The specified table is deleted.
When you delete a raster image, MapInfo renames its associated .tab file (MapInfo Registration File) without deleting the actual raster image file.
MapInfo Reference
115
Delete Target District Command Redistrict Menu
Delete Target District Command Redistrict Menu

Use Delete Target District to:
D
delete the current target district. Deletes one row from the Districts Browser window; it does not delete the objects assigned to that district.
Delete Target District is available when:

D
a redistricting session is in effect.
Menu Path
"
Redistrict > Delete Target District
Using Delete Target District

The Delete Target District command deletes the district that is currently designated as the target district. Any objects that belong to the target district are reassigned to the Unassigned" district. The Unassigned" district becomes the target. It is not possible to delete the Unassigned" district.
See:
New Redistrict Window Command User's Guide: Chapter 14
116
MapInfo Reference
Digitizer Setup Command Map Menu

Use Digitizer Setup to:
D
configure MapInfo for digitizing.
Digitizer Setup is available when:

D
a Map window is active and a compatible or supported digitizing tablet is installed.
Menu Path
"
Map > Digitizer Setup
MapInfo Digitizer Support

MapInfo directly supports the following digitizers and digitizer interfaces:
D D
Virtual Tablet Interface, versions 2.10 or later (VTI) Wintab
Obtain the digitizer driver from Digitizer Technology (VTI) or the tablet manufacturer for Wintab. Usually, the tablet includes a Wintab driver. Digitizer Technology Company provides both sales and support for the Virtual Tablet Interface. Contact:
Digitizer Technology Company 16541 Redmond Way, Suite 195C Redmond, WA 98052 USA Tel: (206) 8683246
Product support is free and offered during the hours of 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM Monday through Friday, Pacific Time.
Digitizer Setup
Activating the MapInfo Digitizer Setup
When a Map is open and a digitizer is properly configured, the option Digitizer Setup" displays in the Map Menu. If this menu option is not available, MapInfo is not recognizing the digitizer. See the following: Common Digitizing Problems and Solutions. To access the Digitizer Setup dialog:
"
Choose Digitizer Setup from the Map menu. The Digitizer Setup dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
117
Setting Up a Map on a Tablet

Make sure the map/drawing to be digitized is securely fastened to the tablet. If the map moves, control points will need to be reconfigured. The box at the top of the Digitizer Setup dialog displays a list of control points that you created. The box displays the X and Y coordinates for each point. The coordinates are displayed in the units set with the Map Units menu. The box also indicates the error for each point. The error is in paper units specified in Options > Preferences > System Settings. You need to specify at least four control points for MapInfo to calculate an error value. When the error for a given point is too large, respecify the point by clicking Edit or doubleclicking on the control point. The Digitizer Setup dialog allows you to:
D D D
set the projection of the map being digitized. set control points. configure the Draw and Close buttons on the digitizer puck.
Perform these steps in the order listed.
Specifying the Projection

When you digitize a paper map, you need to specify the projection used for that map. Most paper maps indicate their projection, generally in the legend. You can use any of the projections MapInfo provides, or you can create your own coordinate system. See the MIPro User's Guide, Appendix H: Creating Your Own Coordinate System. It is very important to set the correct projection before you begin digitizing because you cannot adjust it afterwards. When you do not correctly specify the projection of the paper map, the digitizing is not accurate. When digitizing from an aerial photograph, you should generally use the Longitude/Latitude projection. The Projection button in the Digitizer setup dialog allows you to access the Choose Projection dialog where you specify the projection of the map you are digitizing.
"
Choose the Projection button. The Choose Projection dialog displays. Choose the projection of the paper map. See Projection Button.
118
MapInfo Reference
Specifying Map Units

Use the Map Units dropdown list in the Digitizer Setup dialog to specify a value from a list of map units. 1. Choose the Map Units dropdown list. A list of units displays. Degrees" is always available for earth maps. Depending on the projection you are using, another unit, the native unit for that projection, may be available. When digitizing a nonearth map, you have a wider range of values. 2. Choose the unit that matches the coordinate units on the paper map. When the appropriate unit is not in the list, check to make sure you specified the correct projection. In order to digitize a nonearth map, the active Map must also be nonearth.
Setting Control Points

Once you have set the projection, you need to set control points. Set control points so that MapInfo knows how to interpret the puck position. To set a control point indicate a position on the digitizer tablet by pressing a button on the puck. Type in the map coordinates that correspond to that point. MapInfo determines the map values from these coordinates. You should use at least four control points when digitizing a paper map. When you are digitizing from an aerial photograph, you might want to use twenty or more control points. MapInfo allows you to create as many control points as you need. You do not need to have the map in any special orientation when you digitize. However, once you start digitizing, you should not move the map for the duration of the session. We recommend that you tape the map firmly to the tablet to make sure it does not move during digitizing. When you choose four or more control points, MapInfo makes an error calculation estimating the possible error in the setup. These error values are very important. They are the only indication of whether or not the setup is correct. The accuracy of these control points will directly affect the accuracy of the digitized map. It is best to select control points which aren't too close and don't share any Latitude or Longitude coordinates. In general, more control points yield more accurate results. See the following: Dealing with Error Estimates.
Picking and Adding a Control Point

The buttons in the Control Points box (Digitizer Setup dialog) allow you to add, edit, remove, or clear all control points. 1. Choose the Add button. The Pick Tablet Point dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
119

2. Choose a point on the tablet. As you move the puck around the tablet, the Pick Tablet Point dialog displays where that point is on the tablet. When you click a digitizer button, you select that tablet location as a control point. 3. Click a digitizer button or press <Return> to cancel. If have selected a point on the digitizer tablet as a control point, the Add Control Point dialog displays. Use the Add Control Point dialog to enter a name for the control point (optional) and X, Y coordinates.
Entering a Name for a Control Point

To enter a name for a control point: 1. 2. 3. Type a name for the control point in the Label box. Type the coordinate values for the point in Map X and Map Y. Repeat the process at least three times. When four or more control points are properly added, an error value will appear in the control points section of the digitizer setup dialog box. Most paper maps specify longitude and latitude in degrees, minutes, and seconds. See Appendix D: Converting Coordinates. Additionally, the MapBasic sample LongLats program displays a dialog that converts coordinates. 4. Choose OK.
Editing a Control Point

If you make a mistake when entering a control point, you can edit it. High error values are often an indication that such a mistake was made. 1. 2. Choose the point from the list in the Digitizer Setup dialog. Choose Edit. The Edit Control Point dialog displays. Change the control point's Label and its Map X and Map Y points by typing new values. 3. 4. Press the Table X Y button and the Pick Tablet Point dialog is displayed. Pick a point on the digitizer tablet and click any digitizer button. The tablet's coordinates are changed accordingly.
Removing a Control Point

To remove a control point: 1. 2. Choose the point from the list in the Digitizer Setup dialog. Choose Remove. The control point is removed.
120
MapInfo Reference
Removing All Control Points

To remove all control points:
"
Choose Clear All. All control points are removed and the projection is reset to the projection of the active map.
Configuring Digitizer Buttons

To configure the buttons on your digitizing puck, click Buttons in the Digitizer Setup dialog. The dialog that displays will instruct you to click the digitizer button that you want to use as the main button and then to click the digitizer button that you want to use as the doubleclick button. If you only have one button on the puck, you will use it for both drawing and completing the polyline/polygon. A single click enters a point when drawing an object; a doubleclick completes the object. Note: If you use the same button for singleclicking and doubleclicking, MapInfo may mistake rapid singleclicks as a doubleclick.
Digitizer Mode
MapInfo automatically turns digitizer mode on after you have entered three or more control points. You do not have to exit from digitizer mode to do something else. You can now do anything in digitizer mode that you can do in mouse mode: open tables and windows, use any of the tools, use the mouse, etc. You can still, however, turn digitizer mode off and on with the D key. MapInfo will not turn digitizer mode on if you have only entered one or two control points or if your control points run in a straight line. The details of the new digitizer mode functionality is explained below.
Using Tools with the Digitizer

You can use any of the tools with the digitizer. (You are no longer limited to just the drawing tools, as you were in version 3.0.) For instance, you can zoom in on the area you are digitizing with the Zoom in tool, use the Ruler tool to measure distances, or add nodes, etc. without ever having to leave digitizer mode.
Mouse Cursor
You can use the mouse and the digitizer at the same time. The mouse is always active, even when digitizer mode is on. So you do not need to exit from digitizer mode to use the mouse. The mouse cursor is always visible, and can always be controlled with the mouse. Its appearance depends on which tool is selected. You can also control the mouse with the digitizer using the mouse emulation capability of the digitizer driver (this must be configured outside of MapInfo). If digitizer mode is off, or if digitizer mode is on
MapInfo Reference
121

and a Map window is not active, the digitizer controls the mouse. If a Map window is active and digitizer mode is on, the digitizer controls the digitizer cursor.
Digitizer Cursor
The digitizer cursor is a large cross hair that covers the entire width and height of the Map window. Its appearance does not change to indicate which tool is selected. It is always a large cross hair, making it much easier to see. The digitizer cursor is always visible as long as a Map window is active. For example, if you decide to open a Browser window while you are in digitizer mode and work in the Browser, digitizer mode will still be on, but because the Browser is now the active window, you won't see the digitizer cursor. The status bar only displays the digitizer cursor location if you choose to display it (Map>Options). This is different than MapInfo 3.0, where the cursor location always displayed in the status bar while digitizer mode was on.
Accepting or Canceling the Digitizer Setup

Implement or cancel the digitizing setup from the Digitizer Setup dialog.
"
Choose OK. The Digitizer Setup you have specified is implemented. Choose cancel to cancel the selected options.
Digitizing Your Map

To begin digitizing: 1. 2. Select a drawing tool. Press the D key. The cursor displays as a large cross hair that covers the entire width and height of the Map window.
Dealing With Error Estimates

When you digitize a map and error values are high, the resulting map table may be too inaccurate for reliable use. MapInfo makes the error calculation by determining the relative positions of the control points based on the map coordinates you entered. It then can determine where those points should be on the tablet. The error is the difference between where a point should be on the tablet and where you actually clicked. An error value is displayed for each point. When you are digitizing from a paper map, these error values should be quite small; they should be on the same scale as the resolution of the digitizer. In most cases errors should be in thousandths or hundredths of an inch. Errors approaching a tenth of an inch are probably too large. When the error is too high, you should:
"
Check the projection to make sure it matches the projection printed on the map. Click on Projection in the Digitizer Setup dialog. The Choose Projection dialog displays with the
122
MapInfo Reference

current projection highlighted. If that is not the correct projection, scroll through the list and choose the correct projection Once you change the projection, MapInfo recalculates the error.
"
When the problem is not with the projection or when changing the projection only slightly reduces the error, then you have to check individual control points. Start with the points with the highest error: choose Edit in the Digitizer Setup dialog. Correct the control points until the error is acceptably small. When you are digitizing from a photograph, you should use many control points, preferably over twenty. In general, the more control points you use, the smaller the error.
Digitizer Setup Dialog
Control Points Add
Buttons that allow you to add a control point, edit a control point, remove a control point, or clear all control points. Access the Pick Tablet Point dialog. This dialog displays the location of the puck as you move it. Pressing a digitizer button selects the location as a point and the Add Control Point dialog is displayed. See the preceding: Picking and Adding a Control Point. Access the Edit Control Point dialog. This dialog allows you to edit the control point selected (highlighted) in the Digitizer Setup dialog. See the preceding: Editing A Control Point. Remove the control point that is selected (highlighted) in the Digitizer Setup dialog. Remove all the control points. The projection is then reset to the projection of the active map window. Choose the map unit that matches the coordinate units on the paper map. If the appropriate unit is not in the list, check to make sure you specified the correct projection.
Edit
Remove Clear All Map Units
MapInfo Reference
123

Projection Access the Choose Projection dialog where you specify a projection for the paper map. See the preceding: Setting the Projection, and the Projection Button. Access dialogs that display information for configuring the digitizer buttons. Digitizer buttons are configured so you can enter points for drawing objects and complete polylines and polygons. See the preceding: Configuring Digitizer Buttons.
Buttons
Pick Tablet Point Dialog Options

As you move the puck around the tablet, the Pick Tablet Point dialog displays where that point is on the tablet. When you click a digitizer button, you select that tablet location as a control point.
Add Control Point Dialog Options

Label, Map X, Map Y Enter a name for the control point (optional) and X, Y coordinates. See the preceding: Entering A Name For A Control Point.
Edit Control Point Dialog Options

Label, Map X, Map Y Tablet XY Change the control point's Label and its Map X and Map Y points by typing new values. Access the Pick Table Point dialog to change the tablet position for a control point.
Pick Tablet Point Dialog Options

Tablet X, Tablet Y The Pick Table Point dialog displays the tablet position for a control point and allows you to change that position. You change the tablet position by moving the digitizer puck where you want it and clicking a digitizer button.
Set Digitizer Buttons Dialog Options #1

This dialog is displayed when you click the Buttons button in the Digitizer Setup dialog and provides information for choosing a digitizer button as the draw button. Draw and close buttons are configured to prevent the inadvertent closure of a polyline/polygon due to a misinterpreted double click. Digitizer pucks have anywhere from 1 to 16 buttons. It is best to select draw and close buttons that are different from each other. Buttons that are opposite each other are often read as the same kind of click in windows. If you have two or more buttons on the digitizer puck, you can designate which button performs each function.
124
MapInfo Reference

If the digitizer puck has only one button, you must use it for both drawing and completing polylines and polygons. In this case a single click enters a point when you are drawing an object. A doubleclick completes a polyline or polygon. When you click the button you want to use for drawing objects, another Set Digitizer Buttons dialog is displayed with information on choosing a digitizer button for completing polylines and polygons.
Set Digitizer Buttons Dialog Options #2

This dialog is displayed when you specify the button you want to use for drawing objects in Set Digitizer Buttons Dialog Options #1. This dialog provides information on choosing a digitizer button for completing polylines and polygons.
Common Digitizing Problems and Solutions

Before you begin digitizing, each of the following conditions must be met:
D D D
a drawing tool is selected. the Map window is active. the D key is pressed.
The D key toggles digitizing mode on and off. When in digitizing mode, the cursor will appear as a large cross hair. Digitizing does not take place without this cursor. If you draw on the screen without the digitizer cursor, then coordinates entered into the package are relative to where the cursor is on screen. The cursor, even though driven by the digitizer tablet, is just a screen pointer until digitizing mode is entered. Once in digitizing mode, the control point transformation is put into effect, and coordinate information is taken from the tablet, not the screen. Make sure the coordinate system, projection, map orientation and map units are known and properly set in MapInfo. Improper initial setup may lead to inaccurate results which can only be corrected by starting over. The Projection button in Digitizer Setup refers to the paper map to be digitized, whereas Map > Options Projection button refers to the map you are digitizing into. It is possible to digitize a map with one projection into a map with a different projection, as long as the Digitizer Setup projection matches the paper map projection, and the Map > Options > Projection matches the projection you want to digitize into. Make sure there are at least three known coordinate locations on the map/drawing which can be used to set control points for wrong calculation four coordinate locations must be indicated. The more control points that are added, the more accurate the transformation from tablet to map will be.
MapInfo Reference
125

High error when configuring control points
D D D D
Control points were not properly entered. The map has moved while setting control points. The control points are inaccurate. The map being digitized is inaccurate.
Map is coming out backwards.

D
Positive and negative control point information may be entered incorrectly.
Check orientation of control points, positive and negative may be reversed. Its useful to have the Map Options dialog box display cursor location while in digitizing mode. When the cursor is placed over a control point in digitizing mode, the cursor location should match the coordinates of the control point. When switching into digitize mode, the cursor disappears. Change active zoom and center of window to represent the zoom and center of the map/drawing being digitized. Often using a control point as the center of the window, toggling into digitize mode and placing the cursor directly over the control point will make the cursor appear. Digitizer cursor jumps off screen when digitizing. Increase the active zoom to better reflect the zoom being digitized. You must be in Digitizer mode (press D) but the digitizer cursor does not have to be visible in the Map window. View entire layer may help if working with a preexisting map. It is also possible that the tablet is damaged. Distances don't measure properly. The only way to measure a distance of a segment on a map being digitized is to digitize the segment into a map window and then use the ruler tool to measure the segment. Dragging the digitizer puck over the segment with the ruler tool selected will not work since screen info and not tablet info is being measured. If a digitized segment measures incorrectly, then there is a setup problem which could range from map properties (units, projection, etc.) to control points, to inaccurate digitizing. Digitizer setup is unavailable even though the digitizer is connected.
D D D D D D
The tablet being used is not supported by the version of MapInfo. The tablet is not turned on or is incorrectly connected to the computer. The system.ini file is not properly configured. The tablet is improperly configured. The wrong tablet/driver combination is being used. There is a problem with the tablet, the comm port, or the connecting cables.
If the tablet works with other applications or is being used as a mouse pointer in Windows, and none of the above problems apply, there may be a problem with support of the tablet. If possible, configure the
126
MapInfo Reference

tablet to emulate different tablets supported by MapInfo. Make sure the system.ini file is updated to reflect the changes, and restart Windows each time a change is made to the system.ini. The box at the top of the Digitizer Setup dialog displays a list of control points that you created. The box displays the X and Y coordinates for each point. The coordinates are displayed in the units set with the Map Units dropdown list. The box also indicates the error for each point. The error is in paper units specified in System preferences. To learn how to specify system preferences, see the Preferences Command.
See:
MapInfo Reference
127
Drag Button
Drag Button
Use the Drag button to:
D
drag an entire MapInfo map window into an OLE container application, such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel. Dragging a map provides the same effects as Edit > Copy Map Window followed by Edit > Paste or Edit > Paste Special in an appropriate application.
The Drag button is available when:

D
a map window is active.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Drag button
Using the Drag Button

Use the Drag button to place a MapInfo map into an OLE container application. A map dragged from MapInfo Professional provides the embedded OLE object, MapInfo Map. See the MapInfo Map section of the User's Guide for description of functionality provided. A map dragged from 16 bit MapInfo, a metafile, is a static image. To use the Drag Button: 1. 2. Click on the Drag button in the Main Toolbar. The cursor displays as a drag icon.
Place the drag icon anywhere in the map window and click. The Begin Drag cursor displays: .
3. 4.
Drag the map to the new location; the Doing Drag
cursor displays.
Release the mouse button; the map is dropped on the container at that location. The behavior of the drop operation is defined by the container; most will insert a copy of the map.
If the application into which you are dragging a map cannot accept the map object, the No Drop cursor displays:
See:
User's Guide Chapter 11
128
MapInfo Reference
Drawing Toolbar
Drawing Toolbar
Use Drawing Toolbar to:
D
access the buttons for drawing and modifying objects on a map or layout.
Drawing Toolbar is available when:

D
a Map, Layout or Browser window is editable and the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the Drawing Toolbar.
Menu Path
D
Options > Toolbars
Using the Drawing Toolbar

The Drawing Toolbar contains tools and commands that are used to create and edit map objects, including: to draw lines, polylines, ellipses, regions, arcs, rectangles and text; changing to reshape mode and add nodes. It also contains a frame tool when working in a Layout window. For an onscreen button description, click and hold the mouse button to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars. To choose from the Drawing Toolbar:
"
Click on the appropriate button. The button is highlighted. Add Node button Access the Add Node tool which allows you to add a node to regions, lines or polylines when you are in Reshape mode. Access the Arc tool which allows you to draw an arc the size and shape of one quarter of an ellipse. Access the Ellipse tool which allows you to create elliptical and circular objects. Access the Frame tool which allows you to create frames in the Layout window to display maps, graphs, browsers, legends, and Info tool, statistics, message windows. Access the Line tool which allows you to draw straight lines.
Arc button
Ellipse button
Frame button
Line button
MapInfo Reference
129
Drawing Toolbar
Line Style button Access the Line Style dialog where you can change the style, color and width of line objects. Access the Polygon tool which allow you to draw polygons (a closed, connected sequence of lines). Access the Polyline tool which allows you to draw polylines (an open, connected sequence of lines). Access the Rectangle tool which allows you to draw rectangles and squares. Access the Region Style dialog where you can change the fill pattern, color and background, and the border style, color and width of region objects. Allows you to toggle in and out of Reshape mode. Reshape allows you to edit regions, polylines, lines, arcs and points by moving, adding, and deleting nodes that define them. Access the Rounded Rectangle tool which allows you to draw rounded rectangles and squares. Access the Symbol tool which allows you to place point symbols on a map like push pins."
Polygon button
Polyline button
Rectangle button
Region Style button
Reshape button
Rounded Rectangle button Symbol button
Symbol Style button Access the Symbol Style dialog where you can change the style, color and size of a symbol object. Text button Access the Text tool which allows you to add titles, labels and annotation to maps and layouts or edit data in a Browser window. Access the Text Style dialog where you can change the font typeface, size, style, color and background of text objects.
Text Style button
For more information, see the appropriate button entry.
Autoscrolling
When you use a tool in the Map or Layout window, the window scrolls if you drag the tool outside of the window boundaries. The window will continue to scroll until you release the mouse or move the cursor back into the window. Press Esc to stop scrolling; the tool remains active. To cancel the tool, press Esc after the scrolling has stopped. Autoscrolling works with any tool that can be dragged; it does not work with singleclick tools, such as the Grabber or Info tools.
See: Toolbars Command, User's Guide: Chapter 4 130
MapInfo Reference
Ellipse Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Ellipse Button to:
D
access the Ellipse tool. The Ellipse tool creates ellipses and round objects.
The Ellipse Button is available when:

D
a Map window with an editable layer is active or a Layout window is active.
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar> Ellipse button
Drawing an Ellipse
To draw an ellipse: 1. 2. 3. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Ellipse button. The cursor displays as a cross. Move the cursor where you want to begin creating the ellipse. This point will be the center of the ellipse. Press and hold down the mouse button. Drag the mouse. The shape appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you move the pointer. 4. Release the mouse button when the ellipse has the appropriate shape.
Press <CTRL> to begin drawing the ellipse from a corner of the minimum bounding region for the ellipse, instead of out from the center of the ellipse.
Drawing Circles
Press <SHIFT> while using the Ellipse tool to create perfect circles. Release the mouse button before <SHIFT> when the circle reaches the appropriate size. Use <CTRL> with <SHIFT> to create perfect circles that begin at the corner of the bounding region.
Specifying Ellipse Attributes

To set the center, horizontal, and vertical coordinates of an ellipse:
D
Using the Select tool, doubleclick on the selected object. or Select the ellipse with the Select tool and choose Edit > Get Info. The Ellipse Object dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
131

Ellipse Object Dialog
Center X and Y X Radius Y Radius Style
Specify the XY coordinates of the ellipse's center. Specify the horizontal distance from the center of the ellipse to the rightmost or leftmost point. Set vertical distance from the center of the ellipse to the topmost or bottommost point. Display the Region Style dialog. Specify the pattern, color, and background of the fill and style, color, and width of the border. See Region Style Button/Command. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Help
132
MapInfo Reference
Erase Command Objects Menu
Erase Command Objects Menu

Use Erase to:
D
remove a portion of a map object using the currently selected object as the eraser. The portion of the target object covered by the erasing object is removed.
Erase is available when:

D D
a Map window is active and a layer is editable, and an object is set as the target and an object is selected that will act as the eraser.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Erase
Erasing an Object
Erase either closed objects (polygon regions, ellipses, rectangles, rounded rectangles) or open objects (polylines, lines and arcs) using the Erase command. You cannot use Erase on points or text objects. To erase an object or a portion of an object: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Map > Layer Control. Make the layer editable. Select Objects > Set Target. Set the object(s) to be the target for editing. Create and select the erasing object (or use objects from same or another layer). The erasing object must be closed. Choose Objects >Erase. At the Data Disaggregation dialog, set the field functions to be either blank, value or area proportion. Click OK.
The portion of the target object covered by the erasing object will be erased.
Data Disaggregation
Data disaggregation removes the data associated with the portion of the map object that is eliminated during the Erase operation. For instance, if you edit the West Coast region using Erase to remove the state of Nevada, you can disaggregate the data associated with Nevada as well. The Data Disaggregation dialog displays after you initiate the Erase command. For each field choose whether the data from the target region is maintained (by choosing Value), removed (by choosing Blank) or proportioned (by choosing Area Proportion). For details on using the data disaggregation dialog, see Split Command.
See:
Cut Command, Split Command, User's Guide: Chapter 16
MapInfo Reference
133
Erase Outside Command Objects Menu

Use Erase Outside to:
D
remove a portion of a map object using the currently selected object as the eraser. The portion of the target object not covered by the erasing object is removed.
Erase Outside is available when:

D
a map window is active and a layer is editable and an object is set as the target and an object is selected that will act as the eraser.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Erase Outside
Erasing the Outside of an Object

You can erase either closed objects (polygon regions, ellipses, rectangles, or rounded rectangles) or open objects (polylines, lines and arcs) using the Erase Outside command. You cannot use Erase Outside on points or text objects. The erasing object must be selected. The difference between Erase Outside and Erase lies in which portion of the map object is removed. Erase Outside removes the portion of the target object that lies outside the erasing object, while Erase removes the portion that lies inside the eraser. To erase the outside of an object: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose Objects > Set Target. Set the object(s) to be the target for editing. Create and select the erasing object (or use objects from same or another layer). The erasing object must be closed. Choose Objects > Erase Outside. At the Data Disaggregation dialog, set the field values to be either blank, value or area proportion. Click OK.
The target object will now be erased except where the erasing object was located.
134
MapInfo Reference
Data Disaggregation
Data disaggregation removes the data associated with the portion of the map object that is eliminated during the Erase Outside operation. For example, if you edit a sales territory using Erase Outside to remove all but a 25 mile zone around the home office, you can remove all the data from the target object (your sales territory) except that which is proportional to the zones area. The Data Disaggregation dialog displays after you initiate the Erase Outside command. For each field choose whether the data from the target region is maintained (by choosing Value), removed (by choosing Blank) or proportioned (by choosing Area Proportion). For details on using data disaggregation, see Split Command.
See:
Set Target Command Split Command User's Guide: Chapter 16
MapInfo Reference
135
Exit Command File Menu
Exit Command File Menu

Use Exit to:
D
quit MapInfo.
Exit is available when:

D
Exit is always available.
Menu Path
"
File > Exit
Exiting MapInfo
To exit MapInfo:
"
Choose File > Exit. If you made changes to a table and did not save them, you will be prompted to save the changes. Choose a table to close. Since each window has only one cosmetic layer; that layer contains all edits to cosmetic objects. Each window can contain multiple tables; thematic and label edits are saved on a per table basis. Prompts that display reflect the type of objects the window contains.
136
MapInfo Reference
Export Command Table Menu

Use Export to:
D
export a table to another format. You can export graphics and tabular data to MapInfo format (MIF) and AutoCAD DXF files. Only tabular data can be exported to delimited ASCII and dBASE DBF format.
Export is available when:

D
a table is open.
Menu Path
D
Table > Export
Exporting a Single Table

To export a single table:
"
Choose Table > Export. If more than one table is open, select the table to export from the Export Table dropdown list.
Export Table Dialog Export table Export Choose a table to export from this list. Display the Export Table to File dialog.
MapInfo Reference
137

The Export Table to File dialog displays.
Save in:
Type or select the filename you want to export. This box lists files with the extension you select in the File Format box. To see a list of files with a particular extension type an asterisk, a period and the three character extension. For example, if you want to see all files with a .dbf extension in a directory, type .dbf. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.dbf
Save as type:
Specify the type of file export to perform: MapInfo Interchange Format MIF (default), Delimited ASCII, AutoCAD DXF, dBASE DBF. The file extension will reflect the file format type. For more information, see the following specific file format descriptions. Export the file in the specified format. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Save Cancel Help
138
MapInfo Reference
MIF Export
MapInfo Interchange Format (MIF) is an ASCII file format that fully describes a MapInfo database. Both graphic and tabular data are exported into MIF files. The graphic data is in a file with a .mif" extension, and the tabular data is in a file with a .mid extension. MapInfo Interchange Format files can be translated into other formats with other programs. See the MIPro User's Guide, Appendix J: MapInfo Data Interchange Format.
ASCII Export
MapInfo also allows you to export tabular data to a delimited ASCII file. This file can later be edited with a text editor or imported into another software package. When you export to ASCII, MapInfo displays the Delimited ASCII Information dialog, where you choose the delimiter character. You can also choose to have the first row of the ASCII file become column titles. MapInfo also displays a dialog used to indicate the character set for the exported ASCII file. Different platforms use different character sets. MapInfo must know the platform where you are going to use the exported file in order to provide the appropriate character set. No graphical data is exported to ASCII. Delimited ASCII Information Dialog Delimiter Tab Other File Character Set Choose Tab when you want tabs for the field delimiters. Specify the delimiter you want to use. Type the character in the box. Comma is the default choice. Specify the character set used by the file. Several different character sets are commonly used in computing; the specific file character set must be identified. Since these different character sets are used for different platforms, MapInfo prompts you to indicate the platform on which a given DBF file was created. Choose this option when you want to treat the first line of the file as column titles. MapInfo exports the file. Cancels the dialog options.
Use first line for column titles OK Cancel
MapInfo Reference
139
AutoCAD DXF Export

It is not necessary to set a coordinate transformation when exporting. However, you need to set a coordinate transformation in the following situations:
D D
When you work with the map in a coordinate system not supported by MapInfo. When you are going to work with the map in a system whose coordinates are geographically meaningless. For example, if you are going to work in a drawing or illustration package, the package's coordinates have no relation to the earth coordinates of the map.
Using the DXF Export Information Dialog
The DXF Export Information dialog displays after you have selected Table > Export, chosen a file name, and clicked on Export. Choose to create a block for every region in the map that contains Preserve MultiPolygon Regions multipolygons. As DXF Blocks Preserve Attribute Data ASCII or Binary DXF File Number of Decimal Places Choose to export tabular information from the database in the form of DXF attributes. Preserving Attribute Data slows down the export process significantly. Define the format of the output file. ASCII is the default. Binary files are processed much faster. Define the number of decimal places when exporting floating point numbers into an ASCII file. This button is disabled for binary files. Acceptable values for this parameter can be between 0 and 16. The default value is 6. Display the Set Coordinate Transformation dialog.
Set Transformation
140
MapInfo Reference

Version 13 Version 12 OK Cancel Help Choose to export file compliant with AutoCAD version 13. Choose to export file compliant with AutoCAD version 12. MapInfo exports the file. Cancel the dialog options. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Set Coordinate Transformation Dialog

Choose to specify a custom coordinate transformation. If you set a coordinate transformation, the coordinates in the DXF file will be the same as the native projection for the map (i.e., longitudelatitude, Lambert Equal Area, any of the State Plane systems, or any other MapInfo projection).
MapInfo Objects as DXF Entities

MapInfo objects are converted into DXF entities as follows: MapInfo object DXF Entity singlepolygon region multipolygon region circular arcs closed polyline block containing closed polylines; the block is named REGION0, REGION1, arc scaled block containing the arc; the block is named ARC0, ARC1, etc. closed polyline circle closed polyline (roundness is lost) noncircular arcs rectangle rounded rectangle circular ellipse noncircular ellipse text line scaled instance of a block containing an ellipse; the block is named ELLIPSE line underlined text is handled by prefixing a %%u code point point polyline polyline magenta, and white). All lines are converted to continuous, dashed, or dotline types. Fonts are not preserved, and all text is exported into the AutoCAD STANDARD font.
All MapInfo colors are translated to the closest primary colors in DXF (red, yellow, green, cyan, blue,
When attribute data is preserved, a block is created for every object. The blocks are named BLK0, BLK1, BLK2, etc. The attributes inside the blocks are given the same names as the field names in the database.
MapInfo Reference
141
dBASE DBF Export

MapInfo can export tabular data into dBASE DBF format. Exporting to DBF creates only the .dbf file. No graphical data is exported to dBASE. When you save a table in DBF format, you create a .dbf file, as well as some other files. These other files contain graphic information including MapInfo indices and other information that MapInfo uses. MapInfo also displays the dBASE DBF Information dialog that you use to indicate the character set for the exported DBF file. Different platforms use different character sets. MapInfo must know the platform where you are going to use the exported file in order to provide the appropriate character set.
dBASE DBF Information Dialog Options

File Character Set Specify the character set used by the file. Several different character sets are commonly used in computing; the specific file character set must be identified. Since these different character sets are used for different platforms, MapInfo prompts you to indicate the platform on which a given DBF file was created. MapInfo exports the file. Cancel the dialog options.
OK Cancel
Exporting a Map in a Different Projection

You may want to export a map in a projection that is different from its native projection. To do this, first create a copy of the table, and save it with a new projection. To save a copy of a map with a new projection: 1. Choose File > Save Copy As. The Save Copy of Table dialog displays. Choose the map table you want to copy. If more than one table is open, the Save Table dialog displays; choose the table to be saved. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Type a name for the copy. Choose the format, and path of the saved copy. Click the Projection button. The Choose Projection dialog displays. Choose a projection for the copy. Choose OK. Choose Save.
Follow the directions for Exporting A Single Table, and export the copy of the table. When there is more than one table open, the Export Table dialog displays.
See: Appendix J, Import
142
MapInfo Reference
Expression Dialog
Expression Dialog
Use the Expression dialog to:
D
formulate mathematical and alphanumeric expressions for several MapInfo applications.
Menu Path
Access Expression through the following paths:
D D D D D D
Query > Select > Assist Table > Update Column > Assist Map > Create Thematic Map > Next > Expression (Field dropdown list) Map > Layer Control (choose a noncosmetic layer) > Choose Label > Expression (Label with dropdown list). Objects > Buffers (from column dropdown list) Browser > Pick Fields
Specifying an Expression
To specify an expression: 1. Click the Assist button. or Choose Expression from the dropdown list. The Expression dialog displays. 2. Type the expression directly into this box or choose from the dialog dropdown lists.
Expression Dialog
Type a numeric expression Column Operators
Type the expression directly into the box or build the expression from dialog dropdown lists. Choose a column. The column titles from the active table display. Choose an operator. Examples of operators include : +, , and, or, contains.
MapInfo Reference
143
Expression Dialog
Functions Functions, including Area, Sin, Year, have zero or more parameters and return a value. The returned value may be used in an expression, such as another function. See Functions. Enter the expression and return to the dialog you started from. Cancel the expression and removes the dialog. Choose to check the syntax of the query and tells you whether it is correct. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Verify Help
Where Expressions Can Be Used

Use the Expression dialog to formulate mathematical and alphanumeric expressions in several MapInfo dialogs, see the preceding: Menu Path. Expressions are used in the following commands: Select, Update Column, Create Thematic Map, and Layer Control (the Label With Column dropdown list in the Label Options dialog). The expression serves a different purpose in different commands. For example: In the Select command, the expression states a condition that a record in a table must meet in order to be included in a query table. In Update Column, and in Select Columns SQL Select the expression calculates a value that is then entered into a table. In Shade by Value (Thematic Map), the expression calculates a value that is then displayed on a map. In Label With Column, use expressions containing string functions to customize labels. There are two categories of expression: Expressions that must evaluate to true or false. Expressions that calculate some value. Expressions that evaluate to true or false always have a comparison operator and may have multiple clauses connected by logical operators. Use these expressions for selecting objects in Select. Expressions that calculate some value never have a comparison operator and generally do not have multiple clauses, unless the value being calculated is stored in a logical field. Use these expressions to calculate values for Thematic Maps, Update Column, and Label With Column in Layer Settings.
Entering Specific Values (Constants) Into Expressions

When entering specific character strings, numbers, and dates into expressions, you need to observe the following conventions.
144
MapInfo Reference
Expression Dialog
Character Strings
When typing a particular string into an expression you must enclose it in double quotes. MapInfo then treats it as a string rather than as a column name. For example, the first two strings shown below are valid string constants, while the last two strings are not. Orange New York Orange New York
Numbers
When entering specific numerical values, do not use commas, dollar signs, or any characters other than numerals, decimal points, and the minus sign for negative numbers. Use E to denote numbers in exponentiation.
Dates
Dates consist of a month, a day, and an optional year. The year is specified by two or four digits and enclosed in double quotes. If the year is not specified, the date defaults to the year set on the computer's clock. The components of a date are separated by hyphens or slashes. The following are valid data constants: 1-20-92 01/20/1992 1/20
Mathematical Operators

operator's symbol, name, example, and how the operators handles different data types. + plus A+B Date + Number > Date some number + some number > Float Number + Date > Date some integer + some integer > Integer minus A B (subtraction) A (negative) Date Number > Date Number Date > Date some integer some integer > Integer some number some number > Float * times A*B some integer *some integer > Integer some number * some number > Float / ^ divided by A/B A^B some number / some number > Float some number ^ some number > Float exponentiation
Mathematical operators are often used in creating expressions. The following chart shows the
MapInfo Reference
145
Expression Dialog
The following calculations are possible: Adding numbers to dates to yield another date Subtracting a number from a date to yield another date Subtracting a date from a date to yield a number When you add numbers to dates or subtract numbers from dates, MapInfo treats the numbers as specifying a number of days. When you add or subtract a week, you use the number 7. When you add or subtract a month, you use 30 or 31. When MapInfo subtracts a date from a date, the resulting number indicates a number of days.
String Operators
+
Strings must be enclosed in double quotes. For example: Ms. " + Last_Name

concatenation connects strings and string expressions.
When MapInfo evaluates this as part of an expression, it places Ms. " in front of each last name. The string constant (Ms. ") is in quotes. Similarly, Hello, " + world" gives you Hello, world."
Comparison Operators
Comparison operators are often used in creating expressions. The following chart shows the comparison operator symbols and a description.

+ > < equals <> not equal less than greater than >= _ greater than or equal to less than or equal to <= like _ a wildcard for a single character % like % a wildcard for multiple characters
146
MapInfo Reference
Expression Dialog
Logical Operators
And", or", and not" are logical operators. They are used to combine expressions in Select and the Where Condition clause of SQL Select. MapInfo treats these expressions as a test that it applies to each record in the table. For each test it gets a yes/no (true/false) answer. MapInfo uses the logical operators to tell it how to combine the individual yes/no answers into an overall yes/no answer: Does the current record meet the selection condition? and or

is true when both of its arguments (the expressions it joins together) are true. A record must satisfy both of these conditions to be selected. is true when either one, or both, of its arguments (the expressions it joins together) are true. A record need satisfy only one of these conditions to be selected. It is also selected when both of its conditions are satisfied. not is true when its argument (the expression it applies to) is false. A record is selected when it does not meet the stated condition.
Geographic Operators
MapInfo has several geographic operators. Use them to select objects on the basis of their spatial relationship to some other object. MapInfo has a special keyword you use with geographical operators: obj or object. This keyword tells MapInfo that it has to get values based on the graphical objects in the table rather than the tabular data. The geographic operators go between the objects being specified. Select the geographic operators from the Operators menu. The geographic operators are: Contains: Object A Contains object B if B's centroid is anywhere within A's boundary.
Contains Entire: Object A Contains Entire object B if B's boundary is entirely within A's boundary. Within: Object A is Within object B if its centroid is inside B's boundary.
Entirely Within: Object A is Entirely Within object B if A's boundary is entirely within B's boundary. Intersects: Object A Intersects object B if they have at least one point in common.
Keywords
Use the Expression dialog to formulate mathematical and alphanumeric expressions in several MapInfo dialogs. See the preceding: Menu Path. MapInfo supports the use of the keywords any", all", in" and between". These keywords must be typed into expressions.
MapInfo Reference
147
Expression Dialog
Use any" to select any item in a set of items. ABBR = any (AL, MN, TX) Any is true of any record where the state is Alabama, Minnesota, or Texas. To understand the use of all" consider this expression: ABBR <> all(AL, MN, TX) This statement says: Give me all orders where the state does not equal Alabama, Minnesota, or Texas. It selects all orders except those from Alabama, Minnesota or Texas. Consider what happens when we issue the following: ABBR <> any(AL, MN, TX) The following example shows the use of in": ABBR in(AL, MN, TX) In this case in" is equivalent to =any" and not in" is equivalent to <>all". Finally, consider these two examples which illustrate between": PRICE between 50000 and 100000 (PRICE between 50000 and 100000) or (PRICE between 150000 and 200000)
Operator Precedence
When MapInfo evaluates expressions, it needs to know which components of an expression to evaluate first. This is called precedence. By convention, certain operators are assigned different levels of precedence. Those with the highest level are evaluated first. The following table lists MapInfo's operators in the order in which they are evaluated. Operators at the same level of precedence are evaluated from left to right.
Highest Priority:
parenthesis exponentiation negation multiplication, division addition, subtraction geographic operators, comparison operators Not And
Lowest Priority:
Or
See:
The MIPro User's Guide, Appendix D, Functions, User's Guide: Chapter 9, 11, 14
148
MapInfo Reference
Find Command Query Menu

Use Find to:
D
locate and mark individual objects or addresses.
Find is available when:

D
a field is indexed and a table is mappable and a table displays in a Map or Browser window.
Menu Path
"
Query > Find
Locating an Object or Street Address

When you issue the Find command for the first time in a session, the first Find dialog displays. Use this dialog to define what table to search. When you have defined the search, the second Find dialog displays. Use this dialog to specify what data to look for. If you have previously used the Find command in the session, you only need to specify what data to look for. The tables must be mappable and indexed. If you need to specify these components, see File > New Table (Import) or Table > Maintenance > Modify Structure. To locate an object or street address:
"
Choose Query > Find. The first Find dialog displays.
Find Dialog
MapInfo Reference
149

Search table For Objects in Column Specify a table to search from. Choose the column with location information for the objects for which you are searching. Only indexed columns display in the dropdown list. Display the Find Options dialog. This dialog provides additional options when an exact match cannot be found.
Options
Optional
Use this option when you are trying to find an object or address whose name is not unique and is used for other objects or locations. Refine Search with Table using Boundary Name Column Mark with Symbol Choose a refining" table (the table must contain boundaries, region objects"). Choose a refining" column; the column containing the name of the boundary. Click the symbol to display the Symbol Style dialog. Choose the symbol you want and designate its point size and color. See Symbol Style Button. Display the second Find dialog that allows you to specify what data to find. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Help Find Options Dialog
150
MapInfo Reference

Try substitutions from MAPINFOW.ABB" Make substitutions from the abbreviation file. You can make several kinds of additions to this file. These additions deal with various kinds of geocoding problems. See the following: Using the MapInfo Abbreviations File and the MIPro User's Guide, Appendix B: Advanced Geocoding. Match an address number to the nearest address range. This is useful when there is no range for the address, either because the address falls in a gap or beyond the range end.
Use the closest address number
Use a match found in a Searches for a street name and address name first. Then it finds different boundary out what boundary the address is in. When address is in only one boundary, but not the one you selected in the Refine option, MapInfo locates to that boundary. Find Dialog (second dialog)
The name of the column that you specified in the first Find dialog is listed to the left of the list box (i.e. Street). When locating a street address, type # Name", such as 30 Elm St" or 1045 Templar Blvd". These conditions are specified in the Country Preferences in Geocoding Preferences. First column name Enter the name of the object or address for which you are searching. The name of the column specified in the first Find dialog is listed to the left of the box. If an exact match is not found, Exact match not found" displays with a list of close matches from which you can choose. If you have used the Refine option in the first dialog, a second column name is listed in the dialog. Type the name of the refining boundary. If an exact match for the object you specified cannot be found, possible matches are listed. Click Up or Down to move to other pages. To choose a specific entry from the list, click on that entry.
Second column name
List box
MapInfo Reference
151

Respecify OK Cancel Help Returns to the first Find dialog, to choose another table and/or column, or specify Find options. Initiates the Find. Cancels the Find. Display appropriate Help topic.
Using the MapInfo Abbreviations File

MapInfo contains a text file called MAPINFOW.ABB [MapInfo Abbreviations]. which has a list of common street abbreviations, such as St" for Street" and Blvd" for Boulevard." These help MapInfo to obtain exact matches. To familiarize yourself with the MAPINFOW.ABB file, you can look at its contents in the Notepad Text Editor. To use the abbreviations file during the Find process: 1. 2. If you have used the Refine option in the first dialog, a second column name is listed (i.e. ZIP). Type the name of the object or address you are searching for in the box. Type the name of the refining boundary in this box. If MapInfo cannot find an exact match for the object you specified, it lists possible matches. 3. 4. 5. Click Up or Down to move to other pages. Choose a specific entry from the list. Click OK. The object will be found in the map or browser.
Locating Street Intersections

You also can use the Find command to locate street intersections. When you type the name of the object to be found in the second Find dialog (enter object name to find), separate the two items by a double ampersand (&&). For example, to find the intersection of Congress Street and Christie Street, type: Congress Street && Christie Street". If the found" object is not on the current Map window, MapInfo positions the object in the Map window and designates the object with the symbol specified in the Find dialog. When the object is in the current Map window, the contents of the Map does not move, but MapInfo still designates the object with a symbol. When you are working with a browser, MapInfo scrolls through the browser until the designated object is the first record in the window.
See:
Find Selection Command
152
MapInfo Reference
Find Selection Command Query Menu
Find Selection Command Query Menu

Use Find Selection to:
D
automatically find and display the selection in all windows.
Find Selection is available when:

D
a Browser window is active and at least one row is selected. or a Map window is active and at least one object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Query > Find Selection
Finding and Displaying a Selected Object

To find and display a selected object: 1. 2. Select the appropriate object(s). Choose Query > Find Selection.
If one or more objects are currently selected: Find Selection updates all windows so that the selected item(s) appear in Browser and Map windows. If one object is selected: All browsers display the selected record at the top of the browser, and any map containing the object displays the selected item. Use Map > View Entire Layer > Selection to display all selected items at once.
See:
Find Command Select Command SQL Select Command
MapInfo Reference
153
Frame Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Frame button to:
D
create frames in a layout. Each frame can display a map, graph, browser, map legend, graph legend, Info window, statistics window, message window, or can be an empty frame.
The Frame button is available when:

D
a layout is active.
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Frame button
Creating Frames in a Layout

To create a frame in a layout: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Frame button in the Drawing Toolbar. The cursor displays as a cross. Move the cursor to where drawing,should begin. Click and hold down the mouse button dragging the cursor diagonally until the dashed box outlines the area where you want the frame. Release the mouse button. When there are no windows open, an empty frame displays with No Window". When there are one or more open windows, the Frame Object dialog displays. Frame Object Dialog
154
MapInfo Reference

Window Bounds X1, Y1, X2, Y2 Choose a different window to display in the frame. X1 and X2 are the left and right boundaries,respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries respectively. Type new values for these coordinates in the Paper & Layout Units in the Options > Preferences > System dialog. These coordinates represent positions on the layout, where 0,0 is the upperleft corner. The coordinate values of the frame's center. Left to right distance of the frame. Top to bottom distance of the frame. Activate the checkbox to resize the frame's border to any dimension. When the checkbox is not active, you can resize the frame, but the borders are determined by MapInfo's determination of the natural borders of the frame's contents. Displays the current scale for a frame displaying a Map. You can type in a new scale. When you do so, MapInfo resizes the frame so that it displays the map at the specified scale. Placed the window within the frame. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Center X, Y Width Height Fill Frame with Contents
Scale on Paper:
OK Cancel Help
For most types of objects, the frame may appear to be smaller than the area you outlined. However, the border surrounds a predetermined area. For example, for a frame containing a Statistics window, height is determined by the font size. In all cases, the upper left corner of the border is at the upper left corner of the outlined area.
Changing a Frames Contents

Once you have created a frame, you can treat it much like any other graphic object. You can change its size and position, its line style and fill pattern, and you can cut, copy, and paste it. To change the contents of a frame: 1. 2. 3. Doubleclick the frame. The Frame Object dialog displays. Choose a new window from the dialog's window dropdown list. Click OK. The existing window is replaced with the new one.
Changing a Frames Border and Background

Change the line style for a frame's border, background pattern and fill by using Options > Region Style when the frame is selected.
MapInfo Reference
155
Changing a Maps Proportions in a Layout

When you want to change the proportions of a map, resize the original map window. MapInfo automatically transmits that change to the layout frame. You cannot change a map's proportions by moving the edges of the frame over the map. MapInfo simply resizes the map, preserving its view.
Changing a Layout Scale

You can use a frame's Frame Object dialog to size the map so that it has a specific scale. For example, when you want one inch to equal 50 miles, type 50 into the Scale box and the map is rescaled so that one inch on the Layout page equals 50 miles. To reset the map scale: 1. 2. 3. Click the layout, making it the active window. Doubleclick the map frame to bring up the Frame Object dialog. Set the Scale on Paper to the appropriate value.
Using the Zoom-in and Change View Buttons

When the map no longer fits into your layout and you do not want to change the scale, then you need to reduce the view in the map window and reset the scale in the layout. To reduce the view, use the Zoomin or the Change View buttons. MapInfo changes the view in the Map and then changes the contents of that Map's frame in the Layout.
Displaying a Map Legend in a Layout

Both cartographic and theme legends display at the same size they are in the cartographic and theme legend windows, using the same fonts and sizes set for the window. When you size a legend's frame so that it is smaller than the legend, it crops the legend rather than shrinking it to fit. You can add a theme legend to the Layout even when no theme legend is displayed elsewhere on the screen. You can add a cartographic legend only after creating the cartographic legend using the Map > Create Legend option.
Displaying a Graph in a Layout

Graphs display in a frame so that they completely fill the frame. They display according to the proportions of the frame, not the Grapher window. The frame displays graph text at the point size the text has in the Graph window. When a frame is substantially smaller (as measured by the frame's rulers) than the Graph it displays, the text may get squeezed. The symbols used to display a data series in line graphs and XY graphs also are displayed at the point size set for them in the Grapher window. You should be careful about the frame size of a line or XY graph with many points.
156
MapInfo Reference
Displaying a Browser in a Layout

A Browser window displays with the column headings at the top of the frame. Immediately below, it displays the contents of the table, starting with the row and column at the upperleft corner of the Browser window. It displays as many columns and rows as it can fit in the frame, regardless of how many are displayed in the table. When you resize the frame, the number of rows and columns displayed are adjusted accordingly. However, fields removed from the table with the Pick Fields command are not displayed in a table frame since the display matches the contents of the Browser window. The number of rows and columns that can be displayed in a frame depends on font size and column width. The frame displays text using the font style and size for that Browser window. When you want a different type style in the frame, you have to make the change in the Browser window. When you use smaller type, you can get more rows and columns in a frame. You also can manually adjust column width in a Browser window without affecting the underlying field size for the base table. Do this by clicking and dragging the short vertical bars separating the column names in the Browser window.
Specifying Frame Object Attributes

To specify frame object attributes:
"
Use the Select tool and doubleclick the object. The Frame Object dialog displays.
See:
New Layout WIndow Command User's Guide: Chapter 17
MapInfo Reference
157
Functions
Functions
Use Functions to:
D
create expressions.
The Functions List is available when:

D
the Expression or SQL dialog displays.
Using Functions
An expression can include one or more function calls. In the following table, num is any numeric expression (e.g. 5), str is any string expression (e.g. km"), and obj is any object expression (e.g. States.obj represents the object column" in the States table).
Math Functions
Abs( num ) Cos( num ) Int( num ) Maximum( num , num ) Minimum( num , num ) Round( num1, num2 ) Sin( num ) Tan( num ) Returns the absolute value of a number. Returns the cosine of a number; num is in radians. Returns the integer (whole number) portion of a number. Returns the larger of two numbers. Returns the smaller of two numbers. Returns a number (num1), rounded off to the nearest value of num2 (e.g. if num2 is ten, then num1 is rounded to the nearest ten). Returns the sine of a number; num is in radians. Returns the tangent of a number; num is in radians.
Date Functions
CurDate( ) Day( date ) Month( date ) Weekday( date ) Year( date ) Returns the current date. Returns the dayofmonth (1 31) portion of the date. Returns the month (1 12) portion of the date. Returns the dayofweek (1 7) portion of the date; 1 represents Sunday. Returns the year portion (e.g. 1994) of the date.
String Functions
Chr$( num ) DeformatNumber$( str ) Returns a character that corresponds to a character code (e.g. Chr$(65) returns the string A"). Reverses the effect of the FormatNumber$ function, returning a string that does not include thousands separators.
158
MapInfo Reference
Functions
Format$( num , str ) FormatNumber$( num ) Returns a string representing a formatted number. Example:Format$( 12345.678, "$,#.##") returns $12,345.68". Returns a string representing a formatted number. This function is simpler to use than Format$, but it gives you less control over formatting (e.g. you always get thousands separators). Searches the string str1 starting at character position num, and looks for an occurrence of the string str2. Returns the position where str2 was found, or zero if not found. To start search at beginning, use a num value of one (1). Returns a lowercase version of the string str. Returns the first num characters of the string str. Returns the number of characters in a string. Trims any spaces from the start of str and returns result. Returns a portion of the string str starting at character position num1 and extending for num2 characters. Returns a string with proper capitalization (first letter of each word capitalized). Returns the last num characters of the string str. Trims any spaces from the end of str and returns result. Returns a string approximation of an expression. Returns an uppercase (all capitalized) version of str. Returns the numeric value of the string; for example, Val("18") returns the number 18. The string that you pass should not have formatting, such as thousands separators; to remove formatting, call DeformatNumber$.
InStr( num , str1 , str2 )
LCase$( str ) Left$( str , num ) Len( str ) LTrim$( str ) Mid$( str, num1, num2 ) Proper$( str ) Right$( str , num ) RTrim$( str ) Str$( expr ) UCase$( str ) Val( str )
Functions That Return Geographical Calculations

Area( obj , str ) CentroidX( obj ) CentroidY( obj ) Returns the area of the object. The str parameter specifies an area unit name, such as sq mi" or sq km". Returns the xcoordinate of the object's centroid. Returns the ycoordinate of the object's centroid.
Distance( num_x , num_y , num_x2 Returns the distance between two locations. The first two , num_y2 , str ) parameters specify the x and y value of the start location; the next two parameters specify the x and y value of the end location; the str parameter is a distance unit name, such as mi" or km". Perimeter( obj , str ) Returns the perimeter of the object. The str value specifies a distance unit name, such as mi" or km". Only region, ellipse, and rectangle objects have nonzero perimeters.
MapInfo Reference
159
Functions
Functions That Return Objects

Buffer( obj , num_res , num_width , str ) Returns a region object representing a buffer. num_res specifies the resolution, in terms of nodes per circle; num_width specifies the radius of the buffer; str is the name of the distance unit (e.g. "mi" or "km") that applies to num_width. Returns a point object located at the centroid of obj. Returns a circle object. num_radius specifies a distance in miles. Returns a line object. Returns a point object.
Centroid( obj ) CreateCircle( num_x, num_y, num_radius ) CreateLine( num_x , num_y , num_x2 , num_y2 ) CreatePoint( num_x , num_y )
Each of these functions returns a graphical object. If you type an Update command into the MapBasic window, you can use these functions to create objects for every row in your table. For example, if your table contains x1, y1, x2, and y2 columns, the following command creates a line object for every row in your table: Update tablename Set Obj = CreateLine(x1, y1, x2, y2) Caution: This Update command redefines every graphical object in your table. You may want to copy your table, and practice on a copy.
160
MapInfo Reference
Geocode Command Table Menu

Use Geocode to:
D
assign point objects to rows in a table. Data in the record (i.e. street address, ZIP Code, county, state) is used to match against a map (i.e. street map, ZIP Code map, country map, state map) to determine where the point for that record should be located.
Geocode is available when:

D
at least two tables are open (the table you are geocoding against and the table you are geocoding) and the table that you are geocoding against is mappable (graphic objects attached to records) and has an indexed field and the table is not readonly.
Menu Path
"
Table > Geocode
Geocoding
To geocode a table: 1. 2. Open at least one mappable table. This table serves as the reference data in the geocoding operation (a street map with addresses indexed). Index this reference table on the field you use for geocoding. There are options in File > New Table and Table > Maintenance > Table Structure that allow you to index the table and make it mappable. 3. 4. Open the table for which points will be created. It must be a different table than the reference table. Choose Table > Geocode. The Geocode dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
161

Geocode Dialog
Geocode table using column
Choose the table to be geocoded. Choose the column containing the location information (addresses, county names, ZIP Codes, etc.) that is the basis for the geocoding. Choose a column from the target table that refines the geocoding to the relevant area (e.g., counties within a certain state, streets in a certain municipality, etc.). It is not necessary to include a boundary column when geocoding. Once this option functions in conjunction with the option to Refine Search With Table, you cannot pick it until you have picked a refining table. See the following: Refining the Geocoding Search. Choose the table that is the source of the geographic information, us_zips, sf_strts, etc. (reference table). Choose the column containing the name of the objects.
boundary column
Search table For objects in column Optional Refine search with table Using boundary name column
Choose a table containing region objects, Zip Codes, counties etc. See the following: Refining the Geocoding Search. Choose the refining column.
Mode
Automatic Interactive Geocode without any intervention. See the following: Geocoding In Automatic Mode. Intervene to have items appropriately coded. You should first geocode a table in Automatic mode and then go though it again in Interactive mode. See the following: Geocoding In Interactive Mode.
162
MapInfo Reference

Symbol box Click to activate the Symbol Style dialog to specify the symbol and its point size and color. Each point that is geocoded displays as this symbol when the layer is displayed. Executes the geocoding. Cancels the the dialog options. Click to display the Geocode Options dialog. This dialog contains various options used to refine the geocoding process. See the following: Geocoding Options Dialog. The default settings are chosen to give you the best results for most situations. For more information, see the MIPro User's Guide, Appendix B: Advanced Geocoding. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Options
Help Geocode Options Dialog
MapInfo Reference
163

Display additional column When geocoding in Interactive mode, it is often useful to view information other than the address being geocoded. You might, for example, want to see the company name while geocoding. You can choose a column to view by choosing one from the Display additional column list box. When MapInfo geocodes, it generates a code for each record. Use this code to diagnose failures and to see what options MapInfo used to get matches. You can designate a column where MapInfo should place this code; this column should be a numeric field. You can then examine the codes and formulate a strategy for further geocoding. See Appendix B: Advanced Geocoding. When you are geocoding in interactive mode and have a lot of records, you may not be able to complete the job in a single session. When you come back in later sessions, you do not want to retry records that have failed. Check this box so that MapInfo skips those records. This option is available only when you use a result code column. MapInfo automatically skips records that have already been geocoded.
Put Result Code in Column
Skip records that already failed to geocode
When an exact match cannot be found Try substitutions from MAPINFOW.ABB" Use the closest address number Make substitutions from the abbreviation file. You can make several kinds of additions to this file to deal with various kinds of geocoding problems. Match an address number to the nearest address range in those cases where there is no range for the address, either because the address falls in a gap or is beyond the range. Use a different boundary to refine geocoding. MapInfo searches for a street name and address name first. Then it finds out what boundary the address is in. When it is in only one but not the one, you chose in the Refine option, MapInfo geocodes to that boundary. When it is in more than one boundary, but none of them are the ones you selected, MapInfo will not geocode the record. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Use a match found in a different boundary
OK Cancel Help
Refining the Geocoding Search

When geocoding, you might refer to objects whose names are used for other objects that do not interest you. (For example, a city name that is common to two or more states.) To eliminate this problem, refine the search by selecting another column, typically from another table. To further refine the search, specify the state for each city, rather than just the city name.
164
MapInfo Reference

If your area of interest isn't distinct enough for MapInfo to determine automatically the position or location, you will need to refine your geocode search by specifying a particular boundary that contains your area of interest. This will provide MapInfo with geographic locations on where to position your points.
Geocoding in Automatic Mode

When Geocoding is in Automatic mode, only exact matches are geocoded. When some of your data fails to match exactly (due, perhaps, to typographical errors), you need to geocode in Interactive mode to match the near misses manually. It is generally best to do two passes through your table, with the first pass set on Automatic and the second pass set on Interactive. This approach takes less processing time. To geocode in the automatic mode:
"
Choose Automatic from the First Geocode dialog
Automatic geocoding displays addresses while geocoding. You can click cancel to interrupt processing. When processing is interrupted, MapInfo didn't finish geocoding all records but you can still display the points that are geocoded. If you let MapInfo finish the process, you can click OK when it is done. When MapInfo finishes geocoding, the results are displayed in a summary dialog. When there are ungeocoded records, you need to geocode the remaining records interactively.
Geocoding in Interactive Mode

When you choose Interactive geocoding, MapInfo displays the Interactive Geocode dialog. Interactive Geocode Dialog Allows you to manually match each address that could not be matched in automatic mode. First column name Second column name Enter target table's field value. The name of the column that you specified in the first dialog is listed to the left of the box. If you have used the Refine option in the first dialog, a second column name is listed in the dialog. Type the name of the refining boundary. If MapInfo cannot find an exact match, it lists possible matches in this box. Click Up or Down to move to other pages. To choose a specific entry from the list, click on that entry. Scroll through the source table list to find a match.
List box
Up/Down
MapInfo Reference
165

Ignore OK Cancel Help To manually pick the match:
"
Override the match suggested by MapInfo and continue geocoding. Assigns the highlighted object and continues geocoding. Cancels Geocoding. Display appropriate Help topic.
Click a value in the list box (for example, ADELE CT"), and click OK to match the target table's field value (ADELLE CT." ) Note the two Ls.
This does not change the record in the table; it is used only to find a match. To leave a record ungeocoded: click Ignore. To cancel geocoding: click Cancel. Use the Up and Down buttons to move in the list of source addresses.
Finding and Examining Ungeocoded Records

Once you have completed a geocoding session, you might want to find all the ungeocoded records and examine them to see what the problems are. Use Query > Select to do this. When you do not have a column for result codes, you should select all records that meet this condition: not obj Obj" (or object") is a keyword MapInfo uses to refer to a graphic object. Records that have been geocoded have an object, and therefore fail to meet this condition. Records that have not been geocoded meet the condition. When you have specified a result code, select all records meeting this condition: result_code < 0
See:
The MIPro User's Guide, Appendix B Create Points Command User's Guide: Chapter 7
166
MapInfo Reference
Get Info Command Edit Menu
Get Info Command Edit Menu

Use Get Info to:
D
display the Object Attribute dialog for a selected object in a map and layout. Use the Object Attribute dialog to view and change geographic and graphic attributes.
Get Info is available when:

D
a Map or Layout window is active and one object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Get Info or
Using Get Info

If the selected object is editable, use the [Object Name] Object dialog to change the attributes. The options in the dialog are unique to the type of object selected. If you view or change the graphic attributes by choosing Style, you also set the current style" which is used for creating new objects. If the selected object is not editable, the [Object Name] Object dialog will not allow you to change any attributes.
See:
New Map Window Command New Layout Window Command
MapInfo Reference
167
Grabber Button Main Toolbar
Grabber Button Main Toolbar

Use the Grabber button to:
D
access the Grabber tool. Use the Grabber tool to reposition a map or layout within its window.
The Grabber button is available when:

D
a Map or Layout window is active.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Grabber button
Moving a Map or Layout

To move a map or layout: 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Toolbar > Grabber button. The cursor displays as a hand. Click an area of the map or layout. While holding down the mouse button, drag the map in the appropriate direction. When you release the mouse button, MapInfo redraws the map in its new location. If the entire layout is visible in the window, the Grabber tool does not move the layout.
See:
Change View Button/Command User's Guide: Chapter 4
168
MapInfo Reference
Graph Type Command Graph Menu

Use Graph Type to:
D
choose the type of graph and its associated graphing options.
Graph Type is available when:

D
a Graph window is active.
Menu Path
"
Graph > Graph Type or
Choosing a Type of Graph

To choose a type of graph:
"
Choose Graph > Graph Type. The Graph Type dialog displays.
Graph Type Dialog
Graph Title
Type the title. You can leave MapInfo's default title: Graph of SOME_TABLE". Click on the Text Style button (Aa) to display the Text Style dialog. Use this dialog to choose a font, font size, font color, and background color for the graph's title. You can also choose bold, italic or underline for the title. See Text Style Button.
Graph Type Area Bar Area graphs represent quantities as the size of an area on the graph. See the following: Area Graph. Use Bar graphs to compare a relatively small number of discrete items. See the following: Bar Graph.
MapInfo Reference
169

Line Pie Line graphs plot data points at equal intervals along the label axis, connecting the points with a line. See the following: Line Graph. Pie graphs, also referred to as pie charts, show the relative proportions of items, with quantities represented by the area of the pie wedge. See the following: Pie Graph. Plot points according to their X and Y coordinates without any connecting line. See the following: XY Graph.
XY Options Stacked Overlapped Drop Lines Rotated Show 3D Overlap %
Places graph areas, lines, or bars on top of each other rather than side by side. Sets the bars representing different quantities on a bar graph to overlap. Extend from the top of the highest series in an area, line, or XY graph to the horizontal axis. Rotates the graph 90 degrees so that, for example, the bars in a bar chart are horizontal rather than vertical. Causes the graphic objects in area or bar charts to be represented as threedimensional. When you are creating a bar graph with information from more than one table column, control how far each bar overlaps the others in a group by entering a number in the Overlap % box. Enter 0 and the bars will not overlap. Enter 100 and the bars overlap completely when overlap is turned on. When you are creating a bar graph, control the space between the bars, which in turn affects the thickness of the bars, by setting the Bar Gutter %. When you enter 0 in the box, there is no space and the bars appear adjacent. When you enter 90, the bars are thin and have large spaces between them. Enter any number between 0 and 99. When you are creating a pie graph, you can set the starting pie angle. A pie graph starts with the first item in the corresponding Table. You can adjust the orientation of the starting pie angle in degrees clockwise. Zero degrees (the default) starts the first wedge at a 12 o'clock position going toward a 1 o'clock position. Using 90 degrees starts the first wedge at a 3 o'clock position going toward 4 o'clock. Set the pie angle from 0 to 360 degrees. Cancel the current dialog. The graph remains unchanged. Modify the graph to reflect the dialog settings.
Bar Gutter %
Start Pie Angle
Cancel OK
170
MapInfo Reference
Area Graph
Area graphs represent quantities as the size of an area on the graph. This type of graph is similar to a line graph, with the area between the line and the label axis filled. When you choose the Stacked option, MapInfo stacks one data series above the other, so that the shaded areas are proportional to data values. This is the usual way in which area graphs are done.
Bar Graph
Use Bar graphs to compare a relatively small number of discrete items. Quantities are represented by the length of the bar. MapInfo allows you to graph up to four variables in a single bar graph. MapInfo positions the columns for the variables sidebyside unless you choose the Stacked option. When you choose the Stacked option, MapInfo stacks the bars for each variable one atop the other.
MapInfo Reference
171
Line Graph
Line graphs plot data points at equal intervals along the label axis, connecting the points with a line. MapInfo allows you to plot up to four different variables at a time. MapInfo automatically uses a different colored point for each variable. When you want to set these colors, use the Series option on the Graph menu.
Pie Graph
Pie graphs show the relative proportions of items, with quantities represented by the area of the pie wedge. In general, you should only use a pie graph if your data values add up to the total of some quantity. For example, if you are graphing the sales in different territories, you should use a pie graph only if you are graphing sales for all your territories. That way the size of a territory's wedge accurately represents its contribution to the total sales effort. When you are only graphing the sales of five (out of 13) territories, then you should use a bar graph. The bar graph allows you to compare the sales of those five territories, but doesn't imply that they represent the entire sales effort, as a pie graph would.
172
MapInfo Reference

It is difficult to show small differences between two percentages with a pie graph. You should try to limit the number of wedges in a pie because it often becomes difficult distinguish between values in an overcrowded pie.
X-Y Graph
XY graphs are also known as scatter plots. These graphs plot points according to their X and Y coordinates without any connecting line. When you want to examine the correlation between variables, use an XY graph. When you specify the columns to be graphed (in Window > New Graph Window), the first column is graphed along the X (label) axis, while the other column is graphed along the Y (value) axis.
Customizing Graphs
You can create a variety of different graphs by using various customizing options. Here are some of the possibilities:
Basic Bar Chart
Rotated Bar Chart
Stacked Bar Chart
3D Bar Chart
MapInfo Reference
173
Overlapped Bar Chart
3D Stacked Bar Chart
Basic Line Graph
Line Graph with Drop Lines
Area Graph
3D Area Graph
Stacked Area Graph
See:
New Graph Window Command
174
MapInfo Reference
Hide MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar
Hide MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar Hide MapBasic Window Command Options Menu
Use Hide MapBasic Window button and command to:
D
display or hide the MapBasic window.
Hide MapBasic Window is available when:

D
a MapBasic window displays.
Menu Path
"
Options > Hide MapBasic Window. Tools Toolbar >Hide MapBasic Window button.
"
Displaying or Hiding the MapBasic Window

To hide the MapBasic window:
"
Choose Options > Hide MapBasic. The MapBasic Window displays or disappears.
See:
Show MapBasic Window Button/Command
MapInfo Reference
175
Hide Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar
Hide Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar Hide Statistics Window Command Options Menu
Use Hide Statistics Window button and command to:
D
hide the Statistics window.
Hide Statistics Window is available when:

D
a Statistics window displays.
Menu Path
"
Options > Hide Statistics Window or
"
Main Toolbar > Hide Statistics button
Hiding the Statistics Window

To hide Statistics:
"
Choose Options > Hide Statistics Window. The Statistics window disappears from your screen.
Close the Statistics window by choosing Options > Hide Statistics or clicking on the window's Application Control icon.
See:
Calculate Statistics Command Show Statistics Window Button/Command
176
MapInfo Reference
Hide StatusBar Command Options Menu
Hide StatusBar Command Options Menu

Use Hide StatusBar to:
D
hide the StatusBar.
Hide StatusBar is available when:

D
a StatusBar displays.
Menu Path
"
Options > Hide StatusBar
Hiding the StatusBar

To hide the StatusBar display:
"
Choose Options > Hide StatusBar. The StatusBar disappears.
See:
Show StatusBar Command StatusBar
MapInfo Reference
177
Hide Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu
Hide Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu

Use Hide Legend Window to:
D
hide the legends associated with thematic maps or graphs.
Hide Legend Window is available when:

D
a Legend window displays.
Menu Path
"
Options > Hide Theme Legend Window
Hiding a Legend
To hide a legend: 1. 2. Choose Options. Choose Hide Legend Window. The legend window disappears from the screen.
Close the Legend window by clicking on the window's Application Control icon.
See:
Create Thematic Map Command Legend Button New Graph Window Command User's Guide: Chapter 10
178
MapInfo Reference
Import Command Table Menu

Use Import to:
D
import vector (but not raster) graphics files.
Import is available when:

D
Import is always available.
Menu Path
"
Table > Import
Supported File Formats

The following file formats are supported:
D D D D D
MIF: (MapInfo Interchange Format): MapInfo's data interchange format. DXF: The graphic/data interchange format for AutoCAD and other CAD packages. MBI: (MapInfo Boundary Interchange Format): An ASCII file for MapInfo DOS boundary files. MMI: (MapInfo Map Interchange Format): An interchange format for MapInfo DOS street maps. IMG: A file format for MapInfo for DOS image files.
MapInfo imports graphics and textual information from MapInfo Interchange Format, DXF, MBI, and MMI files. MapInfo imports only graphics from IMG. MapInfo for DOS can produce ASCII files in MBI and MMI format. MBI format is used for importing and exporting boundaries (regions), while MMI format is used for importing street maps (lines). Image files are binary files containing various types of graphic objects. MapInfo can import these files directly.
Importing Graphics Files

To import a graphic file:
"
Choose Table > Import. The Import File dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
179

Import File Dialog
Look in: File Name: Files of Type:
Specify the file path. Choose the file you want to import. Choose the format of the file you are importing: MIF, DXF, MBI, MMI, or IMG. See the following: MIF Import Information and IMG MapInfo for DOS Files. If you choose DXF, the DXF Import Information dialog displays. See the following: Importing DXF Files, the DXF File Format, and Using the DXF Dialog. Display the Import into Table dialog. See the following: Import into Table Dialog. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Open Cancel Help
Import into Table Dialog Save in: File Name: Specify the file path. Displays the name of the imported file with a .tab extension. You can change the file name. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab Save as Type: Choose MapInfo, MapInfo 2.x (save to MapInfo 2.0 or 2.1 format) or dBase DBF. When saving to dBase, the data file is saved to both DBF and MapInfo format. If you want only a DBF file, use the Export command (Table > Export).
180
MapInfo Reference

Save Save the table with the specified name and format in the specified path.If the file format is dBASE DBF, the dBASE DBF dialog displays. Specify the appropriate character set. If the file format is AutoCAD DXF, the DXF Import Information dialog displays. See the following:Using the DXF Import Dialog. Cancel Help Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
MIF Import Information

MapInfo Interchange Format (MIF) is an ASCII file format that can fully describe a MapInfo table. Both graphic and tabular data are stored in MIF files. MIF files can be created by MAP2MIF, BDY2MIF, MapInfo, and other programs. You also can create your own MIF files in any ASCII text editor to import later into MapInfo. See the MIPro User's Guide, Appendix J: MapInfo Data Interchange Format.
IMG MapInfo for DOS Files

When importing files from MapInfo for DOS to MapInfo 3.0, we recommend you use the utilities we have created to facilitate this operation: MAP2MIF and BDY2MIF. See the MIPro User's Guide,Appendix C: Converting MI DOS Files to MI Windows Files. These utilities work from within MapInfo for DOS and allow you to convert MapInfo for DOS files into MIF files. You can import those files into MapInfo using the MapInfo Interchange option in the Import File dialog. Why should you use MAP2MIF, followed by MapInfo Interchange format, rather than MMI import?
D
MAP2MIF creates a view table, just like a StreetInfo table. A StreetInfo table contains one table with street names and another table with address ranges for each individual street segment. This occupies less disk space than the file created by MMI import because the name is not duplicated for every segment. MAP2MIF has better support for line styles and colors. MAP2MIF allows you to specify an abbreviation file to use.
D D
Why should you use BDY2MIF, followed by MapInfo Interchange format, rather than MBI import?
D
BDY2MIF allows you to specify whether or not to close boundaries. When you use lineshaped boundaries in the DOS boundary file, you do not want those boundaries turned into polygons when they are imported. MBI import automatically closes those boundaries. BDY2MIF gives you the option of leaving those boundaries open. BDY2MIF has better support for line styles, fill patterns, and colors.
MapInfo Reference
181
Importing DXF Files

MapInfo lets you import and export files with DXF (drawing interchange file) format. DXF is a format used by AutoCAD and other CAD packages. MapInfo can import both graphical and tabular information from DXF files. MapInfo is completely compatible with DXF files specified by AutoCAD Release 1013.
Using DXF Import

For information about the DXF file format, consult the appropriate section of the AutoCAD documentation. DXF import works with a wide range of projections and coordinate systems. This simplifies the process of importing DXF maps, which use coordinate systems other than longitude/ latitude. In most cases it eliminates the need to set a transformation. Set a transformation when you are importing a map created in a coordinate system not supported by MapInfo or when you are importing a map whose coordinates are geographically meaningless. For example, if you are importing a map image from a drawing package, the image's coordinates may have no relation to the earth's coordinates.
Using the DXF Import Dialog

If you are importing an AutoCAD DXF file, the DXF Import Information dialog displays when you press Save. DXF Import Information Dialog
182
MapInfo Reference

DXF Layers to import Preserve blocks as multipolygon regions Choose which layers in the DXF file you want to import. Only entities on the selected layers will be imported. When checked, blocks of this type produce a single MapInfo object out of all the polygons in the block. When cleared, multiple objects are produced. Blocks can contain multiple objects, including multiple polygons. For example, a block for New York State might contain 2 polygons: one for the mainland, and one for Long Island. When checked, tabular information from DXF attributes are read into the table. When checked, entities from different layers in the DXF file are imported into different MapInfo tables. Otherwise, a single MapInfo table is created. If a DXF file has a single layer, this checkbox is disabled. DXF files usually contain conceptually different types of information. One layer might contain notes and labels, another might contain buildings, a third might contain streets, etc. In many cases, you may want to place these layers into different tables, especially when tabular data is involved. By doing so, you can turn on or off different MapInfo layers in maps. Suppress Warning Messages Projection When checked, allows warning messages to be suppressed while importing a DXF file. The Projection button provides access to a dialog where you can specify the coordinate system the file will be imported to (earth or nonearth map). See the following: Choosing A Coordinate System for DXF Drawings. Use the Set Transformation button to access the Set Coordinate Transformation dialog to enter a coordinate transformation. Two situations require a transformation to be designated: importing a map created in a coordinate system not supported by MapInfo. importing a map whose coordinates are geographically meaningless, e.g., a map image from a drawing package. See the following: Setting A Coordinate Transformation.
Preserve attribute data Create separate tables
Set Transformation
MapInfo Reference
183

Options Use the Options button to access the DXF Data Storing Options dialog. Here you specify: -whether to import whole numbers as integers or decimals. -whether to import floating point numbers as floats or decimals. -whether to store handles. -whether to store elevation. -whether to store only visible objects. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options.
OK Cancel
Creating Separate Tables If the Create separate tables checkbox is checked, the OK button is replaced by the Next>> button, and the following dialog appears, when the Next>> button is pressed: Insert new dialog Overwrite existing tables Use File Name As Prefix DXF Layer Name When checked, newly created tables can overwrite existing tables without a warning message. This feature is convenient for importing a DXF file into a large number of MapInfo tables. When checked, several first characters from the DXF file name are used as first characters in the table name. The number of characters is specified by the pop-down menu to the right. Displays a list of all selected layers and suggested names for corresponding tables. Only one layer can be selected at a time. Name of the table for the layer 0 is derived from up to seven first characters of the DXF file name, and a 0 appended at the end. Suggested names of all tables coincide with the up to eight first characters of the DXF layer name. More than one layer can be imported into the same table. Serves the same function as that on the previous dialog, but now it is applied only to a currently selected layer. Its initial value is that of the corresponding value on the previous dialog (see above). Serves the same function as that on the previous dialog, but now it is applied only to individual layers. Its initial value is that of the corresponding value on the previous dialog (see above). Starts the Save file dialog for the name of a table to import to a selected layer.
Preserve blocks as multipolygon regions
Preserve attribute data
Change table name
184
MapInfo Reference

Choosing a Coordinate System for DXF Drawings Choose a coordinate system (earth or nonearth map) for DXF drawings. When you do not choose a coordinate system when importing graphic files MapInfo defaults to a nonearth map with units in either meters or feet depending on the setting designated in Option > Preferences > Map Window. The bounds of the map are the extents of the DXF drawing. To choose a coordinate system:
"
Click the Projection button (in the DXF Import Information dialog). The Choose Projection dialog displays. See Projection Button
Autoflip If you have chosen a non-Earth coordinate system in the Projection dialog, the Flipping Geographic Data dialog displays. If Autoflip is activated, the x coordinates of the imported entities are flipped around the center line of the Map window.
Setting a Coordinate Transformation

Because CAD packages represent drawings in nonearth coordinates, all drawings imported or exported between MapInfo and CAD suffer some distortion. This is the result of displaying nonearth information on a spherical coordinate system (like the globe). Coordinate conversions are used to assign longitude/latitude coordinates to CAD drawings that were created using nonearth coordinates. Conversions near the equator are more exact than conversions at the extremes of the hemispheres. To minimize distortion, import and export with no coordinate conversions and avoid translating maps that cover large areas. How does MapInfo treat coordinates? MapInfo treats coordinates as specifying longitude and latitude on a sphere. In the Western hemisphere, X coordinates (longitude) increase to the left, rather than to the right, as in standard nonearth coordinates. A point on the left side of the map has a greater longitude than a point on the right side of the map. In the Eastern hemisphere X increases to the right. Latitude (the Y coordinate) increases in a downward direction for maps of areas south of the equator. For areas north of the equator, latitude increases as you move up. This corresponds to the way it works in nonearth coordinates. How do CAD packages files treat coordinates? Most CAD maps don't use a longitudelatitude coordinate system. They usually use state plane coordinates or some other coordinate system. When the maps show floor plans, they often use a nonearth system (simple X and Y). Typically, coordinates in these systems increase to the right and up.
MapInfo Reference
185

To set a coordinate transformation:
"
Click the Set Transformation button in the DXF Information dialog. The Set Coordinate Transformation dialog displays.
This dialog displays a pair of points, AutoCAD coordinates on the left and MapInfo coordinates on the right. When setting a transformation, you are choosing the two corresponding MapInfo longitudelatitude points to the two DXF points. When you use the extents of the DXF drawing (the default), you must enter the extents of the drawing in longitudelatitude coordinates for the MapInfo points. When the DXF file contains a header section, the two DXF points are the lowerleft and upperright corners of the drawing (the extents). The default MapInfo points are the same as the DXF points. This default transformation translates the map coordinates into XY directly. For example, a point at 72.5 degrees west, 42.7 degrees north is translated into (72.5, 42.7). It is not necessary to use extents. All you need are any two points of the drawing (preferably far apart for greater accuracy) in both coordinate systems: the DXF coordinate system, and longitudelatitude.
186
MapInfo Reference

The diagram displays how coordinate transformations work. Two AutoCAD drawing points and two MapInfo map points define the transformation. Any two points can be chosen, but the lowerleft and upperright extents of the drawing are often used. You must know the coordinates of each point in both coordinate systems.
Importing DXF Attributes Into MapInfo

Some DXF files contain textual information associated with graphic objects. In DXF, this is done by creating a block that contains the graphic objects and the textual information, stored in attributes". This block is inserted into the drawing in one or more places, with possibly different data values in each case. There is no database structure imposed on attributes. For example, you might have two types of objects in the DXF file with the following attributes: Pipes: WIDTH TYPE (sewer, water, storm sewer) MATERIAL Streets: NAME ADDRESS_RANGE When MapInfo creates a tabular database from a DXF file, it must choose a database structure. All the records in a Table contain the same fields. MapInfo builds a database structure by scanning the entire DXF file for all attributes in the layers that are being imported, and creating a union of these fields. The data type of each field is determined by the contents of the attributes. For example, when all attributes with a given name contain a number, the resulting MapInfo field is a numeric data type. Using the example above, when pipes and streets are both imported into the same DXF file, the database structure is: ADDRESS_RANGE MATERIAL NAME TYPE WIDTH DXF files of welldesigned drawings put objects of different types in different layers. The above DXF file contains 2 layers: pipes (containing all the pipes of the map) and streets (containing all the streets of the map). Run DXF Import twice, importing a different layer each time. This creates two MapInfo tables, one with the correct pipe structure, and one with the correct street structure.
MapInfo Reference
187

When you place both layers of the sample DXF file into one MapInfo table, the records for the pipes have blank or zero values for the NAME and ADDRESS_RANGE fields. Also,WIDTH, TYPE, and MATERIAL are blank for the street records. It takes much longer to import attributes from a DXF file into MapInfo than it does to import files with no attributes. The entities section of the DXF file must be read twice. We recommend that you run the import several times, checking to make sure that you are loading the correct layers and using the correct coordinate transformation, before importing the data attributes.
Importing Attributes with Nested Blocks

In the DXF file format, blocks can be nested. The following is the logical structure of our example nested block: Block A Line Attribute STREETNAME = Broadway" Block B Point Attribute ADDRESS = 200" Block C Polyline Attribute BUILDING_NAME = Hendrick Hudson Building" This block consists of a line, an attribute, and two blocks. One of these blocks is a point with the address of a building, the other is a polygon with the name of the building. If all of these blocks were on the same layer (they don't have to be), the database structure is: ADDRESS BUILDING_NAME STREETNAME Objects get the value of all attributes in their current block, and inherit attributes from their parent blocks. In this case, the database is:

Object
line
point
ADDRESS
0
200 0
BUILDING_NAME
STREETNAME
Broadway" Broadway" Broadway"
polygon
<blank> <blank> Hendrick Hudson Building"
It is better to put objects of different types in different layers; the difficulty is determining which layer names correspond to which type of objects.
See: The MIPro User's Guide, Appendices J, C. Export Command, Open Table Command 188
MapInfo Reference
Info Button Main Toolbar

Use the Info button to:
D
access the Info tool. Use the Info tool to view tabular data associated with map objects.
The Info button is available when:

D
a Map or Browser window is active.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Info button
Displaying Data with the Info Tool

Use the Info tool to view the tabular data associated with a map object or browser record. To use the Info tool: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Info button. The cursor displays as a cross when it in a map or browser. Click on a map object or browser record from a selectable layer. If a single object is selected, the Info Tool window displays.
Info Tool Window for a Single Object When you click on a map object with the Info tool, an Info Tool window displays, showing all the data associated with that map object. Also listed is the table in which the information is stored. The number of items that display depends on the Zoom level. If multiple, overlapping objects are selected, the Info Tool window for multiple objects displays.
MapInfo Reference
189

Info Tool Window for Multiple Objects If you click at a point where there is more than one object, the window displays a list of all objects under that point. The cursor displays as a hand in the window; choose one of the objects in the Info Tool window. At the bottom of the Info Tool window are forward and backward arrow buttons; use the forward and backwards arrows to scroll through the other object's data. Use the List button to return to the list of objects in the Info Tool window.
Changing Table Information

You can change information in a table through the Info tool; the table cannot be readonly. Position the cursor in the appropriate Info tool field and use basic textediting techniques to change the information. Use File > Save to save the changes. If you are working in a network environment, note that only one user can edit a MapInfo table at a time. An editing session begins when the first edit is made and ends when a Save or Revert is performed. Other users can view the table while editing is in progress; the edits will not be visible until the edits are saved.
See:
Label Button User's Guide: Chapter 5
190
MapInfo Reference
Infotips
Infotips
Use InfoTips to:
D
display the value of an objects label expression in a ToolTip-like bubble.
InfoTips is available when:

D
the Select, Label or Info Tool cursor hovers over a map object.
Using InfoTips
When the cursor hovers over an object, InfoTips display the value of an object's label expression. The object selected for an InfoTip is in the topmost selectable layer. The label expression can be defined in the Layer Control dialog; InfoTips can be multiline. InfoTips are active by default. To change the default status of InfoTips: 1. 2. Choose Options > Preferences > Map Window. Clear Show InfoTips".
MapInfo Reference
191
Interleaved Line Styles
Interleaved Line Styles

Use interleaved line styles to:
D
create the appearance of intersections on your maps for overlapping intersections and lines.
Interleaved line styles is available:

D
for lines; polylines; arcs in the Map view only.
Menu Path
"
Options > Line Style
Using interleaved line styles:
To use interleaved lines: 1. 2. Select Options > Line Style. The Line Style dialog box displays. If you select a line style that has `multiple passes', the Interleaved check box is enabled. Check this box to use the interleave feature.
Note: The interleaved option is not enabled for solid lines. The interleaved option is not activated for borders. If you apply the interleaved option in MapInfo Professional 4.5/5.0 and use the map in a previous version, the line will display; the interleaving will not. Only lines of the same style and color will be interleaved. Lines of the same style and color, but different width will be interleaved. Interleaving only works for lines within a single layer. If two lines from different layers cross, they are not interleaved.
See:
Line Style
192
MapInfo Reference
Join Update Column Dialog

Use the Join Button to:
D
access the Specify Join dialog. Use this dialog to specify a process when an autojoin cannot be made. You also can override default field choices.
The Join button is available when:

D
at least two tables are open and
different tables have been chosen from the Update Column dialog Table to Update and Get Value from Table dropdown lists.
Menu Path
D
Table > Update Column > Join
Geographic and Descriptive Join

Join allows you to join two tables. To do this, you must specify how to associate records in the two tables. For example, if you are shading STATES by the values in SALES you would want all Pennsylvania sales to be associated with Pennsylvania, all Maryland sales to be associated with Maryland, etc. To accomplish this task you could join by using the following:
D D
a common descriptive field a common geographic/graph area
In this case, the most likely descriptive field contains the state name or an abbreviation for the state name. The STATES table might have a field called State that contains the abbreviation of the state name, and the SALES table might have a field called State, which contains the state abbreviation. You could match the entries in these two fields so that information in the SALES State field is matched to the record having the same entry in the State field of the STATE table. For example, NY (sales) would be matched to NY (state), or PA (sales) would be matched to PA (state). However, if both tables contain graphic information, you could specify a graphic match. For example, if you are a conservation official and you want to shade a map of COUNTIES according to the number of FIRES that occurred in the last year and the FIRES database has been geocoded. During a geographic join, the coordinates of each fire location would specify the county where the fire had occurred and would allow each fire record to be associated with the appropriate county. If two tables do not share a common column, you may still be able to join the tables according to the order of the rows. If you know that the first row of one table corresponds to the first row of the other table, and that the nth row of the first table corresponds to the nth row of the second table, you can join the two tables by referring to a special column named RowID.
MapInfo Reference
193

The RowID column contains an integer value representing the row number of each row in the table. The first row in any table has a RowID value of one, the second row has a RowID value of two, etc. To join two tables so that the nth row of one table is matched to the nth row of another table, specify a Where Condition expression: Where Condition: TABLE_1.RowID = TABLE_2.RowID
Using Automatic Joining

Whenever you specify a source table that is different from the target table in the Update Column dialog, MapInfo tries to determine how to join them. First, a join is attempted on the basis of tabular data. If that fails, a geographic join is attempted. If that fails, MapInfo indicates that autojoin failed. The autojoin strategy works as follows:
D
The two tables' tabular data is compared. When matching data values are found, MapInfo assumes that it has found matching fields and uses those as the basis of the join. If a match is not produced, then: A graphic/geographic match is attempted. MapInfo attempts either to locate source objects within target objects or to locate target objects within source objects. If a match is not produced, then: MapInfo reports that autojoin failed. Click the Join button and use the Specify Join dialog to specify how to make the join.
Joining Tables by Using Descriptive Criteria

To specify a join based on descriptive criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open at least two tables. Choose Table > Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays. Choose different tables for the Table to Update and Get Value From Table dropdown lists. Click the Join button. The Specify Join Dialog displays. If both tables can be mapped, the Specify Join dialog allows you to choose whether to make the join on a geographic basis or on a nongeographical attributes basis. Click the radio button next to the Where dropdown list, or If only one table can be mapped, specify the join in terms of nongeographical attributes. 5. 6. 7. Choose the match field in the source table from the where dropdown list. Choose the match field in the target table from the matches dropdown list. Click OK.
194
MapInfo Reference
Specifying a Join Based on Geographic Criteria

To specify a join based on geographic criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open at least two mappable tables. Choose Table > Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays. Choose different tables for the Table to Update and Get Value From Table dropdown lists. Click the Join button. The Specify Join Dialog displays. Click the radio button next to Where object from table. Use the object table from dropdown list to choose between contains or is within, depending on the geographic relationship between objects in the two tables. Polygons contain" points, lines, or other polygons. Points, lines, and small polygons are within" other (larger) polygons. 7. Click OK.
Using the Specify Join Dialog

Specify Join Dialog (Geographic or Descriptive Join)
Join where where from table matches from table where object from table Object from table Specify a join based on descriptive data. Specify the match field in the source table. Specify the match field in the target table. Specify a join based on geographic data. Choose either contains or is within, depending on the geographic relationship between objects in the two tables. Polygons contain" points, lines, or other polygons. Points, lines, and small polygons are within" other (larger) polygons. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the join. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
195

Join where from table matches from table OK Cancel Help Specify the match field in the source table. Specify the match field in the target table. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the join. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
Update Column Command
196
MapInfo Reference
Label Axis Command Graph Menu

Use Label Axis to:
D
customize the label axis of a graph. a Graph window is active.
Label Axis is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Graph > Label Axis
The Label Axis

The label axis displays the labels of the data values being graphed. For example, in a typical financial graph, the label axis might have 1st Qtr", 2nd Qtr", and 3rd Qtr" while the value axis might have dollar amounts. For a graph in a nonrotated orientation, the label axis is the X, or horizontal, axis.
Using the Label Axis Settings Dialog

Many of the settings for value and label axis are only relevant if the graph is an XY graph. For example, bar, line, area, and pie graphs use almost none of the label axis settings. However, bar, line, and area use all of the value axis settings. To specify value and label axis options:
"
Choose Graph > The Label Axis. The Label Axis Settings dialog displays.
Label Axis Settings Dialog
MapInfo Reference
197

Axis Values Auto Minimum Value Auto Maximum Value Auto Cross At Auto Major Unit Auto Minor Unit Major Tick Marks Minor Tick Marks Axis Labels Specify the lowest value to appear on the label axis. Specify the highest value to appear on the label axis. Specify the place on the label axis where it is crossed by the Value axis. Specify the increment between major ticks. Specify the increment between minor ticks. Set major tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis. Set minor tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis. Choose no labels (None) or to have the labels appear At Axis. Click the text Aa" button to display the Text Style dialog to specify the size, font, style, and color of labels. See Text Style Button. Specify a title for the axis. The title appears adjacent to the axis. Click the text Aa" button to display the Text Style dialog to specify the the size, font, style, and color of the title. See Text Style Button. Choose to have gridlines drawn at major ticks. The Major Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display. See Line Style Button. Choose to have gridlines drawn at minor ticks. The Minor Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display. See Line Style Button. To designate the style, color and width of the Axis Line, click in the sample line box to display the Line Style dialog. See Line Style Button. Redraw the graph with the current specifications. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Axis Title
Major Gridline
Minor Gridline
Axis Line
OK Cancel Help
See:
New Graph Window Command Value Axis Command
198
MapInfo Reference
Label Button Main Toolbar

Use the Label button to:
D
access the the Label tool. Use the Label tool to label objects with information from the related database.
D
The Label tool is available when:

Using the Label Tool

To label a map object using the Label tool: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Label button. Click on a map object. A label displays. MapInfo labels objects with information from the first selectable layer, with label visibility enabled, according to the order in Layer Control. By default, labels are created for the objects in the first selectable layer. If layers overlap, press <Control> while using the Label tool to label an object in a selectable layer other than the first selectable layer. MapInfo ignores the first selectable layer and labels objects according to the next selectable layer. Continue to press <Control>while using the Label tool to cycle through the labels in the selectable layers. Interactive labels take precedence over automatic labels. Therefore, if you are not allowing overlapping labels and a newly created interactive label will overlap an existing automatic label, the automatic label is hidden" so the interactive label displays with no obstruction. If the label visibility option in the Layer Control > Label dialog is turned off, a beep sounds when you attempt to use the Label tool. If you plan to use the Pack Table feature, do so before entering labels using the Label tool.
The Label Button and the Layer Control Dialog

The settings designated in the Label Options dialog in Map > Layer Control > Label, determine the font, text color, line style, anchor point and visibility of labels. These settings are used for labels created by the Automatic Labeling option found in Map > Layer Control > Label, and for labels created with the Label tool.
Editing a Label
Edit an individual label by accessing the Label Style dialog. The designations made in the Label Style dialog apply only to the single label being entered or edited; the designations made in the Label Options dialog apply to all labels in the specified layer. When closing a table containing edited labels, you will be prompted to save or discard the labels. If you choose to save the labels, the Save workspace objects dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
199

To edit an individual label: 1. 2. 3. Doubleclick on the label with the Select tool, or select the label and press F7. The Label Style dialog displays. See Label Style Dialog. Make the appropriate changes. Choose OK.
Label Style Dialog
Font Anchor Point
Click to display the Text Style dialog. See Text Style Dialog. Click an icon to select the label position relative to the label anchor. The diamond character represents the label anchor; the rectangle represents the label. The border of the selected box is bold. Select a line type, or no line type to attach the label to the anchor point. Specify the angle at which the label should be rotated about the anchor point. Specify the number of points, a measurement of text size, the label should be placed from the anchor point. Enter text (to 255 characters) to be used as the label. Create label using the above specifications. Cancel dialog options. Access Help topic.
Label Line Rotation Angle Offset
Text OK Cancel Help
200
MapInfo Reference

Text Style Dialog
Font Text Color Background None Halo Box Effects Color Bold Italic Underline All Caps Shadow Expanded Sample OK Cancel
Choose a font from the font dropdown list. Choose a point size from the point size dropdown list. Display the color palette; choose a text color. Do not halo or box the text. Display the text outlined in a designated color. Surround the text with a box in a designated color. Display the color palette; select a color to halo or box the text. Check to display text in boldface. Check to display text in italic. Check to display text underlined. Check to display text in all upper case letters. Check to display a grey drop" shadow under the text. Check to insert double spaces between each letter in the text. Displays sample text using the selected options. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options.
MapInfo Reference
201
Removing a Label
To remove one or more labels: 1. 2. Use the Select tool to select the label or labels you want to remove. Press <DELETE> or choose Edit > Clear to remove the selected labels.
Clear Custom Labels

To remove all custom labels (labels created using the Label tool): 1. Choose Map > Clear Custom Labels The prompt Clear all custom labels and revert to defaults displays. 2. Choose Discard to clear all custom labels.
Moving Labels
To move a label: 1. 2. Use the Select tool to choose the label(s) to be moved. Drag the label to the new position and release.
Rotating a Label
To rotate a label: 1. 2. Use the Select tool to choose the label to be rotated. Drag the label's rotation handle, which displays at the lower right of the label, to the desired location and release.
See:
202
MapInfo Reference
Layer Control Button Main Toolbar
Layer Control Button Main Toolbar Layer Control Command Map Menu
Use the Layer Control Command and Button to:
D
access the Layer Control dialog.
Use the Layer Control dialog to:

D D D D D D
change display of map layers in the active window. determine which layers are displayed, editable, selectable, zoom layered. change the order of map layers. add or remove one or more layers from the active map. control labels. alter a thematic map.
Layer Control is Available When:

D
Menu Path
"
Map > Layer Control or
"
Main Toolbar > Layer Control button or
MapInfo Reference
203
About the Layer Control Dialog

The Layer Control dialog controls how maps display. Some important information includes:
D D D
The Layer Control dialog displays the list of layers in the current map window and indicates whether each is displayed, editable, selectable or labeled automatically. Layers include data tables, raster images, thematic maps and the cosmetic layer. Layers are stacked in a map window. The order of layers in the Layer Control dialog is the order of the layers in the map window. For example, when boundary layers are placed below point layers, the points remain visible. The cosmetic layer is always the topmost layer. Thematic layer names display indented and above their corresponding data layers. The grid thematic layer is independent of its base layer and can be re-or dered in the map window as a separate layer. To work with a layer, choose it by clicking on it. Control its settings by checking or clearing the appropriate box to make the layer display, editable, selectable, or label automatically. Each layer attribute has an accompanying ToolTip. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. In addition to the check boxes, you can control the display, labeling, or thematic map characteristics of a layer through the Display, Label, and Thematic button options. You can also add or remove layers and change the order of layers with the remaining options in Layer Control.
To access the Layer Control dialog:

"
Choose Map > Layer Control or
"
Choose Main Toolbar > Layer Control button The Layer Control dialog displays:
204
MapInfo Reference

Layer Control Dialog
Layer visible
Displays the layers in the current Map window. Indicates if the layer is displayed. Check the box under this icon that corresponds to the layer, or layers, you want to display. The check box is always enabled and all layers, except the Cosmetic layer, can have their display turned on or off. The Cosmetic layer's display is always on. Note: When changing the display of a layer that has thematic layers created from it, you will be prompted to change the display status of the thematic layers. Indicates if the layer is editable. Check the box under this icon that corresponds to the layer you want to make editable. Only one layer can be editable. Objects in an editable layer can be edited (moved, colored, deleted, reshaped, etc.). Objects are also drawn or pasted to the editable layer. Neither thematic nor raster layers can be edited. A layer must be displayed to be made editable. If the layer is a StreetInfo layer, you cannot check editable. See the User's Guide for an explanation of SteetInfo editing.
Editable
MapInfo Reference
205

Selectable Indicates if the layer is selectable. Check the box under this icon that corresponds to the layer, or layers, that you want to make selectable. Layers must be selectable if you want to choose or label objects or use the Info tool. A layer must be displayed to be made selectable. More than one layer may be selectable at the same time. You may, however, only select from one layer at a time. Check to display the map labeled automatically with labels from the table column designated in the Label with section of the Label Options dialog. If the checkmark in the Auto Label checkbox is black, all labels for that layer will be visible. If it is red, then zoom labeling is in effect specifying that labels display only within a certain zoom range, and the layer is zoomed outside of the designated zoom range. Displays the Display Options dialog. Use this dialog to specify display attributes for map layers. Check to display the Label Options dialog. Option is not available when the selected layer is a thematic or raster layer. Use the Label Options dialog to specify label attributes for map layers. Available only when the selected layer is a thematic map. Choose to display the Modify Thematic Layer dialog. Use this dialog to modify the attributes of a thematic map. See: Modify Thematic Map.
Automatic Labeling
Display Label
Thematic
Layers Add Remove Reorder Up Down OK Cancel Move one or more layers up. Move one or more layers down. Accept the dialog options; redraw the map(s) if necessary. Cancel the dialog options. Add one or more layers to the map. Choose from the displayed listbox of open tables. Remove one or more layers from the map.
206
MapInfo Reference
Using the Cosmetic Layer

The cosmetic layer is the topmost layer of a Map window. It contains graphic objects and can be used for drawing; it is always displayed. Use the Layer Control dialog to make the cosmetic layer editable or selectable. You can then make changes to objects you have created in this layer. To make the cosmetic layer editable or selectable: 1. 2. 3. Choose Map > Layer Control. Choose the cosmetic layer in the Layer Control dialog and check the editable and/or selectable box. Choose editable to edit or draw on the cosmetic layer; choose selectable if you want to choose objects.
Objects created in the cosmetic layer are not saved when you close a map window. You must save them to an existing or new table. To save objects created in the cosmetic layer: 1. 2. Choose Map > Save Cosmetic Objects. Specify whether you want to save them to an existing table or a new table.
Seamless Map Layers

In a seamless map, several tables of the same type can be combined and treated as a single table. In Layer Control, the seamless map is listed as a single layer. Layer Control functionality is active for the seamless layer with two exceptions: a seamless map layer cannot be made editable and you cannot use the Thematic Mapping feature. Seamless layers are created using the MapBasic program, seammgr.mbx, which creates and manages seamless tables. For complete information on creating and using seamless maps, see Chapter 6 of the User's Guide.
Specifying Display Attributes for a Map Layer

To specify display attributes for a map layer: 1. 2. Choose the layer from the Layer Control dialog. Click the Display button. or Double click on the layer name. The Display Options dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
207

Display Options Dialog
Display Mode Style Override Check to override the default style of a layer. The option is grayed if the selected layer is a layer of thematic shading, a raster image layer, or the cosmetic layer. Enabled when Style Override option is checked. Displays the button appropriate to the object type contained in the selected layer; Region; Line; Symbol; Text. Click to display the corresponding dialog. See: Symbol Style, Region Style, Line Style and Text Style Buttons.
Style Button
208
MapInfo Reference

Zoom Layering Display within zoom range Check to activate zoom layering. Zoom layering allows you to set the minimum and maximum distances at which the selected layer will be visible. For example, if you only want to see particular streets on a map when you are closer than 3 miles, set the minimum zoom to 0 and the maximum to 3. All layers, except the Cosmetic layer, can be zoomlayered. When changing the zoomlayered status of a layer that has thematic layers created from it, you will be prompted to change the zoomlayered status of the thematic layers. Min Zoom Max Zoom Show Line Direction Specify the minimum distance at which the selected layer is visible. Specify the maximum distance at which the selected layer is visible. Check to display the line direction in the layer. It may be helpful when using a street layer for addressing to determine which side of the street is the FromLeft, ToLeft, FromRight ToRight. Check to display an object's nodes when you are editing the layer. Check to show the object's centroid in the the layer. A region's centroid does not represent its center of mass. Instead, the centroid represents the location used for labeling (using the automatic labeling feature), geocoding, and placement of thematic pie and bar charts. If you edit a map in Reshape mode, you can reposition region centroids by dragging them. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options.
Show Nodes Show Centroids
OK Cancel
Labeling
A map can be labeled automatically or interactively. Maps display unlabeled. To label a map automatically, check the Auto Label checkbox, in the column designated by the Label icon, in the Layer Control dialog. The map will be labeled using information from the table associated with that layer. To label a map interactively use the Label tool. The Label tool allows you to place individual labels on a map, either from the designated table column, or using text you enter. The Label Options, Label Style and Text Style dialogs allow extensive label customization. Labels are part of the map layer in which they reside, and are always selectable and editable. Label location is based on the object's centroid, and user designated specifications, including anchor point and offset. These specifications are set in the Label Options dialog. Label size remains constant; it does not change with either zoom or scale changes.
MapInfo Reference
209

Use the Text Tool to add text to a map. See Text Tool for more information on this topic.
Automatic Labeling
To automatically label a layer in a map using information from that layer: 1. 2. Choose Map > Layer Control. Choose the layer you want to label; check the Auto Label checkbox. If the checkmark in the Auto Label checkbox is black, either zoom labeling is not in effect, or the settings allow display at the current zoom. If it is red, then zoom labeling is in effect specifying that labels display only within a certain zoom range, and the layer is zoomed outside of the designated zoom range. 3. Choose OK. The map redisplays with labels from the table column designated in the Label with section of the Label Options dialog. Only one column per table displays at one time. Access the Label Options dialog to change the visibility, content, font, text color, line style, and position of labels.
The Label Options Dialog

The Map > Layer Control >Label Options dialog determines the visibility, content, font, text color, line style, and anchor point of labels. These settings are used for both automatic and interactive labeling using the Label tool. When using the Label tool, the label is positioned at the place you designate by clicking the mouse button. To access the Label Options dialog: 1. 2. Choose Map > Layer Control. Click the Label button. The Label Options dialog displays.
210
MapInfo Reference

Label Options Dialog
Label with:
Choose the column that you want reflected in the label or choose Expression to create a customized label. Expression displays the Expression dialog. See the following: Creating Map Label Expressions. See Functions. Check to allow display of labels. Check to prevent display of labels. Check to activate zoom labeling. Zoom labeling allows you to set the minimum and maximum distances at which the labels will be visible. For example, if you only want to see particular labels on a map when you are closer than 3 miles, set the minimum zoom to 0 and the maximum to 3. Label size does not change with zoom or scale changes. Specify the minimum distance at which labels are visible. Specify the maximum distance at which labels are visible.
Visibility On Off Display within range
Min Zoom Max Zoom
MapInfo Reference
211

Allow duplicate text Label Partial Segments Maximum labels Check to place the same label on a map more than once. Label polylines even if line centroid is not within the window view. Enter the maximum number of labels that will display; labels are selected from the designated table in the order in which they are entered in the table. For example, if the designated table is the States table, and you enter 10, the first ten states listed in the table, which are in view, will be labeled. Click the Text Style button to display the Text Style dialog. See Text Style Dialog. Select a line type, or no line type, to attach the label to the anchor point. Do not display a line with the label. Create a callout by using a simple line that connects the label to the object's centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created. Create a callout by using an arrow line that connects the label to the object's centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created. Click an icon to select the label position relative to the label anchor. The diamond character represents the label anchor; the rectangle represents the label. The border of the selected box is bold. Check to rotate text to run parallel with line segments. This setting is ignored for points regions. Designate number of points (a measurement of text size) label should be placed from the anchor point. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Allow overlapping text Allow more than one object with the same text to be displayed.
Styles Text Style button Label Lines None Simple
Arrow
Position Anchor Point
Rotate label with line Label Offset OK Cancel Help
212
MapInfo Reference

Text Style Dialog
Font
Choose a font from the font dropdown list. Choose a point size from the point size dropdown list. The label point size remains at the specified size regardless of the zoom level.
Text Color Background None Halo Box Color Effects Bold Italic Underline All Caps Shadow Expanded Sample OK Cancel Help
Display the color palette; choose a text color. Do not halo or box the text. Display the text outlined in a designated color. Surround the text with a box in a designated color. Display the color palette; select a color to halo or box the text. Check to display text in boldface. Check to display text in italic. Check to display text underlined. Check to display text in all upper case letters. Check to display a grey drop" shadow under the text. Check to insert double spaces between each letter in the text. Displays sample text using the selected options. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
MapInfo Reference
213
Editing a Label
Edit an individual label by accessing the Label Style dialog. The designations made in the Label Style dialog apply only to the single label being entered or edited; the designations made in the Label Options dialog apply to all labels in the specified layer. When closing a table containing edited labels, you will be prompted to save or discard the labels. If you choose to save the labels, the Save workspace objects dialog displays. To edit an individual label: 1. 2. 3. Doubleclick on the label with the Select tool, or select the label and press F7. The Label Style dialog displays. Make the appropriate changes. Choose OK.
Label Style Dialog Font Anchor Point Click to display the Text Style dialog. See Text Style Dialog. Click an icon to select the label position relative to the label anchor. The diamond character represents the label anchor; the rectangle represents the label. The border of the selected box is bold. Select a line type, or no line type to attach the label to the anchor point. Specify the angle at which the label should be rotated about the anchor point.
Label Line Rotation Angle
214
MapInfo Reference

Offset Specify the number of points, a measurement of text size, the label should be placed from the anchor point. Enter text (to 255 characters) to be used as the label. Create label using the above specifications. Cancel dialog options. Access Help topic.
Text OK Cancel Help
Removing a Label
To remove one or more labels: 1. 2. Use the Select tool to select the label or labels you want to remove. Press <DELETE> or choose Edit > Clear to remove the selected labels.
To remove all custom labels: 1. Choose Map > Clear Custom Labels The prompt Clear all custom labels and revert to defaults displays. 2. Choose Discard to clear all custom labels.
Moving Labels
To move a label: 1. 2. Use the Select tool to choose the label(s) to be moved. Drag the label to the new position and release.
Rotating a Label
To rotate a label: 1. 2. Use the Select tool to choose the label to be rotated. Drag the label's rotation handle, which displays at the lower right of the label, to the desired location and release.
MapInfo Reference
215
Using Expressions to Create Labels

Write an expression to customize the look and information of labels. Labels created with expressions will change to reflect changes in the expression. To create a label expression: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Map > Layer Control. Choose a layer (other than the cosmetic layer) from the Layer Control dialog. Choose the Label button. The Label Options dialog displays. From the Label with dropdown list, choose Expression. The Expression dialog displays; complete the dialog. See Expression Dialog.
Creating Map Label Expressions

Create custom label displays by building expressions. The following Expression 1 will display the label with the county name in proper form (that is, first letter uppercase, the rest lowercase) while Expression 2 specifies the county name to be all capital letters. Expression 1: Proper$(County) Expression 2: Upper$(County) Expression 3 has specifies two columns; County and Population. Expression 3: Proper$(County) + Chr$(13) + Str$(Population) Use the Str$ function to convert the population value into a character string so that the string concatenation operator (+) can operate on it. Chr$(13)" inserts a carriage return into the string, and breaks it into two lines. The following label is produced: Cambria 47,934 Expression 4 is like expression 3, except that it inserts a colon into the label. Expression 4 Proper$(County) +: + Chr$(13) + Str$(Population)
The following label is produced: Cambria: 47,934 Expressions 5 and 6 return the lowest address number and the highest address number, respectively, for street segments in a StreetInfo table. Expression 5 Expression 6 Minimum(FromLeft, FromRight) Maximum(ToLeft, ToRight)
216
MapInfo Reference

Expression 7 creates a label containing the address range for a street segment. Expression 7 Str$(Minimum(FromLeft, FromRight)) + - + Str$(Maximum(ToLeft, ToRight)) A space, a dash, and a space are inserted between the two numbers. Expression 8 creates a twoline label with the street name on the first line and the address range on the second line. Expression 8 Proper$(Street) +: + Chr$(13) + Str$(Minimum(FromLeft, FromRight))+ - +Str$(Maximum(ToLeft, ToRight)) The following label is produced: Van Antwerp Av: 131 - 154
Thematic Maps as Layers

If you have created a thematic map, it is listed in Map > Layer Control as a separate layer. Thematic layer names display indented and above their corresponding data layers. You can modify the attributes of the thematic map. A grid thematic layer will not be indented in the layer control dialog; a grid thematic layer is a read-only layer. To modify the attributes of a thematic map: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Map > Layer Control. The Layer Control dialog displays. Choose the thematic layer. Click the Thematic button, or double click on the Thematic layer. The Modify Thematic Layer dialog displays. Double-clicking is not available for the grid thematic layer. Change the thematic settings, style, or legends from this dialog.
The availability of certain dialogs depends on the type of thematic map you are altering.
Reordering Map Layers

The Layer list has multiselect capabilities. To change the order of one or more contiguous layers, hold down the Shift key, select the layers, and drag them up or down. To change the order of one or more layers that are out of sequence, hold down the Control key, select the layers, and drag them up or down. As the layer(s) is being dragged, the snap marker appears to the immediate left of the listbox and the cursor changes. The snap marker acts as a place holder and indicates the location where the layer(s) will be inserted.
MapInfo Reference
217

When you begin to drag the layers, the cursor changes shape to represent the number of layers being dragged. If you are dragging one layer, the cursor becomes an arrow icon with a single layer icon attached to the top. If you are dragging multiple layers, the arrow icon displays as a multi-layered icon. If you select layers that cannot be dragged or if you are attempting to insert layers where they cannot be inserted, the cursor displays as a circle with a line through it. To interrupt dragging of layers, press the space bar. A selection of layers that is out of sequence will become contiguous upon insertion. You can also use the Up or Down buttons to move one or more layers. You cannot reorder or remove the cosmetic layer; it will always be the top layer. To reorder layers:
D D D
Select one or more layers and drag it up or down. Choose one or more layers and click the Up button. The selected layer(s) will display above its current position. Choose one or more layers and click the Down button. The selected layer(s) will display below its current position.
Reordering Thematic Layers

Thematic layers always display directly above their main layer in the Layer list. To distinguish the thematic layers from the main layer, the thematic layer, except for grid layers, is indented. Thematic layers always stay with their main layer. Dragging a main layer will automatically drag its thematic layer with it, even if its not selected. When selecting a main layer and a thematic layer that
218
MapInfo Reference

was created from a different main layer, the thematic layer's main layer must also be selected to reorder it. For instance, Layer Main1 has two thematic layers, Theme1a and Theme1b. Layer Main2 has one thematic layer, Theme2a. If Layer Main1 and Theme2a are selected for reordering, Layer Main2 must also be selected. You can move the main (base) layer of a grid theme map without moving the grid theme; once the grid is drawn it is separate from the main layer. Selecting and dragging a thematic layer(s) will not move the main layer. Thematic layers that are based on the same main layer can be reordered among themselves, according to the following draw order ranking: Theme layers can only be inserted amongst other theme layers that are of the same draw order ranking. Draw order ranking is determined as follows:
D D D D
Pie and Bar charts and Graduated Symbol thematic layers hold the highest draw order ranking. They will always be the top thematic layer. Dot Density holds the next draw order ranking. These themes will always fall below Pie and Bar charts and Graduated Symbol themes. Ranged and Individual Value thematic layers hold the lowest draw order ranking. They will always be below Pie and Bar charts, Graduated Symbol, and Dot Density thematic layers. Grid themes rank lowest; they are placed below the layer from which they are created.
Adding Multiple Layers

To add multiple layers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose Map > Layer Control. The Layer Control dialog displays. Select Layers > Add. The Add Layer dialog displays, showing a list of all tables currently open in MapInfo. To add a contiguous block of layers, select the first layer, hold down the shift key, select the last layer, and click on OK. To add multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key, select the layers, and click on OK. Selected layers will be added to the Layer Control listbox. Each layer will be ordered automatically according to the type of layer it is. For instance, layers with points are placed above layers with lines which are placed above layers with regions. To deselect layers, hold down the control key, click on the layers, and click OK.
6.
MapInfo Reference
219
Removing Multiple Layers

To remove multiple layers: 1. 2. 3. Choose Map > Layer Control. The Layer Control dialog displays. To remove contiguous layers select the first layer, hold down the shift key and select the last layer, and click Remove. To remove multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key, select the layers, and click Remove.
The Cosmetic layer cannot be removed. You cannot remove all of the map layers. There must always be at least one main layer displaying in the Layer list. Selecting all the map layers disables the Remove button.
Changing Attributes for Multiple Layers

Using the multiselect functionality, it is possible to change the attributes of multiple layers at once. To change the visible attribute for multiple layers: 1. 2. 3. Hold down the shift key and select a contiguous block of layers, or, to select multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select individual layers. Click on a check box under the Visible icon (represented by an eye) for one of the layers. All layers will be checked or, if the check box was already checked and you have unchecked it, all layers will be unchecked. The attribute for all the selected layers will be cleared.
The Cosmetic layer's display status cannot be changed. To change the Selectable attribute for multiple layers: 1. 2. 3. Hold down the shift key and select a contiguous block of layers, or, to select multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select individual layers. Select an enabled check box under the Selectable icon (represented by an arrow) for one of the layers. All layers will be checked or, if the check box was already checked, the attribute for all the selected layers will be cleared.
220
MapInfo Reference

To change the Automatic Labeling layer attribute for multiple layers: 1. 2. 3. Hold down the shift key and select a contiguous block of layers, or to select multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select individual layers. Select a check box under the Zoomlayer icon (represented by a series of boxes) for one of the layers. All layers will be checked or, if the check box was already checked, the attribute for all the selected layers will be cleared.
The Cosmetic layer's Zoomlayer status cannot be changed. Note: MapInfo only allows one editable layer in a map.
See:
Functions Label Button New Map Window Command User's Guide: Chapter 6
MapInfo Reference
221
Legend Button Main Toolbar
Legend Button Main Toolbar

Use the Legend Button to:
D
display the theme legend window associated with thematic maps or graphs.
The Legend Button is Available when:

D
The Legend button is always available.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Legend button
Displaying a Legend
"
Choose Main Toolbar > Legend button. The theme legend window associated with the thematic map or graph legend displays.
Use the Legend Manager tool to embed the theme legend in a mapper.
See:
Show/Hide Theme Legend Window Tool Manager
222
MapInfo Reference
Line Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Line Button to:
D
access the Line tool. Use the Line tool to draw straight lines.
The Line Button is Available when:

D
a Layout window is active or a Map window with an editable layer is active.
Menu Path
D
Drawing Toolbar > Line button
Drawing Straight Lines

To draw a straight line: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Line button. Move the pointer where you want to begin drawing the line. Click and hold down the mouse button, and drag the pointer. The line appears on the screen and changes length as you move the pointer. Release the mouse button.
Press <SHIFT> while drawing a line to constrain the line to horizontal, vertical, or 45degree diagonal.
Specifying Line Object Attributes

To specify line object attributes: 1. 2. Select a line. Choose Edit > Get Info. or Doubleclick on a line with the Select tool. The Line Object dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
223

Line Object Dialog
Start Point X Y End Point X Y Length Style OK Cancel Help
Displays the current X and Y coordinate values. To change the Start Point, enter new values. Displays the current X and Y coordinate values. To change the End Point, enter new values. Displays the length of the line. To change the line length,enter a new value. Display the Line Style dialog. Choose the style, color and width of the line. See Line Style Button. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
224
MapInfo Reference
Line Style Button Drawing Toolbar
Line Style Button Drawing Toolbar Line Style Command Options Menu
Use the Line Style Button and Command to:
D
specify line attributes (type, color and width) for new or selected lines.
Line Style is Available when:

D
Line Style is always available.
Menu Path
"
Options > Line Style or
"
Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button
Using Line Style

Use Line Style to set the type, size and color of lines you create, or change the attributes of existing lines. The lines must reside in an editable layer. To change the attributes of other types of objects, see Region Style Button, Symbol Style Button and Text Style Button.
Setting Style for New Lines

To set the line style for new lines: 1. 2. Make the layer where the lines are to be created editable. Choose Options > Line Style or Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button. The Line Style dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
225
Line Style Button Drawing Toolbar

Line Style Dialog
Style Color Width Sample Cancel OK Help
Choose a type of line from the dropdown list. Display the color palette, and choose a color for the symbol. Choose the line width from the dropdown list. Displays a sample of the line. Cancel the operation. Apply the selections. Sets style for new lines and changes the style of any selected lines. Display appropriate Help topic.
Changing Line Style

To change the style of existing lines: 1. 2. 3. Make the layer where the symbol lines reside editable. Select one or more line or polyline objects on the map. Choose Options > Line Style or Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button. The Line Style dialog displays. 4. 5. Choose the appropriate options. See the preceding: Line Style Dialog. Choose OK. The line attributes change according to the dialog selections.
Note to Pen Plotter Users

Depending on what device driver you are using, you may see unsatisfactory results using a pen plotter to output certain line styles. In the Line Style dialog, the list of available styles ends with several styles that may not plot properly.
See:
226
MapInfo Reference
Line Width
Line Width
Use Line Width to:
D
designate the thickness of lines.
Line Width is available for:

D D D D D
line style width region style border width label lines graph lines, axis lines highlight style for selected and target lines
Menu Path
D D
Options > Line Style > Width Options > Region Style > Width
or Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button Drawing Toolbar > Region Style button Options > Preferences > Map Window > Highlight Control > Selected Objects Options > Preferences > Map Window > Highlight Control > Target Objects
D D D D
Using Line Width

Line width can be designated in pixels or points. In MapInfo versions prior to MapInfo Professional 4.5, only the pixel option was available; the line widths that display in the dropdown list in the width option are measured in onscreen pixels. When printing the map, an approximation of line width is made. This is printer DPI dependent. The pixel line width choices in MapInfo Professional 5.0 remain the same as those in previous versions. They are now numbered. The line width option, Points, allows you to designate accurate line widths using point size. In addition to providing accurate scaling during printing, this option allows for thicker lines than previously available.
MapInfo Reference
227
Line Width
To select a line width:
"
Choose Options > Line Style. The Line Style
Style Color Width
Choose a type of line from the dropdown list. Display the color palette, and choose a color for the symbol. Pixels: Enter a number from 17, each number represents a line width in pixels. Points: Select a point size from the dropdown list, or enter a point size. Displays a sample of the line. Cancel the operation. Apply the selections. Sets style for new lines and changes the style of any selected lines.
Sample Cancel OK
A table/workspace that has line widths designated in point size cannot be opened in versions of MapInfo prior to MapInfo Professional 4.5.
See:
Line Style Button Region Style Button
228
MapInfo Reference
Main Toolbar
Main Toolbar
Use the Main Toolbar to:
D
choose tools, access dialogs, and show or hide windows. a Map, Layout or Browser window is active and the Options > Toolbar dialog is set to display the Main Toolbar.
The Main Toolbar is Available when:

D D
Using the Main Toolbar

For an onscreen button description, click and hold the mouse button down to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars. To choose from the Main Toolbar:
"
Click on the appropriate button. The button is highlighted.
The Main Toolbar contains tools to select objects, change the view of the map window, get information about an object and to show distances between objects. It also contains command buttons that allow you to change layer attributes and open a legend or statistics window. Change View button Access the Change View dialog to specify settings for map window width, map scale, resizing and centering. Access the Grabber tool to reposition a map or layout within its window. Access the Info tool to view the tabular data that is associated with a map object. Access the Label tool to label objects with information from the related database. Access the Layer Control dialog to specify how the various tables in a map window are layered and displayed. Access the Legend window for maps or graphs.
Grabber button
Info button
Label button
Layer Control button
Legend button
MapInfo Reference
229
Main Toolbar
Marquee Select button Access the Marquee Select tool to select and search for map objects within a given rectangle (marquee box). Access the Boundary Select tool so you can select and search for map objects within a given region. Access the Radius Select tool so you can select and search for map objects within a circular region. Access the Ruler tool to determine the distance between two points and the length of some path. Assign selected objects to the target district during a Redistricting session. Set the target district from the map during a Redistricting session. Access the Select tool to select objects/records in a map, layout or Browser window. Also acts as the default pointer/cursor tool. Access the Statistics window so you can tally the sum and average of all numeric fields for the currently chosen objects or records. Access the Zoomin tool to obtain a closer area view of a map or layout. Access the Zoomout tool to obtain a wider area view of a map or layout. Access the Set Clip Region button to isolate a map region for display. Access the Clip Region On/Off button to redisplay the entire map. Access the Drag Map Window button to drag a MapInfo map into an OLE container application.
Boundary Select button
Radius Select button
Ruler button
Assign Selected Objects button Set Target District from Map button Select button
Statistics button
Zoomin button
Zoomout button
Set Clip Region button
Clip Region On/Off button Drag Map Window Button
230
MapInfo Reference
Main Toolbar
Autoscrolling
When you use a tool in the Map or Layout window, the window scrolls if you drag the tool outside of the window boundaries. The window will continue to scroll until you release the mouse or move the cursor back into the window. Press Esc to stop scrolling; the tool remains active. To cancel the tool, press Esc after the scrolling has stopped. Autoscrolling works with any tool that can be dragged; it does not work with single-click tools, such as the Grabber or Info tools.
See:
Toolbars Command User's Guide: Chapter 4
MapInfo Reference
231
Make Table Mappable Command Table > Maintenance

Use Make Table Mappable to:
D
makes a table linked to a remote database mappable.
Make Table Mappable is available when:

D
at least one linked table is open and there are no pending edits against it.
Menu Path
D
Table > Maintenance > Make Table Mappable
Using Make Table Mappable

The Make Table mappable command makes a table linked to a remote database mappable. Any MapInfo table may be displayed in a Browser, but only a mappable table may have graphical objects attached. Only mappable tables may be displayed in Map windows. To make an ODBC table mappable:
"
Choose Table > Maintenance > Make Table Mappable. The Select ODBC Table displays for you to select an ODBC table to make mappable.
Select ODBC Dialog
232
MapInfo Reference

Connection If there are multiple connections open, choose a connection from the pulldown list. A list of tables for that connection will display in the Tables field. Press the New button to make a new connection from the SQL Data Sources dialog. Displays the owner of the database to which you have connected, if any. Highlight the name of the table you want to select to make mappable. The Filter button lets the user select which types of tables to list. The default shows Tables, View, and Synonyms, and hides System tables. Selects the table to make mappable and brings up the Make Table dialog. Cancels the selection.
New Owner Table Filter
OK Cancel
Once you have selected an ODBC Table to make mappable, the following dialog appears: Make Table Mappable Dialog
MapInfo Reference
233

Index Type The spatial index type of the column that has the spatial information in the ODBC table. The spatial index provides a fast way for MapInfo to access the spatial data in the table. The four types to choose from are Autometric SQS, Oracle SDO, MapInfo, and XY Coordinates (i.e., no index). Required only if you selected the MapInfo or XY Coordinates index type. Select from the list the name of the column from which to query the points. Required only if you selected the MapInfo or XY coordinate index type. Select the X and Y columns that contain the point data you wish to map. For Autometric SQS, select point, linear, or region object types. (Defaults to point object type for Oracle SDO, MapInfo, and XY Coordinates index types.) - point - indicates the table only can contain point objects - linear - indicates the table can only contain lines and polylines - region - indicates the table can only contain region objects Object Style Depends on the object types that the mappable table can contain. You can set the default style that the objects will use for display when they are downloaded. Displays the Symbol Style dialog where you can select a default symbol for the point data. Displays the Line Style dialog where you can select a default symbol for the line data. Displays the Region Style dialog where you can select a default symbol for the region data. Make the ODBC table mappable with the chosen spatial data. Cancel the operation. Access online help. Activates the Choose Projection dialog. Specify the projection for the ODBC table. The projection must match the projection used by the corresponding remote database table. For information on the Choose Projection dialog, see Projection Button."
Index Column
X Coordinate, Y Coordinate Object Type
Symbol Line Region OK Cancel Help Projection
See:
Save Table Command, Unlink ODBC Table Command, Open ODBC Table Command
234
MapInfo Reference
MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network
MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network

Use MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network to:
D
connect to MapInfo's online forum.
MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network is available when:

D
always available in MapInfo Professional if a modem is installed.
Menu Path
"
Help > MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network
Using the MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network

Connect to the MapInfo online forum to learn about new products and services. The forum contains information on MapInfo products, including downloadable demos. Additionally, there is a BBS message board. To access the MapInfo Forum: 1. Choose Help > MapInfo Forum on the Microsoft Network. The Microsoft Network dialog displays. 2. Enter the appropriate information; press Connect. The MSN screen displays; the MapInfo icons display. Click on an icon to display further information.
MapInfo Reference
235
MapInfo Help Topics
MapInfo Help Topics

Use MapInfo Help Topics to:
D
access Help topics using the Contents, Index or Find categories.
MapInfo Help Topics is available when:

D
MapInfo Help Topics is always available.
Menu Path
D
Help > MapInfo Help Topics
Using MapInfo Help Topics

MapInfo's comprehensive online help provides stepbystep directions on using MapInfo features, as well as overviews of MapInfo's functionality. Click the Index tab to display an index of topics; enter the topic name in the search box, and the topic title displays. Click the Find tab to activate the Find Wizard which allows you to search for specific phrases, rather than topic titles.
236
MapInfo Reference
MapInfo on the World Wide Web
MapInfo on the World Wide Web

Use Mapinfo on the World Wide Web to:
D
access the MapInfo WWW home page.
Mapinfo on the World Wide Web is available when:

D
either the Microsoft Internet Explorer, or Netscape (versions after 1.1) WWW browser is installed and TCP/IP networking is available through a winsock DLL.
Menu Path
D
Help > MapInfo on the World Wide Web
Using MapInfo on the World Wide Web

To access MapInfo on the WWW:
"
Choose Help > MapInfo on the World Wide Web. The browser opening screen displays and brings you to the MapInfo home page.
If you have both browsers installed, and want to change the default browser, edit the WWW browser key in the Windows Registry.
MapInfo Reference
237
Marquee Select Button Main Toolbar
Marquee Select Button Main Toolbar

Use the Marquee Select Button to:
D
access the Marquee Select tool. Use the Marquee Select tool to search for and choose objects within a given rectangle.
The Marquee Select Button is available when:

D
a Map or Layout window is active.
Menu Path
D
Main Toolbar > Marquee Select button
Searching for Objects Within a Rectangle

To search for objects in a rectangular shaped area: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Toolbar > Marquee Select button. The cursor displays as a pointing hand when in a Map or Layout window. Position the cursor at one corner of the area from which the selection will be made and press the mouse button. Keep the mouse button depressed and drag the cursor away from the starting point; a dotted rectangle or marquee box forms, indicating the area chosen. Release the mouse button when the rectangle reaches the appropriate size. The objects in the topmost selectable layer within the rectangle are selected. To select objects from another layer, you must turn off selectable in Layer Control for the upper layers. Only objects from one layer at a time are selected.

Press <SHIFT> while using the Marquee Select tool to add newly selected objects to the previous selection.
See:
238
MapInfo Reference
Modify Image Registration Command Table > Raster Menu
Modify Image Registration Command Table > Raster Menu

Use Modify Image Registration to:
D
add or edit the control points used to register a raster image.
Modify Image Registration is Available when:

D
a raster image is open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Raster > Modify Image Registration
Modifying the Register Raster Image Dialog

To access the Register Raster Image dialog for modification:
"
Choose Table > Raster > Modify Image Registration. or
1. 2. 3.
Choose File > Open Table. Choose Raster Image from the File Format dropdown list. Choose a raster image and choose Open. The Register Raster Image dialog displays. Modify the dialog options.
4.
See:
Register Raster Image Command User's Guide: Chapter 15
MapInfo Reference
239
Modify Thematic Map
Modify Thematic Map

Use Modify Thematic Map to:
D
modify an existing thematic map. a Map window is active and at least one thematic layer is in the Map window.
Modify Thematic Map is Available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Map > Modify Thematic Map
Modifying a Thematic Map

Modify a thematic map by:
D D D
choosing Map > Modify Thematic Map double clicking the appropriate legend in the Legend window clicking the Thematic button in the Layer Control dialog
Modifying a Thematic Map by Using the Map Menu

To modify a thematic map: 1. 2. Make the window that contains the thematic map active. Choose Map > Modify Thematic Map. If there is more than one thematic layer in the active map window, the Modify Thematic Map dialog displays: choose the layer to be modified. Choose Modify. The Modify Thematic Map dialog displays.
240
MapInfo Reference
Modify Thematic Map

Preview Legend Label Order Display the legend of the thematic map you are modifying. Determine the order in which range labels (for ranged and individual values maps) and labels (for all other thematic maps) appear in the legend. If you are modifying a ranged map, the order you specify is also shown in the Styles dialog. Ranges display from lowest to highest value. Ranges display from highest to lowest value. The buttons that correspond to the type of thematic map you are modifying display. Customize ranges on a ranged map; option is only available for ranged maps. Customize the settings on a dot density map; option is only available for graduated symbols, dot density and grid maps. In a grid map, display the IDW Interpolator Settings dialog. Cell Size: Defines the width and height of a grid cell in distance units. Grid cells are square so you are specifying both width and height with one value. Note that when you change the cell size, the Grid Dimensions Control is updated to reflect the new dimensions. Exponent: Defines the exponential influence of nearby data points on the value calculated for each grid cell. Increasing the exponent decreases the influence of data points the further they are from a grid cell. Search Radius: Defines the maximum distance in grid cells between a grid cell and its neighboring data points. This distance determines if these points are considered in the distance weighting average. Grid Border: Defines the distance beyond the source table's bounding rectangle by which to expand the resultant grid.
Ascending Descending Customize Ranges Settings
MapInfo Reference
241
Modify Thematic Map

Interpolator The MapInfo Professional method of interpolation is Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW). The interpolator produces a raster grid file which displays as a raster table in a map window. Customize style attributes such as color and size; option is available for ranged, graduated symbol, pie charts, bar charts, grid and individual value maps. In a grid map, display the Grid Color dialog. A preview of the inflection points, the color spectrum bar, and minimum and maximum options display. Specify inflection values and colors. Add: Click to add additional inflection settings. The maximum value is copied and added to the bottom of the Value list. Double click the color box to display the Color dialog and change the color for one of the identical inflection points. Remove: Choose to remove a value from the display. Adjustments Contrast: Adjust the contrast in the image; the default contrast setting is 50%. Brightness: Adjust the brightness of the image; the default brightness setting is 50%. Gray Scale: Check to display a legend in shades of gray instead of color.
Styles
Template Save As Displays the Save Theme to a Template dialog. Type a unique name or select an existing name and overwrite it. If you overwrite an existing template, you will be asked to confirm this action. If you have created a grid thematic map, the Grid Theme Options display: Save Inflection Values: select to store the actual values for the inflection points in the template. Save Inflection Percentage: Save the percentiles and calculate the actual values from the minimum and maximum of the data source table. Select this option to display the Merge Template dialog. This dialog displays only themes of the same type as the theme you are merging. The Merge button is enabled only when you are modifying an existing theme, not when you are creating a theme. Customize map legend; options is available for all types of thematic maps. Display appropriate Help topic. Cancel the dialog option. Modify the thematic map based on the specified changes you made.
Merge
Save Customized Legend Text Help Cancel OK
242
MapInfo Reference
Modify Thematic Map
Modifying a Thematic Map by Using the Legend Window

To modify a thematic map: 1. Double click on the legend of the thematic layer you wish to modify. The Modify Thematic Layer dialog displays. Use this dialog to make changes to the map or legend. See the preceding: Modify Thematic Layer Dialog. Choose OK. The map is modified according to the specifications.
2.
Modifying a Thematic Map Using the Layer Control Dialog

To modify a thematic map: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Map > Layer Control or click the Layer Control button in the Main ToolBar. The Layer Control dialog displays. You can also press Ctrl/L to display the Layer Control dialog. Choose a thematic layer in the Layer Control list box. Choose Thematic. The Modify Thematic Layer dialog displays. Use this dialog to make changes to the map or legend. See the preceding: Modify Thematic Layer Dialog. Choose OK to exit from the Layer Control dialog.
See:
Create Thematic Map, Layer Control Button/Command, User's Guide: Chapter 10
MapInfo Reference
243
New Browser Window Command Window Menu

Use New Browser Window to:
D
display and manipulate data in tabular format.
New Browser Window is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Window > New Browser Window or
Standard Toolbar > New Browser button
The Browser Window

If you have worked with spreadsheets or databases, you are probably familiar with the Browser format. Each row of the table contains one record, and each column in the record contains information about a particular field. Components of the Browser Window
D D D D
table name: displays in the title bar. column titles: displays at the top of the columns beneath the title bar. check box: click to select the row. StatusBar: displays how many records are in the table and which of those records are currently displayed in the Browser window.
Displaying Data in Table Form

To display an open table in a Browser window:
"
Choose Window > New Browser Window. If only one table is open, that table displays in a Browser window.
"
If more than one table is open, the New Browser Window dialog displays. Choose a table from the Browse table dropdown list. Choose OK. The table displays in a Browser window.
A Browser Window
244
MapInfo Reference
The Browse menu option displays in the main menu bar. The Browse menu contains menu options used with Browser windows and is active whenever a Browser window is the active window.
Opening Multiple Browsers

To open multiple browsers: 1. 2. Choose Window > New Browser Window. The Browse Table dialog appears. To open a contiguous block of tables, select the first table you want, hold down the shift key and select the last table you want to open. To open multiple tables that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the tables. 3. To deselect tables, hold down the control key and click on the tables.
Adding and Editing Text in a Browser Window

When you move the cursor into the Browse window, it turns into an I beam. This indicates that you are ready to perform editing functions. To add and edit text in a Browser window: 1. 2. 3. 4. Move the I beam to the row you want to edit. Click on the row. A blinking cursor displays. Position the cursor at the point where you want to enter text. Click on the location and type the text. The text displays at the flashing cursor. Press <TAB> to move to the next column. Press <SHIFT> <TAB> to move to the previous column. 5. Use File > Save to save the changes.
Choosing Text Style

Use the Text Style dialog to change the font, text color, background, and attributes of the text for the entire table.
MapInfo Reference
245

To access the Text Style dialog:
"
Choose Options > Text Style. See Text Style Button.
Scrolling Through a Table

A Browser window allows you to view tabular data in a table. Use the vertical scroll bar to view various ranges of records. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see different sets of columns.
Moving a Column
Sometimes the default order of columns in a table is not the order you want for a particular session. You may want to change the default order, but not change the structure of the underlying table. To move a column: 1. 2. 3. Move the cursor over the column name. The cursor displays as a hand. Click and drag the column heading left or right. Release the mouse button; the column is moved.
Displaying a Field
Use Browse > Pick Fields to choose which fields are displayed in the active Browser window. You can also rename a column, create a new column, or edit an existing column for display in the Browser window. A column you modify or create is for display purposes only, and is not saved with the Browser window. To save a column that has been modified or created, use SQL Select or Update Columns. See Pick Fields Command.
246
MapInfo Reference
Resizing a Column
Resizing a column allows you to make it wider or narrower to accommodate text in a Browser window. To resize a column: 1. Move the cursor over a column divider in the Browser window. The cursor becomes a vertical bar with left and right arrows. 2. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. Move the mouse left or right to drag the line and make the column larger or smaller. Release the mouse button when the column is the appropriate size. Release the mouse button; the column is resized.
This resizing operation is temporary; it only affects the fields of the tables columns that are displayed in the Browser window, but does not change their width in the underlying table. Workspaces do not save resizing information.
See:
The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 4
MapInfo Reference
247
New Graph Window Command Window Menu

Use New Graph Window to:
D
display a table as a graph.
New Graph Window is Available when:

"
at least one table with at least one numeric column (integer, small integer, decimal, float) is open.
Menu Path
D
Window > New Graph Window or Standard Toolbar > New Graph button
Displaying a Table as a Graph

To display a table as a graph:
"
Choose Window > New Graph Window menu. The Graph Table dialog displays.
Graph Table Dialog Graph Table using columns Label with columns OK Cancel Help A Graph Window Choose a table to graph. Choose up to four columns. Choose the column with which the records are to be labeled. Display a Graph window in which the data is graphed in the default type of graph, a rotated bar graph. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
248
MapInfo Reference
See:
The Mipro User's Guide: Chapter 4
MapInfo Reference
249
New Layout Window Window Menu

Use New Layout Window to:
D
arrange and annotate the contents of one or more windows for printing.
New Layout Window is Available when:

D
New Layout Window is always available.
Menu Path
D
Window > New Layout Window
Creating a Layout Window

To create a Layout window:
"
Choose Window > New Layout Window. or
Standard Toolbar > New Layout button
When no windows are open, MapInfo creates a blank Layout. When there are windows open, MapInfo displays the New Layout Window dialog:
"
Choose one of the options; click OK.
When you have made a choice, MapInfo opens and displays that Layout.
When MapInfo first opens a Layout, it sets the page size and orientation (portrait or landscape) according to the current setting for your printer. If you open the Layout with a different printer setup is different, the Layout uses the page size and orientation for that printer setup. The sizes and positions of objects in the Layout are the same, but the way the Layout is broken into pages is different.
250
MapInfo Reference

After you create a Layout, that Layout is the currently active window. MapInfo places the Layout menu on the menu bar. Use the Layout menu to choose options for working with Layouts.
Layout Window Description

Layout windows have scroll bars at the right and at the bottom like Map and Browser windows. You can display rulers at the top and to the left to help you in positioning, sizing and aligning objects. The Zoom displayed in the StatusBar indicates the magnification factor that is currently applied to the Layout. When the zoom is 37.46%, then the Layout is being displayed 37.46% of its actual size. When the zoom is at 123%, then the Layout is being displayed at 123% of its actual size.
Ordering of Objects in a Layout

The objects in Layout frames, text, lines, rectangles, and so forth are ordered from front to back. Think of each object as being drawn on a separate transparency, with the transparencies being stacked, one in front of the other. This is most obvious in the case of two objects that overlap in space. An object that overlaps another object is said to be in front of it. This is also true for two objects that do not overlap: one of them is in front of the other. To determine which one is in front, you can move one object so that at least part of it occupies the space that is currently occupied by the other object,. When it is in front of the other object, it overlaps it; when it is behind the other object, it is overlapped by it. This fronttoback ordering is initially determined by the order in which the objects were created. The most recently created object is in front of all other objects. You can change this order using the Bring to Front and Send to Back menu options.
Setting the Zoom Using Numerical Keys

You can use numerical keys <1> through <8> to set the zoom level in a layout:
Click one of these keys when a Layout is the active window, and MapInfo changes the Layout's zoom. New Layout Window Dialog

KEY ZOOM
1 6.25 2 12.5 3 25 4 50 5 100 6 200 7 400 8 800
MapInfo Reference
251
One Frame for Window
Use the dialog's menu to pick the window you want to display in the Layout. MapInfo creates a Layout with the selected window displayed in a frame centered in the Layout. A Graph always has a legend. A Map has a legend when it has been thematically shaded. You can reposition the legend. Create a Layout where all of the open maps, tables, and graphs (along with a legend for the currently active map or graph) are placed in the Layout in the same positions and sizes they have on the screen. You can then reposition and resize them. When you choose this option, close all of the windows that you are not going to use before you open the Layout. Create a blank Layout. Use the Frame tool to manually place maps, graphs, and their legends into the Layout. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Frames for All Currently Open Windows
No Frames OK Cancel Help
See:
252
MapInfo Reference
New Map Window Command Window Menu

Use New Map Window to:
D
display a table as a map.
New Map Window is Available when:

D
at least one mappable table (a table in which graphic objects are attached to the records) is open or a raster table is open.
Menu Path
"
Window > New Map Window or
Standard Toolbar > New Mapper button
Displaying a Table as a Map

Maps give you a visual display of the spatial and geographic contents of tables. When used in conjunction with tables and graphs, maps allow you to do sophisticated analysis with relative ease. While browsers and graphs only display information from a single table, maps can display information from many tables at once. You can display a table as a map in one of three ways. To display a table as a map:
D
Choose File > Open Table. Open a mappable table with the Display table in window option checked. The table is automatically displayed in a Map window. or Choose File > Open Table. Open the mappable table(s) without the Display table in window option checked. Choose Window > New Map Window. Using the Map Tables dialog, choose the table(s) for the map. See the following: Map Tables Dialog.
New Map Table Dialog
MapInfo Reference
253

Map tables The Map Table dialog allows you to choose the tables which make up the layers for the map. There are four dropdown lists and you can choose up to to four tables at a time. You can create a Map with more than four layers by adding additional layers using the Add Layer button in the Layer Control dialog (Map > Layer Control). MapInfo draws the layers into the Map in order from the bottom (fourth dropdown list in the dialog box) to the top (first dropdown list in dialog box). Place the tables into the Map in an order that allows you to see everything. Do not place a table containing regions (such as states or counties) over a table containing only points (such as towns or cities) or lines (streets and roads). The regions would then hide the points and lines.
or
D
Choose File > Open Table. Open a mappable table with the Display table in window option checked. Choose Open Table from the File menu again. Open another mappable file without the Display table in window option checked. Choose Map > Layer Control. You will see that the Map currently consists of a layer which is the first table opened and the cosmetic layer. The cosmetic layer is part of every Map and is always the top layer. Press the Add button and select the newly opened table from the dropdown list.
A Map Window
Each table becomes a separate layer in the Map. The tables in a map are listed in the Map window's title bar. The tables are listed in descending order from left to right. The table farthest to the left is the table that is the top layer in the map. The table farthest to the right is the bottom layer of the map. After you create a Map, it becomes the active window and the Map menu option appears in the menu bar. Use it to choose options when working with maps.
254
MapInfo Reference
StatusBar Display for Maps

The StatusBar allows you to view the following information for the active map:
D D D D
Current zoom (the distance across the Map). This is the default setting. Map scale Cursor position in coordinates Snap Node status
Choose to display or hide the StatusBar. See Options > StatusBar. Choose what to display on the StatusBar. See Map > Change View.
Changing a Maps Display Parameters

Change a map's zoom level by specifying certain parameters in the Change View dialog. To change a map's zoom level: 1. Choose Map > Change View. or Choose Main Toolbar > Change View button. The Change View dialog displays. Use the Change View dialog to set various parameters of the map including:
D D D
the display of the current zoom, scale or cursor position in the StatusBar. The default unit of distance is miles", specified in Map > Options. the option to change the zoom, scale, and the center point of the current map view. the behavior of the map when you resize the window.
Scrolling Through a Map

Use the scroll bars to move the map up, down, right, or left. Sometimes you may scroll so that you move the view completely off the map. When this occurs, the map appears to be blank. Activate Previous View or View Entire Layer from the Map menu. Either of these will return you to the previous view of the map, and you can reposition the map again.
See:
MapInfo Reference
255
New Redistrict Window Command Window Menu

Use New Redistrict Window to:
D
begin a redistricting session. New Redistrict creates a special table, called Districts, and displays the table in a Browser window. The Districts Browser, used in conjunction with a Map window, lets you perform redistricting. You assign map objects to a district by selecting the objects. As you select objects, MapInfo automatically calculates the net values for each district, and displays the values in the Districts Browser.
New Redistrict Window is Available when:

D
a map window is open.
Menu Path
"
Window > New Redistrict Window or
Standard Toolbar > New Redistricter button
You may only have one Districts Window open at a time. If a Districts Window is currently open, choosing Window > New Redistrict Window will display a warning that a District Window already exists.
About Redistricting
Redistricting is a process of assigning map objects to groups. As you assign map objects to groups, MapInfo automatically calculates totals for each group of objects, and displays the totals in a special Browser window. This process is sometimes known as loadbalancing. Redistricting is indispensable to anyone creating sales territories. If you plan to assign the same number of salespeople to each territory, you need to make sure that each territory represents an equitable number of customers and/or leads. MapInfo's redistricting feature makes it easy to create territories and adjust the territories based on the distribution of customer data When you perform redistricting, you create a number of districts. The exact number of districts needed depends on the nature of your work. You can assign a unique name to each district; thus, if you want to work with four districts, you might call the districts NorthEast, SouthEast, NorthWest, and SouthWest. Each district appears as one row in the special Districts Browser. The Districts Browser is different from other Browser windows in several respects:
D D
You can only select one row at a time from the Districts Browser. You cannot Shiftclick to select multiple rows. The Districts Browser always has one row selected; you cannot unselect this row by choosing Query > Unselect All.
256
MapInfo Reference

D
When you select a row from the Districts Browser, that row becomes the target district. The target district is the district which will be affected by subsequent redistricting operations.
Once you have selected a target district, you assign map objects to that district by selecting the map objects. You can select objects by pointing and clicking, or by performing queries such as SQL Select. When you select map objects, MapInfo tentatively assigns the selected objects to the target district. MapInfo then recalculates the totals for each district, and displays the new totals in the Districts Browser. You then can examine the contents of the Districts Browser to decide whether you want to make the district assignments permanent. To cancel the tentative district assignment, unselect the map objects. To make the tentative district assignment permanent, choose Redistrict > Assign Selected Objects, or choose Main Toolbar > Assign Selected Objects button. When you choose Assign Selected Objects, MapInfo stores the target district's name in the rows of the selected objects. Thus, if you assign map objects to a district called NorthWest, MapInfo stores NorthWest in each object's row. Each district has its own set of fill, line, and symbol styles. When you assign a map object to a district, the object subsequently appears in the style of the district. Thus, if you choose a solid blue fill for the NorthEast district, objects that you assign to NorthEast appear in solid blue.
Using the Redistrict Dialog

When you choose Window > New Redistrict, MapInfo displays the Redistrict dialog. You must complete this dialog before you can begin a redistricting session. New Redistrict Window
MapInfo Reference
257

Source Table The Source Table dropdown list contains a list of table names. Choose the table that contains the map objects you wish to redistrict. For example, if one of the tables contains customer information, and you want to assign customers to sales districts, choose the customers table from the Source Table dropdown list. The District Field dropdown list contains a list of the columns in the selected source table. Choose the column that MapInfo should use to store district names. MapInfo may not be able to create unique districts if the selected field is less than four characters wide. If you choose a column less than four characters wide, you will be asked to confirm your choice. Warning: During the redistricting process, MapInfo automatically overwrites the contents of the district field. Therefore, you must choose a district field carefully. Be aware that MapInfo may overwrite the contents of the column you choose.If you are performing redistricting for the first time, you may want to add a new column to the table, and then use the new column as the district column. To add a new column to the table, choose Table > Maintenance > Table Structure. MapInfo automatically creates a district for each value contained in the district column.
District Fields
258
MapInfo Reference

District Fields (cont.) If you choose a district column that contains area codes, MapInfo creates one district for each area code. If you choose a district column that is blank, MapInfo does not automatically create any districts, and you must create districts manually. As a general rule, you should not choose a column which contains unique values, such as customer names or serial numbers. Instead, you should choose a column which is completely blank or a column containing values that are shared among multiple rows. You might choose a column containing state names, county names, postal codes, or area codes.
Available Fields: Fields The Available Fields list and the Fields to Browse list work to Browse together. Available Fields contains a list of column expressions. You can move some or all of these column expressions to the Fields to Browse list. Each column that you move to the Fields to Browse list will appear in the Districts Browser. Note that only the District field, styles, and sum and percent of numeric table fields are available. See the following: Aggregate Expressions. See Functions. Add, Remove To move an expression to the Fields to Browse list: Choose an expression from the Available Fields list.Choose the >> button. To remove an expression from the Fields to Browse list: Choose an expression from the Fields to Browse list. The district field cannot be removed. Choose the << button. The Up and Down buttons let you control the toptobottom order of the items in the Fields to Browse list. The Up and Down buttons only become available after you choose a column from Fields to Browse. The district field will always be the first field in the browser. MapInfo builds a Districts and displays the table in a Districts Browser. As long as the Districts Browser is on the screen, MapInfo performs districting calculations every time you select or unselect map objects. If the Fields to Browse list contains the expression Count, the Districts Browser displays a count of the number of map objects assigned to each district. If the Fields to Browse list contains the expression Fill, the Districts Browser displays a sample of each district's fill pattern. Also, use the Line and Symbol expressions to include sample line and symbol styles in the Districts Browser. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Up, Down
OK
Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
259
Aggregate Expressions
The Available Fields list contains aggregate column expressions. For example, if the source table has a numeric column called Population, the Available Fields list contains the items Sum(Population) and Percent(Population). If you move a Sum(column) expression to the Fields to Browse list, MapInfo calculates the sum of the column values for all objects that belong to a district. If you move a Percent(column) expression to the Fields to Browse list, MapInfo calculates the sum of the column values for the entire table, and then calculates each district's percentage of the total. The following Districts Browser includes both Sum( ) and Percent( ) expressions. Note that the total of all percentage values is 100.
Renaming a District
To change the name of a district, click on the district name as it appears in the Districts Browser. Similarly, to change the fill color of a district, click on the Brush sample that appears in the Districts Browser.
Adding a District
To create a new district, choose Redistrict > Add District. A new row appears at the bottom of the Districts Browser.
260
MapInfo Reference
Deleting a District
To delete the current target district, choose Redistrict > Delete Target District. When you delete a district, any objects which belong to the district are automatically assigned to the *****" district. To choose which district is the target district, check the box of the appropriate row of the Districts Browser. Alternately, you can set the target district by selecting one map object,making the District's Browser active and then choosing Redistrict > Set Target District or choose Main Toolbar > Set Target District button.
Ending a Redistrict Session

To end a redistricting session, close the Districts Browser window. You must use File > Save to permanently save changes made in a redistricting session.
Related Tasks
Once you have finalized the districts, you can combine each district's group of objects into a single object by choosing Table > Combine Objects Using Column. In the Combine Objects Using Column dialog, choose the districting column from the Group Object By Column dropdown list. There are some restrictions to the types of objects that Combine Objects Using Column can combine. If the districts contain only closed objects such as regions, you can combine the objects.
See:
Functions The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 14
MapInfo Reference
261
New Row Command Edit Menu
New Row Command Edit Menu

Use New Row to:
D
add a blank record at the bottom of the active Browser window.
New Row is available when:

D
the active window is a Browser and the table in the active Browser is editable.
You cannot edit readonly tables, such as ASCII tables, Excel and Lotus spreadsheets, or StreetInfo tables.
Menu Path
"
Edit > New Row or
Adding a New Row

To add a blank row at the bottom of the active Browser window: 1. Choose Edit > New Row. A blank row displays at the bottom of the browser. or Press Ctrl/E. 2. Enter data in the new row.
See:
New Browser Window Command
262
MapInfo Reference
New Table Command File Menu

Use New Table to:
D
create a new table. MapInfo tables have a data (browseable) component and an optional graphable (mappable) component. The New Table command allows you to set up these components.
New Table is available when:

D
New Table is always available.
Menu Path
D
File > New Table or Standard Toolbar > New Table button
Creating a New Table

When you create a new table you will:
D D D D D
specify how the new table displays specify the table's data attributes specify whether the table is mappable specify a projection for a mappable table specify a name and location of the new table
To create a new table:

"
Choose File > New Table. The New Table dialog displays.
Use this dialog to select the new table display: display the table in a Browser window (table format), Map window, or add the table to the current Map window. New Table Dialog Open New Browser Open New Map Open an empty Browser window when you have completed specifying the table structure. Open a new Map window when you have completed specifying the table structure. Specify the projection of the table in the Create Table dialog. Add the table as a layer in the currently active map. The table has the same projection as the map to which it is added. Choose to continue creating a table and display the New Table Structure dialog.
Add to Current Map Create
MapInfo Reference
263

Cancel Help Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
New Table Structure Dialog
Fields Type
Contains the names of the fields (columns) in the table from top to bottom. Indicates the type of field with the number of characters in the field listed in parentheses (where applicable ). See the following: Type option. An X in this column indicates the field is indexed. When the column is blank, the field is not indexed. Index as many fields as necessary: click index box. Move the selected field up or down one position in the list box. The file structure is reorganized accordingly. When a table displays in a Browser window, the first field becomes the leftmost column, the second field becomes the second column from the left, and the last field becomes the rightmost column. Moving a field up or down has the effect of moving it left or right in a Browser window. Add a new field at the bottom of the list. This field has a default name of Field1, Field2, Field3, etc., depending on the order in which the field was created. Remove the selected field from the table.
Indexed
Up/Down
Add Field
Remove Field
264
MapInfo Reference

Table is mappable Check to modify the table so you can map it and create graphical objects. If you have a table that is geocoded and want to ungeocode it, clear this option. When you click the OK button, the table is ungeocoded. If you do not check this option, you can make the table mappable at a later time by using Table> Maintenance > Table Structure. Displays the map's projection. You can change the projection in this option. Change it by using the Save As command. See Projection Button and Save As Command. Displays field information. Displays the field name in the Name box. You can also enter new field names here. Defaults are Field1, Field2, etc. A field name can contain up to 31 alphanumeric characters. Use letters, numbers, and the underscore. Do not use spaces; instead, use the underscore character (_) to separate words in a field name. Use upper and lower case for legibility, but MapInfo is not casesensitive. A dropdown list is used to indicate the field type. The following types are available: Character: Stores up to 254 alphanumeric characters. You cannot perform arithmetic operations on numerals in a character field. You should store ZIP Code information in character fields, otherwise leading zeros are dropped. Decimal: Stores numbers in fixedpoint decimal form. The decimal point counts as one character width. Do not put commas in decimal. Integer: Stores integers (numbers without a decimal). The range is from 2 billion to +2 billion. Small Integer: Integers between 32,768 and +32,768. Float: Stores numbers in floatingpoint decimal form. Date: Contains a date in the format specified by the Window's Control Panel Regional Settings, Short Date Format. Exceptions: the month and day will always display a leading zero and the year will always display the century. During data entry, it is not necessary to enter the century. Additionally, if the date format is month, day, year, it is not necessary to enter the year. Logical: These fields contain only true/false or yes/no information, stored as T for true/yes and F for false/no. Decimal, integer, small integer, and float can only contain numeric symbols. These fields do not accept any characters besides numbers, the minus sign, or decimal points for decimal and floatingpoint numbers. ,
Projection
Field Information Name
Type
MapInfo Reference
265

Indexed Check to create an index on the selected field. Indexing does not change the order of records. Use indexes to: Use Query > Find which only works on an indexed field. Speed queries containing numerical and alphabetic comparisons and speed joins. Type the number of characters in the field (character and decimal fields only). Maximum field width is 254 for character fields and 19 for decimal fields. Enter decimals in fixed point decimal form. Create table with the structure you have specified in the dialog. When you are creating an earth map, or if the table is not mappable, MapInfo displays the Create New Table dialog. When you are creating a nonearth map, MapInfo displays the NonEarth Coordinate System dialog. Then the Create New Table dialog displays. At the Create New Table dialog, name the new table and designate where (which directory or folder) you want MapInfo to create the table. Cancel the dialog options. MapInfo closes the dialog without creating a new table. Display appropriate Help topic.
Width
Decimals OK
Cancel Help
Create New Table Dialog
Save in: File Name
Designate the file path. Enter the filename you want to create.
266
MapInfo Reference

MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab Save as type: Save Cancel Help Select its file format. To create a table compatible with earlier versions of MapInfo, choose MapInfo 2x format. Save the new table to the designated drive and directory. Cancel the dialog options. MapInfo closes the dialog without creating a new table. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
Table Structure Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 18
MapInfo Reference
267
ODBC Toolbar
ODBC Toolbar
Use ODBC Toolbar to:
D
access the buttons for that are used to access tables residing on a remote database.
ODBC Toolbar is available when:

D
ODBC support has been installed and the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the ODBC Toolbar.
Menu Path
D
Options > Toolbars
Using the ODBC Toolbar

For an onscreen button description, click and hold the mouse button to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars. To choose from the ODBC Toolbar:
"
Click on the appropriate button. The button is highlighted. Open ODBC Table button Make ODBC Table Mappable button Refresh ODBC Table button Unlink ODBC Table button Change Symbol for a Mappable ODBC Table button Accesses the Open ODBC Table dialog which allows you to download a table on a remote database into a MapInfo linked table. Accesses the Make ODBC Table Mappable dialog which allows you make a table linked to a remote database mappable in MapInfo. Accesses the Refresh ODBC Table dialog which allows you to re fresh a MapInfo linked table with the most recent data residing on the remote database for that linked table. Accesses the Unlink ODBC Table dialog which allows you to un link a table which was downloaded from a remote database from its remote database. Accesses the Change Symbol for a Mappable ODBC Table dialog which allows you to change the symbol style of a mappable ODBC table.
See:
Toolbars Command
268
MapInfo Reference
Open ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar
Open ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar Open ODBC Table Command File Menu
Use Open ODBC Table to:
D
download an ODBC table from a remote database into a MapInfo table known as a linked table. As of version 5.0, you can also access data live from remote databases.
Open ODBC Table is available when:

D
ODBC has been installed as part of a custom installation, and you have configured data sources. For information on custom installation, refer to Chapter 2, Installation, in the MapInfo User's Guide. For information on initial configuration of data sources, refer to Chapter 19, Accessing Remote Database Data, in the MapInfo User's Guide.
Menu Path
"
File > Open ODBC Table
Opening an ODBC Table

To open an ODBC table:
"
Choose File > Open ODBC Table.
The Open ODBC Table menu option, begins the set of dialogs needed to support downloading an ODBC Table or Query result set for read or update as a MapInfo linked table. This process is structured as a Wizard". An ODBC table is a table that resides in a remote SQL database such as Oracle, Sybase, Access, etc.
About Linked Tables

A linked table is a special kind of MapInfo table that is downloaded from a remote database and retains links to its remote database table. The table on the remote database is referred to as an ODBC table. You can perform most operations on a linked table that you do for a regular MapInfo table. For instance, you can view, edit, copy, save, and rename a linked table just as you could a regular MapInfo table. However, there are some things you can't do to a linked table. For instance, you can't pack a linked table. You also can't modify the table structure of a linked table (but you can modify its MapInfo index structure).
About Live Remote ODBC Access

As of version 5.0, you can access data live from remote databases. Follow the same procedure for connecting to a data source, then opening an ODBC table for downloading into a MapInfo linked table using the ODBC wizard, as described below. You specify live access when you get to the Open ODBC Table - Step 4 of 4 dialog.
MapInfo Reference
269

Downloading a linked table involves the following steps:
D D D D D
Connect to a data source. Select which table to download from the connected data source. Select which columns to download from the table. Select which rows to download from the table. Save the table locally to MapInfo as a linked table.
For more information on linked tables, refer to the chapter Accessing Remote database Data" in the MapInfo User's Guide.
Connecting to a Data Source

Before you can download a linked table from a remote data source, the user must connect to the specific data source where the data to be downloaded resides. A data source is the location of a specific database. For example, CUSTOMERS could be the name of the data source that provides access to one or more ORACLE tables located in a specific directory on a specific network drive. Once connected to the CUSTOMERS data source, you could download information from any of the ORACLE tables into a MapInfo linked table. You could have several data sources, each providing access to different databases in different locations. If you have not already connected to a data source, when you first select File > Open ODBC Table, Select Data Source is the first dialog to appear. This dialog lets you connect to a data source. Once one or more connections have been established, selecting File > Open ODBC Table invokes the Open ODBC Table Wizard. For more information on initial configuration of data sources, refer to the chapter Accessing Remote Database Data" in the MapInfo User's Guide. Select Data Source Dialog
270
MapInfo Reference
File Data Source
Displays all file DSNs (data source names) and subdirectories contained within the directory displayed in the Look In box. Double-clicking a DSN connects to the data source. Displays the current directory for which the subdirectories and file DSNs are displayed in the window below. Clicking the down arrow to the right of the text box displays the entire directory structure.. Displays the file DSN name selected in the File Data Sources list, or you can enter a new file DSN name. Adds a new file data source. If you click this button, the Create New Data Source dialog box appears with a list of drivers. Choose the driver for which you are adding a file DSN. After you click Next, you may specify the keywords for the file DSN. See the sectionCreating New Data Sources," above, for instructions on creating a new data source. Closes the Administrator dialog box, and connects to the file data source that is highlighted in the list or entered in the DSN Name text box. You do not have to click OK to accept changes to the File Data Sources list. Changes to the list are accepted once the OK button in the Data Source Setup dialog box has been clicked. Closes the Administrator dialog box without connecting to the file data source. Changes to the File Data Sources list are not rejected if the Cancel button is clicked. Displays Help.
Look In
DSN Name New
OK
Cancel
Help
MapInfo Reference
271
Adding New Data Sources

This dialog is activated when you press the New button from the Select Data Source dialog. It is used to add new data sources. You can add multiple data sources, each one associating a driver with some data you want to access using that driver. You need to give each data source a name that uniquely identifies that data source. For example, if you create a data source for an ORACLE database that contains customer tables, you might name the data source CUSTOMERS." Once you have set up your data sources, MapInfo will display data source names to choose in the Select Data Source dialog, described above. For more information on configuration of data sources, refer to the chapter Accessing Remote Database Data" in the MapInfo User's Guide. Create New Data Source Dialog
272
MapInfo Reference

Name Finish The Name list displays the names of installed drivers. From the list, select the driver for the data source to use. Accept the dialog option. A driverspecific Setup dialog box for the data source appears. (The source of this dialog is the ODBC Administrator.) Since each driver is different, each data source requires a different configuration. Because of this, each data source has a unique Setup dialog box. In general, configuration usually includes the data source name, description, and server name. Optional configurations might include server list, default logon ID and application name. (Refer to the INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Drivers Online Help topic, Configuring Data Sources, for the data source you want to configure. There is a help file for each driver distributed as part of MapInfo 5.0 and is located in the Windows system directory. The help files are names as follows, MIdrv13.HLP, where drv is the name of a driver. For example, MIINF13.HLP is the help for Informix. Type the required information about the data source. Click OK when you have finished configuring your data source. The driver writes these values to the ODBC.INI file. These values are now the defaults whenever you connect to the data source. Cancel Cancel the dialog options.
Opening an ODBC Table Step 1, Choosing a Table

After a connection is established, the Open ODBC Table wizard will be invoked. The Open ODBC Table wizard builds an SQL query in the ODBC dialect to be executed on the remote database. The wizard provides the an easy way to execute an SQL query without having to know any SQL. For those users familiar with SQL using ODBC standards, an Expert dialog is available to build your own SQL query. The wizard displays a series of four dialogs which will assist you in opening an ODBC table for downloading into a MapInfo linked table. Each dialog will have an identical set of buttons along its bottom edge. The first dialog asks you to select a table from the connected data source: Open ODBC Table Dialog - Step 1 of 4
MapInfo Reference
273
Connection
If there are multiple connections open, choose a connection from the pulldown list. A list of tables for that connection will display in the Tables field. Displays the directory path of the database connection or the database name. This field is present only for data sources that provide this information. In the example above it is not present. Press the New button to make a new connection from the Select Data Source dialog. This field is present only for data sources that make use of owners (such as Oracle). This field allows you to list tables owned by different users. Highlight the name of the table you want to download. The Filter button lets the user select which types of tables to list. The default shows Tables, View, and Synonyms, and hides System tables. Press the Help button for online help. Press the Cancel button to abort the wizard.
Database
New Owner
Table Filter
Help Cancel
274
MapInfo Reference

Back Next Expert Disabled for this dialog. Press the next button to move to the next dialog after completing this dialog. Press the Expert button to leave the wizard if you want to download a table by entering your own SQL query. The Expert dialog is explained elsewhere in this section. Press the Finish button to accept the defaults for the remaining dialogs in the wizard, and to move to the final step of the wizard. The Finish button will accept all columns and all rows and invoke the final step of the wizard.
Finish
Opening an ODBC Table Step 2, Choosing Columns from a Table

The Open ODBC Table - Step 2 of 4 dialog is the second dialog of the Open ODBC Table wizard. When you selected a table in the first dialog, in effect, you selected all the rows and columns in that table. In this dialog you will be selecting the columns which contain the data to be downloaded. By default, all columns will be downloaded. If you attempt to create an editable linked table (if the Read Only box remains unchecked in Step 4 of this wizard), and you don't download the primary key, MapInfo will download it anyway and mark it as readonly. (The primary key is the column used for sorting data in the table.) Open ODBC Table Dialog - Step 2 of 4
MapInfo Reference
275

Available Displays the available columns from the selected table. Also displays an additional column called OBJECT" when this table is mappable. You can select it to download point objects from the table. Displays the columns you selected from the table. Initially an asterisk (*) appears here. If you leave the asterisk, all columns will be selected from the table. The > button moves the currently highlighted column(s) from the available to selected list. The >> button moves all columns from the available list to the selected list. The < button moves the currently highlighted columns back from the selected list to the available list. The << button moves all columns back from the selected list to the available list. Changes the order of the selected columns in the selected list. Highlight a column name and press the Up button to move the column up in the list order. Changes the order of the selected columns in the selected list. Highlight a column name and press the Down button to move the column down in the list order. Press the Help button for online help. Press the Cancel button to abort the wizard. Press the Back button to return to the previous dialog in the wizard. Press the next button to move to the next dialog after completing this dialog. Press the Expert button to leave the wizard if you want to download a table by entering your own SQL query. If the Expert button is selected at this time, the selected columns will will appear in the SQL query window. The Expert dialog is explained elsewhere in this section. Press the Finish button to accept the defaults for the remaining dialogs in the wizard. The Finish button will accept the selected columns and all rows and invoke the final step of the wizard.
Selected
> >> < << Up
Down
Help Cancel Back Next Expert
Finish
Opening an ODBC Table Step 3, Choosing Rows from Columns in a Table

The Open ODBC Table - Step 3 of 4 dialog is the third dialog of the Open ODBC Table wizard. The third dialog asks you to restrict the downloading of data from rows that match the criteria you specify.
276
MapInfo Reference

(This is the same as specifying the WHERE clause in a SQL query.) If you select no filtering criteria in this dialog, all rows will be selected. Open ODBC Table Dialog - Step 3 of 4
Selected Column
Choose the column(s) for which you want to filter rows. If you are filtering rows for one column, select a column, operator, and value. If filtering rows on more than one column, select a column from the next drop down list. This will also activate the next row of fields for data entry.
Operator
The Operator list boxes contain all supported operator symbols for their corresponding selected column. The list of operators will vary depending on the type of the selected column. For example, the operators <, >, and = (among others) will be available for numeric columns, but object columns will have only the operator WITHIN.
MapInfo Reference
277

Value The type of the Value control also varies depending on the column type. For object columns, this control will be a list box containing the values CURRENT_MAPPER and SELECTION. For all other column types, this control will be an edit box, allowing the user to enter the proper type of data. String values are enclosed in single quotes; e.g., 'New York'. Numerical values are entered without any quotes. For example, for a numeric column, the user might select the operator >, and enter a value of 0. This would select only rows in which that column contained a value greater than 0. There are two wildcard characters that can be used with the LIKE operator: '%' and '_'. The '%' wildcard character matches zero or more characters. The '_' wildcard character matches only one character. Conjunction When rows are being filtered from more than one column, Conjunction becomes available. Choose one of these boolean operators: AND, OR, AND NOT, OR NOT. Press the Help button for online help. Press the Cancel button to abort the wizard. Press the Back button to return to the previous dialog in the wizard. Press the next button to move to the next dialog after completing this dialog. Press the Expert button to leave the wizard if you want to download a table by entering your own SQL query. If the Expert button is selected at this time, the selected filtered columns will be added to the default query presented (i.e., the generated WHERE clause will be added). The Expert dialog is explained elsewhere in this section. Press the Finish button to accept the defaults for the remaining dialogs in the wizard, and to move to the final step of the wizard. The Finish button is equivalent to the Next button at this step.
Help Cancel Back Next Expert
Finish
Opening an ODBC Table Step 4, Saving Table Locally and Live Access
Once the data to be downloaded has been determined, the user must determine the path name for the local table created in the fourth dialog. Here you can also specify live access. Open ODBC Table Dialog - Step 4 of 4
278
MapInfo Reference
Save In File Name Save As Type Open As Read Only
Specify the directory where the table is to be saved. Directories and files appear in the window below. Specify the filename for the table. The name must not be the name of a table that is already open in MapInfo. The table file type (*.tab) is displayed. The Open As Read Only check box will be checked and disabled if the table selected can not be modified. For tables that could potentially be modified, Read Only will be enabled and unchecked. You can then check it to open the table as readonly, or leave it unchecked to make the table editable. If you leave it unchecked, MapInfo will download all rows it can as editable. However there still may be rows downloaded that are readonly. See, When is a Linked Table ReadOnly, below.
Preferred View
Choose the view in which you want the table data displayed: Automatic: MapInfo selects the appropriate display for the table: mapper, add to mapper, or browser. Browser: Open table in a Browse window. Current Mapper: Add table to current map window. New Mapper: Display table in a map window. No View: Open table; do not display data. Check to download the data and make into a linked table. Uncheck for live access. (See About Live Remote ODBC Access," above.)
Download data (Linked Table)
MapInfo Reference
279

Cache For live access, the Cache checkbox is displayed. Check the Cache checkbox to keep attributes and objects that have been read in memory so if you zoom in they do not need to be fetched from the database. (Since MapInfo looks in memory for a record you will not see the latest updates.) If cache is on, another user's updates may not appear until the cache is invalidated by a pan or zooming out. Uncheck the Cache checkbox and all data will be fetched from the database. It will give the most up to date data but will be less efficient. (See About Live Remote ODBC Access," above.) Press the Help button for online help. Press the Cancel button to abort the wizard. Press the Back button to return to the previous dialog in the wizard. The Back button has slightly different behavior in this dialog than in the others. If the preceding dialog was the third wizard dialog, then Back returns there. If the preceding dialog was the Expert dialog (Enter SQL Query), then Back returns there. Press the next button to move to the next dialog after completing this dialog. Press the Expert button to leave the wizard if you want to download a table by entering your own SQL query. The Expert dialog is explained elsewhere in this section. Press the Finish button to download the table.
Help Cancel Back
Next Expert
Finish
280
MapInfo Reference
When is a Linked Table Read-Only

Leaving the above option, Open As Read Only, unchecked does not indicate that the table is editable. The linked table can be readonly under any of the following circumstances:
D D D D
the data downloaded from the server database is not editable. the data downloaded from the server database does not contain a primary key. there are no editable columns in the data downloaded from the server database. the Open As Read Only option is checked.
Entering SQL Queries with the Expert Button

At several points in the wizard, the Expert button can be used to invoke the following dialog:
This dialog allows the user to enter queries much more complex than the wizard allows using the standard ODBC SQL syntax. Invoking this dialog ends normal wizard processing (there is no way to back up from this dialog). Selecting OK will move to the final dialog of the wizard. To type in multiline formatted SQL do the following:
D D D
To get a new line press ENTER. To tab press <CTRL> TAB. To cut and paste from the clipboard, use <CTRL> X to cut, <CTRL> C to copy, and <CTRL> V to paste. Press to move to the final dialog of the wizard. Press to cancel the query. You will be returned to the step in the wizard where you originally invoked the Expert dialog. Press to load an SQL statement that has been saved in a file. The Load button activates the Load SQL Query dialog. This dialog provides you with access to existing files containing SQL statements (*.sql files). When you load an SQL file, its format will be preserved.
OK Cancel Load
MapInfo Reference
281

Save Press to save the sql statement in a file for later use. The Save button activates the Save SQL Query dialog. Use this dialog to save newly constructed SQL statements, or modifications to existing statements. When you save an SQL file, its format will be preserved. Once saved, the SQL statement appears in the list of available *.sql files in the Load SQL Query dialog. Last Query Press to load the last query that was executed in this session of MapInfo. Press for online help.
Help
See:
Save Table Command Refresh ODBC Table Command Unlink ODBC Table Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 19
282
MapInfo Reference
Open Table Command File Menu

Use Open Table to:
D
open a MapInfo table, Microsoft Access table, dBase DBF file, Delimited ASCII file, Lotus 123 spreadsheet, or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or raster image.
Open Table is available when:

D
Open Table is always available.
Menu Path
"
File > Open Table or
Standard Toolbar > Open Table button
Opening a MapInfo Table

To open a MapInfo table:
"
Choose File > Open Table. The Open Table dialog displays.
Open Table Dialog
Look in: File name:
Specify the file path. Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List Files of Type box. To see a list of files with a particular extension type an asterisk (*), a period and the three character extension. For example if you want to see all files with a .dbf extension in a directory, type *.dbf.
MapInfo Reference
283

MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab Files of type: The tables displayed are tables in MapInfo format or nonMapInfo files that have previously been opened in MapInfo. Select the file format of the file you want to open. MapInfo, dBase DBF, Delimited ASCII, Lotus 123, Microsoft Excel or Raster Images. For dBase, Delimited ASCII, Lotus 123, Microsoft Excel and Raster Image files, MapInfo displays other dialogs, prompting for further information. These dialog explanations are covered according to the type of file (for example, Opening DBF format files). Network Preferred View Display Network Drive Connections Dialog. See your system documentation for information on this dialog. Choose the view in which you want the table data displayed: Automatic: MapInfo selects the appropriate display for the table: mapper, add to mapper, or browser. Browser: Open table in a Browse window. Current Mapper: Add table to current map window. New Mapper: Display table in a map window. No View: Open table; do not display data. Opens the table or displays an in import information dialog. The table can be displayed in other windows by choosing New Browser Window, or New Graph Window. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Open
Cancel Help
284
MapInfo Reference
Opening Multiple Tables

To open multiple tables: 1. 2. Choose File > Open Table. The Open Table dialog displays. To open a contiguous block of tables, select the first table you want, hold down the shift key and select the last table you want. To open multiple tables that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the tables. 3. To deselect tables, hold down the control key and click on the tables.
Note: You cannot open more than one file type with this method.
Opening a Microsoft Access Table

The following limitations apply to the direct Access feature:
D D D
No support for decimal data type. If you modify the table structure of a MS Access table within MapInfo and change a FLOAT type to a DECIMAL, the type changes to FLOAT. If a database is not selected when using File>Save Copy As, a database with the same name as the tab file is created in the same directory. The MapBasic Pack Table statement will save a copy of the original MS Access table without columns that MapInfo does not support. If a MS Access table has a MEMO, OLE, or LONG BINARY type column, it will be lost during a pack. Compact your database. Each time a table is renamed disk space is used up. The space used up is the space the original table was taking up. MapInfo renames the table when the structure is altered and when the rename statement is issued. An Access database may be compacted using the ODBC Administrator or Microsoft Access. To compact a MS Access database using the ODBC Administrator, see the ODBC Administrator's on-line help for compact database. To compact a MS Access database using Microsoft Access, see Access's on-line help for Compact a database to defragment and free disk space.
Access Table Specifications

D D D D D
A table in Access must have an auto-counter column with a unique index or primary key set on that column. Otherwise, MapInfo will alter the table to fit this requirement. The Access table being brought into MapInfo must be a flat Access table, i.e., the table must not contain fields that point to data in other Access tables. Memo, OLE, and Replication ID field types from an Access table will not be brought into MapInfo. Text field length cannot exceed 254 characters. If the length exceeds 254 characters, the field is brought in as read-only. Zero length strings are not allowed.
MapInfo Reference
285
Open Table Command File Menu To open an Access table:

1. 2. 3. Choose File > Open Table. The Open Table dialog displays. Choose Microsoft Access Database from the Files of type menu. The Access databases (.mdb) for the specified location display. Choose an Access database to open. If database security is turned on, you will be prompted to give the password for the database.
The Open Access Table dialog displays the tables for the opened database.
4.
Choose an Access table or tables to open. The table or tables are opened in MapInfo.
After you open an Access table in MapInfo for the first time, MapInfo creates a definition for the table and gives it a .TAB extension. This enables you to it treat it like any other MapInfo table. For example, to open this file you would now open it like any other MapInfo table. Please note that even though the table now has the .TAB extension in MapInfo, your data is still in your original Access database table and is not a duplicate.
Opening a dBASE DBF File

To open a dBASE DBF file: 1. 2. 3. Choose File > Open Table. The Open Table dialog displays. Choose dBASE DBF from the File Format menu. The DBF files for the specified location display. Choose a DBF file.
286
MapInfo Reference

dBASE DBF Information Dialog The dBASE DBF Information dialog box allows you to specify the file origin (Macintosh, Windows (ANSI), DOS or OS/2 (PC8) of the file so that MapInfo can make the proper translation. File Origin Several different character sets are commonly used in computing. MapInfo needs to know which set the files uses. Since these different character sets are used for different platforms, MapInfo prompts you to indicate the platform on which a given DBF file was created. The table opens.
OK
Opening a Delimited ASCII File

To open a delimited ASCII file: 1. 2. 3. Choose File > Open Table. The Open Table dialog displays. Choose Delimited ASCII from the File Format dropdown list. The ASCII files for the specified location are displayed. Choose a delimited ASCII file. The Delimited ASCII Information dialog displays.
Delimited ASCII Information Dialog The Delimited ASCII Information dialog allows you to specify a delimiter and file origin for your table. This information is necessary for mapInfo to make the proper translation. Delimiter Tab Other File Character Set Use first line for column titles OK Choose Tab when you want tabs for the field delimiters. This option allows you to specify the delimiter you want to use. Type the character in the box. Comma is the default choice. Specify the appropriate character set the file is using Choose this option when you want to treat the first line of the file as column titles. Opens the file. You can only read information from these files, when you want to do other tasks, see the following: Editing Excel and Lotus Spreadsheets and and ASCII files.
MapInfo Reference
287
Opening a Lotus or Excel Spreadsheet

To open a Lotus or Excel spreadsheet: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose File > Open Table. The Open Table dialog displays. Choose Lotus 123 or Microsoft Excel from the File Format dropdown list. The spreadsheets for the specified location display. Choose a Lotus or Excel spreadsheet. Click Open. The Excel or Lotus Information dialog displays.
Excel/Lotus Information Dialog Named Range Use this menu to specify Entire Worksheet or Other. When you choose Other, the Other Range dialog displays which allows you to specify a cell range. See the following: Other Range. The current cell range value of the worksheet. Choose this option when you want the row above the selected range used for column titles. Open the file. You can only read information from these files; when you want to do other tasks, see the following: Editing Excel and Lotus Spreadsheets and and ASCII files.
Current Value Use row above selected range for column titles OK
Other Range Dialog The Other Range dialog allows you to enter a range other than the entire worksheet. Type a cell range in the Type the appropriate cell range in the form indicated. form A1:F9 or R1C1:R9C6 Cancel OK Cancel your current work with the dialog box. MapInfo closes the dialog box without creating a new table. Enter the new range and return to the Excel/Lotus Information dialog.
Working With Spreadsheets

When working with spreadsheet, note the spreadsheet structure. Spreadsheets are not organized into records and fields the way databases are. However, since MapInfo is organized as a database, it reads spreadsheet files as through they were database files. When MapInfo reads a spreadsheet file it treats spreadsheet rows as records and spreadsheet columns as fields. Everything in a spreadsheet row is treated as through it were data about a single object. And all the items in a spreadsheet column are treated as though they were the same type of data about different objects. In databases, the type of data to be found in a particular field is explicitly declared in the database structure. Since spreadsheets allow any type of data in any cell, there are no such explicit declarations.
288
MapInfo Reference

Therefore, when MapInfo reads a spreadsheet, it determines the type of data by examining the data itself. Since it treats columns as database fields, it assumes that every cell in the column contains the same type of data. Further, MapInfo reads the column width as set in the spreadsheet and only reads the number of characters that fit the width. When a column width has been set to 9 and it contains the label Sales Forecast", MapInfo truncates that label to Sales For".
Opening a Registered Raster Image

See the Register Raster Image entry for more information.
Opening an Unregistered Raster Image

After selecting an unregistered raster image file in the Open Table dialog, the prompt Display unregistered image" displays. Choose Display to open the image directly in a map window by using nonearth coordinates. The raster image is stored in a table file as a nonearth map. Choose Register to register the image using accurate map (latitude/longitude) coordinates. See the Register Raster Image entry for more information.
Editing Excel and Lotus Spreadsheets and ASCII Files

While you can directly access Excel and Lotus spreadsheets, and ASCII files, you can only read the information. When you want to do any of the following tasks, you must first use Save Copy As to save the file in MapInfo's format. The copy is a MapInfoformat table, and you can treat it as any other MapInfo table.
D D D D
Edit information from one of these files. Add new columns to one of these files through Table Structure. Use Update Column to calculate new data values and place them into the file. Use Table Structure to add graphic objects to the file.
Opening vs. Importing

You must open a table before you can use it. Open Table activates a dialog for opening tables, (opening a table is described below). Choose the appropriate table by doubleclicking on it in the dialog box. Most programs require you to import files created in some other programs. MapInfo allows you to work directly with files created in other programs. When you have a file in dBase DBF, Delimited ASCII, Lotus 123, Microsoft Excel, or a Raster Image format you do not have to import it. By not importing data you save time; opening a file is quicker than importing it. You also save disk space. When you import a file, you make a copy of it. Since MapInfo works directly with files from other programs, it does not have to make a copy.
MapInfo Reference
289

When MapInfo opens a file from some other program, it creates a file with a .tab extension. This file describes the format of the file that actually contains the data. When you have opened a nonMapInfo file, such as a Lotus file, in a previous session and attempt to open it again, the following prompt appears: Table definition already exists. Overwrite it? The table definition referred to is the .tab file. Continue; MapInfo overwrites the .tab file and opens the file.
See:
Import Command New Table Command Save Copy As Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 16
290
MapInfo Reference
Open Workspace Command File Menu

Use Open Workspace to:
D
open a workspace that has been previously saved. A workspace stores a list of open tables, windows, and window positions.
Open Workspace is available when:

D
Open Workspace is always available.
Menu Path
"
File > Open Workspace
Opening a Workspace
Any previously opened tables and windows are left untouched when you open a workspace. However, to avoid cluttering up the screen with unnecessary windows, use the Close All command from the File menu before adding the workspace. When you exit MapInfo, the MapInfo workspace (MapInfow.wor) stores the last session, unless you have set your preferences so that the workspace will not be written. If there are files you don't want added to the workspace, close them before exiting. To open a workspace:
"
Choose File > Open Workspace. The Open Workspace dialog displays.
Open Workspace Dialog
MapInfo Reference
291

Look in: File name: Specify the file path. Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List Files of Type box. To see a list of files with a particular extension type an asterisk (*), a period and the three character extension. For example if you want to see all files with a .wor extension in a directory, type *.wor. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.wor Files of type: Select the type of file you want to open. Lists all the files in the current directory that were saved with a .wor extension. All files (*.*) lists all the files in the current directory. OK Cancel Help Network Opens the workspace. Cancel dialog options. Display Help topic. Display Network-Drive Connections dialog box.
Opening Multiple Workspaces

To open multiple workspaces: 1. 2. Choose File > Open Workspace. The Open Workspace dialog displays. To open a contiguous block of workspaces, select the first workspace you want, hold down the shift key and select the last workspace you want. To open multiple workspaces that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the workspaces. 3. To deselect workspaces, hold down the control key and click on the workspaces.
See:
Quick Start, Save Workspace Command, The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 5
292
MapInfo Reference
Options Command Browse Menu
Options Command Browse Menu

Use Options to:
D
display or hide the grid pattern in the Browser window.
Options is available when:

D
a Browser window is the active window.
Menu Path
"
Browse > Options
Showing or Hiding a Browsers Grid

To show or hide a Browser's grid: 1. 2. Choose Browse > Options. The Browse Options dialog displays. Check Show Grid Lines box to display grid lines. or Clear the box to hide grid lines. 3. Choose OK.
See:
New Browser Window Command
MapInfo Reference
293
Options Command Layout Menu

Use Options to:
D
specify how window frames and their contents are displayed in a Layout window and how the Layout window displays. Specify the margins and number of pages for the current Layout window.

D
Menu Path
"
Layout > Options
Specifying Layout Options

To access the Layout Display Options dialog:
"
Choose Layout > Options. The Layout Display Options dialog displays.
Layout Display Options Dialog
Show Rulers Show Page Breaks
Display rulers along the left side and top of the layout. Display dotted lines in multipage layouts to indicate page breaks.
294
MapInfo Reference

Show Frame Contents Always Display the contents of a frame only when the Layout window is active. For example, if you are changing the contents of a Map window that is also in the layout, select the Always option to see the effect on the layout as you make changes. Display the contents of a frame only when it is the active window. Display only the file name and frame type, even when the Layout is the active window. For example, choose Never when you are resizing and repositioning frames. The contents of each frame will not redraw each time you modify the layout.
Only when Layout window is active Never
Layout Size Layout Size The settings you choose for margins, paper size, and page orientation affect all pages of a document. These settings determine how large an area you have to print the body text of the document. When you have a multipage Layout, various elements in the Layout may be distributed across two or more pages. Use the following Width and Height boxes to specify the number of pages in the layout. The display of the Total layout size changes as you adjust the width and height page settings. Type the appropriate number of pages. Type the appropriate number of pages. Static display of the page size. The page size is the current printer setting. Static display of the total width and height of the layout. Display the Page Margins dialog. The margins are displayed as a gray border in the layout. The gray border merely serves to remind you where the margins are. Margins are cosmetic; if an object is in the gray area, it will print (provided it isn't too close to the edge of the page for your printer to handle). Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options.
Width_page Height_page Page Size Total Size Margins
OK Cancel
MapInfo Reference
295

Page Margins Dialog Left, Right, Top, Bottom Type the appropriate margin settings for the layout. In the case of a multipage Layout, the margins are displayed only on the outside edges of pages. However, in displaying the Layout, the margins that go on the inside edges of pages are allowed for, even though they are not displayed. Static display of the page width specified in the current printer settings. Static display of the page height specified in the current printer settings. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display Help topic.
Page Width Page Height OK Cancel Help
Additional Layout Options Information

Nonprinting Area of the Page When you are using a printer that cannot print to the full page, if you have set the page margins to zero, the nonprinting area is grayed. For example, if the system is connected to a laser printer and you have set page margins to zero, you still see a small gray border at the edge of the Layout. That is the nonprinting area of the page. Objects placed in the border zone will not print. Paper Size The paper size from the current printer settings are used. When you are set up to print to 8.5 inch by 11 inch paper in portrait orientation, it sets paper size to 8.5 inches wide and 11 inches high. When you are set up to print in landscape mode, it sets paper size to 11 inches wide and 8.5 inches high. Regardless of the page size and orientation when a Layout is created, the Layout displays the page size and orientation currently in effect. Therefore, if you originally created the Layout to print to a plotter on a sheet 34 inches by 44 inches, and you later open that Layout when you are connected to a laser printer set up to print on 8.5 inch by 11 inch paper, you see page break lines on the Layout.
See:
New Layout Window Command Print Setup Command
296
MapInfo Reference
Options Command Map Menu

Use Options to:
D
specify Coordinate, Distance, and Area Units for a map. You can also show/hide scroll bars and access the Choose Projection dialog.

D
Menu Path
"
Map > Options
Using the Map Options Dialog

To access the Map Options dialog:
"
Choose Map > Options. The Map Options dialog displays.
Map Options Dialog
Map Units Coordinate Units Specify the unit of measure from the dropdown list. Earth Maps: The menu always contains degrees. It may also contain the native units for the coordinate system if they are not degrees. NonEarth Maps: inches, feet, yards, miles, millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers, links, rods, chains.
MapInfo Reference
297

Distance Units Specify the distance units from the dropdown list. Earth Maps: inches, links, rods, chains, millimeters, centimeters, feet, US Survey feet*, yards, miles, nautical miles**, meters, kilometers. NonEarth Maps: inches, feet, yards, miles, millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers. *One US Survey Foot is equal to 12/39.37 meters or approximately 30.48006 centimeters.**A nautical mile equals 1852 meters. Specify the area unit from the dropdown list. Earth Maps: square links, square rods, perches, square chains, roods, square feet, square yards, acres, square miles, square meters, hectares, square, kilometers, square chains, roods, square millimeters, square centimeters. NonEarth Maps: square inches, square feet, square yards, acres, square miles, square millimeters, square centimeters, square meters, hectares, square kilometers, square links, square rods, perches, square chains, roods.
Area Units
Display in StatusBar Zoom (window width) Map scale Cursor location When resizing window Fit map to new window Preserve current scale Retain the same view but at the new size. Preserve the map scale; see more or less of the map when the Map window is resized, but at the same scale. Check to display scroll bars; clear to hide scroll bars. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Access the Choose Projection dialog. See Projection Button. Display appropriate Help topic. Display the horizontal width across the Map Window. Display the map scale. Display the X and Y coordinates of the cursor's location.
Scroll Bars OK Cancel Projection button Help
See:
The MIPro User's Guide, Appendix H New Map Command, Change View Command
298
MapInfo Reference
Options Command Redistrict Menu

Use Options to:
D
specify the districts sort order or gridline display for a session or as the default.

D
a Districts Browser is active.
Menu Path
"
Redistrict > Options
Specifying Districts Browser Options

To specify display options for the Districts Browser:
"
Choose Redistrict > Options. The Redistricter Options dialog displays.
Redistricter Options Dialog
Districts Sort Order Most Recently Used Alphabetical Unordered Show Grid Lines Most recently used district is placed first. Place the districts in alphabetical order. Do not place the districts in any specific order. Check to display gridlines in the Districts Browser. Clear to remove gridlines.
MapInfo Reference
299

Save as Default OK Cancel Help Check to save the display options as defaults options. Clear to use them for the current session. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
New Redistrict Window Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 14
300
MapInfo Reference
Overlay Nodes Command Objects Menu

Use Overlay Nodes to:
D
add nodes to the target objects at all points where the target objects intersect the currently selected objects.
Overlay Nodes is available when:

D
a map editing target has been chosen in the active edit window and one or more objects are selected in any layer of the active Map window.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Overlay Nodes
Using Overlay Nodes to Add Nodes to an Object

When you choose Overlay Nodes, MapInfo adds nodes to the current target objects. MapInfo calculates all points where the target objects intersect the currently selected objects; MapInfo then adds nodes to the target objects at the points of intersection unless the target objects already have nodes at those locations. If the target objects do not intersect the selected objects, MapInfo does not add any nodes. If you use Overlay Nodes to add nodes to a line, MapInfo converts the line to a polyline. If you use Overlay Nodes to add nodes to an ellipse, rectangle or rounded rectangle object, MapInfo converts the object to a region. Overlay Nodes does not affect text or point objects, and you may not use point or text objects to add nodes to other objects. To add nodes to an existing object: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select one or more objects in the editable map layer of the active map window. These are the objects to which you want to add nodes. Choose Objects > Set Target. The objects you selected in step 1 now appear in a different style to indicate that they are the editing target. Select one or more objects from any layer of the active map window. These are objects that intersect the target object(s). Choose Objects > Overlay Nodes. MapInfo adds nodes, if appropriate, to the target object(s).
MapInfo Reference
301
Uses for Overlay Nodes

When you add a street object to a map, the street that you add may cross existing streets. Usually, this indicates that the streets intersect (except in the case of an overpass, where there is no intersection). You may want to perform Overlay Nodes so that MapInfo adds a node to each street object at the point of intersection. Once the street objects share a common node, MapInfo's Find command is able to locate the intersection of the two streets. To find an intersection, enter two street names in the Find dialog, separated by a pair of ampersand characters (e.g. Broadway && River St").
See:
Add Node Button The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 1
302
MapInfo Reference
Pack Table Command Table > Maintenance

Use Pack Table to:
D
compress tables to use less disk space and eliminate records that have been marked as deleted. This command is not available for linked tables.
Pack Table is available when:

D
at least one table (that is not a query table) is open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Maintenance > Pack Table
Packing a Table
Before you pack a table, make sure there is enough disk space to accommodate a copy of the database. You cannot pack a readonly file. To pack a table:
"
Choose Table > Maintenance > Pack Table. The Pack Table dialog displays.
MapInfo Reference
303

Pack Table Dialog
Pack table Pack tabular data Pack graphic data
Choose the table to be packed. Remove deleted records to make the table smaller and increase processing speed. Pack only graphic information. If you have deleted map objects, packing the table will make the table smaller and increase processing speed. Pack both graphic and textual information. Pack the appropriate table and remove deleted records. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Pack both types of data OK Cancel Help
Packing a table may invalidate custom labels (labels entered using the Label tool) that have been previously saved to a workspace.
See:
304
MapInfo Reference
Page Setup
Page Setup
Use Page Setup to:
D
Designate paper size, orientation, margins, and printer hardware information and view a page preview document.
Page Setup is available when:

D
Page Setup is always available.
Menu Path
"
File > Page Setup
Using Page Setup

The Page Setup dialog displays a page preview document that reflects the specified paper size, orientation, and margins. To access Page Setup:
"
Choose File > Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog displays.
Page Setup Dialog Paper Orientation Margins Size: Select paper size from drop down list. Source: Select paper feed tray from drop down list. Portrait: Select to print in portrait mode. Landscape: Select to print in landscape mode. Designate page margins. Set the margins. Inches is the default setting for margins. To change the unit of measure, choose Options > Preferences > System Settings and choose a unit of measure from the Paper & Layout units dropdown list. Left Right Top Bottom OK Cancel Specify the distance between the left edge of the page and the left end of each line with no left indent. Specify the distance between the right edge of the page and the right end of each line with no right indent. Specify the distance between the top of the page and the top of the first line on the page. Specify the distance between the last line on the page and the bottom of the page. Accept dialog specifications. Cancel dialog specifications.
MapInfo Reference
305
Page Setup
Printer Help Display dialog with current printer information. You can select another printer from this dialog. Display help topic.
Page Setup in the WIndows 3.x Environment Use Page Setup to:
D
choose a printer and set paper size and orientation specifications.
Page Setup is available when:

D
Page Setup is always available.
Menu Path
"
File > Page Setup
To select a printer:
"
Choose File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialog displays.
Page Setup Dialog Printer Default Printer Specific Printer Orientation Portrait Landscape Select to print in portrait mode. Select to print in landscape mode. Displays installed default printer. To send output to a printer other than the default printer; access the drop down list and select an installed printer.
306
MapInfo Reference
Page Setup
Paper Size Source OK Cancel Options Margins Help Designate paper size. Designate paper tray. Apply specifications. Cancel specifications. Display System printer options; see system documentation. Display Page Margins dialog; see Page Margin dialog. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Page Margin Dialog

Margins (in) Set the margins. Inches is the default setting for margins. To change the unit of measure, choose Options > Preferences > System Settings and choose a unit of measure from the Paper & Layout units dropdown list. Specify the distance between the left edge of the page and the left end of each line with no left indent. Specify the distance between the right edge of the page and the right end of each line with no right indent. Used when printing singlesided pages. When you select Facing Pages, this option changes to Outside. Specify the distance between the top of the page and the top of the first line on the page. Specify the distance between the last line on the page and the bottom of the page. Apply specifications. Cancel specifications. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Left Right
Top Bottom OK Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
307
Paste Command Edit Menu
Paste Command Edit Menu

Use Paste to:
D
copy the clipboard contents into the table or window being edited.
Paste is available when:

D
a Browser window is active and there is text or an object in the clipboard or a Map window is active, a layer is editable and an object is in the clipboard or the MapBasic window is active and there is text in the clipboard or a Layout window is active and an object is in the clipboard.
The table must be editable. It cannot be a query table, SQL group by table, view or a table in a readonly directory.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Paste
Pasting Text and Objects from the Clipboard

To paste text and objects from the clipboard: 1. 2. If you are pasting text, position the cursor where you want the text to be pasted. Choose Edit > Paste.
When pasting into a Map window, the object is pasted in the currently editable layer. If you are pasting an object with geographic coordinates, the object is pasted to those coordinates. For example, when you paste a copy of New York State onto a new map, New York is pasted to the geographic position on the earth's surface (coordinates) where New York is located. When text or an object is currently selected, it is replaced by the object being pasted into the table.
See:
Copy Command Cut Command
308
MapInfo Reference
Pick Fields Command Browse Menu

Use Pick Fields to:
D
choose which fields display in the active Browser window. Temporarily rename a column, create a new column or edit the expression that defines an existing column.
Pick Fields is available when:

D
a Browser window is active.
Menu Path
"
Browse > Pick Fields or
Using Pick Fields

To access the Pick Fields dialog:
"
Choose Browse > Pick Fields. The Pick Fields dialog displays.
Use the Pick Fields dialog to perform a variety of column and field display operations. Pick Fields Dialog
Fields in Table Columns in Browser
Display a list of the fields in the current table. Display a list of the columns currently displayed in the Browser window.
MapInfo Reference
309

Add Remove Up Down Edit Browser Column Name Expression Assist OK Cancel Help Temporarily rename the browser column. Display an expression as a browser column. Access the Expression dialog where you can specify an expression. See Expression Dialog. Perform the specified options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic. Add a field to the Browser window. Remove a field from the Browser window. Move the selected item in Columns in Browser up one column. Move selected item in Columns in Browser down one column.
Adding Fields to a Browser Window

To add field(s) to the Browser window: 1. Choose a field from the Fields in Table box. or Shiftclick to select multiple fields from the Fields in Table box. 2. 3. Choose Add. The selected field(s) are added to the end of the Columns in Browser box. Choose OK. The field(s) are added to the displayed Browser window.
Removing Fields from a Browser Window

To remove field(s) from the Browser window: 1. Choose a field from the Columns in Browser box. or Shiftclick to select multiple fields from the Columns in Browser box. 2. 3. Choose Remove. Choose OK. The field(s) are removed from the displayed Browser window.
310
MapInfo Reference
Creating a New Column by Applying an Expression

Create a new display column by applying an expression to an existing column or modifying the expression which defines an existing column. A column you modify or create using an Expression is for display purposes only. Modifications are not saved with the Browse window. To create a new Browser window column: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click on Expression in the Fields in Table box. The Expression Dialog displays. Type an Expression or create an expression by choosing parameters from the Columns, Operators and Functions dropdown lists. See Functions. Choose verify to validate the syntax of the expression. This step is optional. Choose OK to accept the expression. The expression displays in the Edit Browser Column Name and Expression boxes. Choose OK if the information in the Name and Expression boxes is accurate. See the following: Editing the Expression that Defines a Column and Expression Dialog.
Editing a Column Name

To edit a column name: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose a column from the Columns in Browser list. Position the cursor in the name box. Enter the new column name. Choose OK. The column displays with its new name.
Editing the Expression that Defines a Column

Edit only the column name or the expression that defines the column. A column you modify or create using an expression is for display purposes only. Modifications are not saved with the browser. To create an expression that can be saved, create the expression through the SQL Select command. Use File > Save Copy As to save the table. There are two methods for defining an expression:
D
Change the text in the Edit Browser Column Expression box. or Click Assist to display the Expression dialog that contains dropdown lists of columns, operators and functions. See Functions.
MapInfo Reference
311

Editing an Expression Using Assist To edit the expression that defines a column using Assist: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose the text in the Expression box to make the Assist button active. Click the Assist button. The Expression dialog displays. Edit the expression by choosing parameters from the Columns, Operators, and Functions dropdown lists. Choose OK to execute the expression and modify the column display in the Browser window.
Editing an Expression by Changing Text To edit the expression that defines the column by changing the text in the Expression box: 1. 2. 3. Choose the column name in the Columns in Browser column. The column name and expression display in the Edit Expression Name and Expression boxes. Edit the expression in the Expression box. Choose OK to execute the expression and modify the column display in the Browser window.
See:
Functions New Browser Window Command
312
MapInfo Reference
Polygon Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Polygon button to:
D
access the Polygon tool. Use the Polygon tool to draw polygons one side at a time.
The Polygon button is available when:

D
at least one map with an editable layer is open.
Menu Path
D
Drawing Toolbar > Polygon button
Drawing Polygons
To draw a polygon: 1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Polygon button. The cursor becomes a small cross. 2. 3. Move the pointer to where you want to begin drawing and click the mouse button once. Drag the pointer to draw the first side or line. Click the mouse button once when you want to terminate the current line and continue drawing another line from that endpoint. Continue this process for each additional side. Point and click, and a new line displays between the previous endpoint and the new point that you selected. 4. When you want to stop, doubleclick on the last end point.
MapInfo draws the last side of the polygon, automatically connecting it with the starting point and fills the polygon with the default pattern as set by the Symbol Style option. For example, when you want to draw a triangle, draw two lines in a V shape, then doubleclick. MapInfo draws a third line to close the shape. When you press <SHIFT> while using the Polygon tool, the line segments will be constrained to horizontal, vertical, and 45degree diagonal.
Drawing Multiple Polygons

To draw a region consisting of more than one polygon: 1. 2. 3. Draw each polygon with the Polygon tool. Select all polygons. Use Objects > Combine to join the separate polygons into one region.
Add, delete, and move nodes by accessing Reshape mode once a polygon is chosen. See Reshape Button/Command.
MapInfo Reference
313
Specifying Polygon Objects Attributes

Use the Polyline Object dialog to determine the polyline's location, length, line segments, sections, and smoothness. 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Click the polyline object. Choose Edit > Get Info. or Use the Select tool and doubleclick the object. The Region Object dialog displays. Region Object Dialog
Bounds X1 and X2
These are the left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries, respectively, of the region's minimum bounding rectangle (the smallest rectangle that can fully enclose the region. The coordinate values for the center of the polygon or region. The center of the polygon is considered to be the center of its minimum bounding rectangle. Total area of the polygon. Total perimeter of the line segments. The number of line segments in the polygon.
Center X, Y
Total Area Total Perimeter Line Segments
314
MapInfo Reference

Polygons Indicates how many polygons make up the selected region. There are maps where an object consists of more than one polygon (for example, the state of Massachusetts has many islands) but is still considered one object. This attribute tells you how many polygons are in the chosen object. Display the Region Style dialog. Specify fill and border for the polygon. See Region Style Command. Perform the specified options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Style OK Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
315
Polyline Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Polyline button to:
D
access the Polyline tool. Use the Polyline Tool to draw polylines, a connected sequence of lines that are not closed. These segments are then treated as one object.
The Polyline button is available when:

D
a Layout or Map window with an editable layer is active.
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Polyline button
Drawing a Polyline
To draw a polyline: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Polyline button. Move the pointer where you want to begin drawing. The cursor displays as a cross in the layer or editable Map window. Click the left mouse button once. Move the pointer to draw the first line segment. Click the mouse button once to terminate the current line and continue drawing another line from that endpoint. Continue this process for each additional segment, point and click; a new line appears between the previous end point and the new point that you select. Doubleclick the last endpoint to stop drawing.
Press <SHIFT> while using the Polyline tool, to constrain the line segments to horizontal, vertical, and 45degree diagonals.
Drawing a Curved Line

To draw a curved line: 1. 2. 3. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Polyline button; draw a figure. When you are done, doubleclick on the object using the Select tool to display the attribute box. Check the Smooth box. or Choose Objects > Smooth. MapInfo smooths the polyline into a curve. Unsmooth changes a curved line or shape into an angular one.
316
MapInfo Reference

To unsmooth the object:
"
Clear the Smooth box or Select the figure by using the Select button and choose Objects > Unsmooth. The polyline is unsmoothed.
Specifying Polyline Objects Attributes

Use the Polyline Object dialog to determine the polyline's location, length, line segments, sections, and smoothness. To specify object attributes: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Click the polyline object. Choose Edit > Get Info. The Polyline Object dialog displays. or Use the Select tool and doubleclick the object. The Polyline Object dialog displays. Polyline Object Dialog
Bounds X1 and X2, Y1 and Y2
X1 and X2 are the left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries of the polyline's minimum bounding rectangle (the smallest rectangle that can fully enclose the polyline). The coordinate of the midpoint of the middle segment. When there is an even number of segments, the middle segment is defined to be segment N/2 + 1, with N equal to the number of segments. If you have eight segments, MapInfo reports the center of the fifth segment, or 8/2 + 1. Total length of the line segments.
Center X, Y
Total Length
MapInfo Reference
317

Line Segments Sections Smooth Line Style OK Cancel Help The number of segments is the total number in all sections of the polyline. Number of sections in a multipolyline object. Smooth the polyline, making it into a continuous curve. Double click to display the Line Style dialog. Specify style, color and width of the polyline. See Line Style. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
318
MapInfo Reference
Preferences Command Options Menu

Use Preferences to:
D
specify the way in which you want MapInfo to operate. Preferences is always available.
Preferences is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Options > Preferences
Specifying Preferences
Specify settings that control the way MapInfo operates. MapInfo retains preferences from session to session. To specify preferences:
"
Choose Options > Preferences. The Preferences dialog displays.
Preferences Dialog
System Settings
Specify clipboard operation, color defaults, screen size, paper and layout units of measure and number used for the undo feature. Displays System Settings Preferences dialog. Specify how to resize a window, duplicate node movement, snap tolerance, highlighting for selected and target objects, use of metric distance and area units and scroll bar display. Displays Map Window Preferences dialog. Specify title; subtitle and symbol text for the Legend Window.
Map Window
Legend Window
MapInfo Reference
319

Startup Specify the Quick Start dialog display and use of the mapinfow.wor workspace. Displays the Startup Preferences dialog. Specify the placement of house numbers. Displays the Address Matching Preferences dialog. Specify directories MapInfo will use to store and search, including Workspaces, MapBasic Programs, Import Files Crystal Report files, theme templates. Display the dialog for the selection.
Address Matching Directories
OK
System Settings Preferences Dialog
Copy to Clipboard Copy TEXT to clipboard Copy BITMAP to clipboard Copy Metafile to clipboard Color Defaults When creating a thematic map, you need to distinguish between objects in different thematic layers. When you create a new thematic layer, MapInfo chooses the initial colors and patterns based on the Color Defaults setting. Either a range of solid colors or a range of black and white patterns is used. Changing the color default settings does not affect existing maps or graphs. Check to specify that you want only text copied to the clipboard. Clear to specify that you do not want text copied to the clipboard. Copy only graphic objects as a bitmap; bitmaps are non-scalable representations of the object. Copy graphic objects as a metafile (.wmf); metafiles are scalable representations of an object.
320
MapInfo Reference

Monitor Setting Check to have MapInfo determine if your monitor is color or black and white and then uses either color or gray scale fill patterns. View and print the thematic map in gray scale when working on a color monitor. Use a black and white monitor, but print in color on a color printer.
Black & White Color
Aspect Ratio Adjustment The aspect ratio is the relationship between the height and width of the screen. It can be adjusted to deal with various problems. When you are running under Windows and you choose Window Size as the map size when you print the map, the printout of the map is smaller than it appears on the screen. To compensate, measure the display area of the screen and enter those dimensions in the Aspect Ratio Adjustment box. Use custom screen size Check to have MapInfo calculate the display area of your monitor and displays its estimated width and height dimensions. Use these dimensions or enter your own. Enter the width of the monitor's display area in inches. Enter the height of the monitor's display area in inches. Specify the units used when you measure the size of objects in a Layout and the size of paper in the Print dialogs. Set the number of times edits can be undone. You cannot undo the following; Revert, Save, Save As, or Modify Table, or any operations whose effects are primarily cosmetic. Set the undo number from 0, which deactivates the Undo system, to 800 undo records; the default is 10 undo records. For example, if you set the undo number to 120 and attempt to undo 121 records, the undo menu is unavailable. There is a memory limit for the Undo command. If you are editing extremely complex graphic objects, the number of reversible records may drop below this undo setting. See the Undo Command.
Width Height Paper & Layout Units Number of Undo Objects
Pre-Version 4 Symbols Display Using True Type Font OK Cancel Help Check to draw vector symbols with characters from the MapInfo Symbols font. Clear to draw vector symbols. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
MapInfo Reference
321

Map Window Preferences Dialog
When resizing Map window Specify how map windows resize (default). This setting has no effect on already open maps. Choose Map > Change View to override this default. See Change View. Fit map to new window Preserve current scale Choose to see the same view of the map after enlarging or shrinking the Map window. Choose to change the map view after enlarging or shrinking the Map window. See a smaller or larger area depending on whether you enlarged or shrunk the window.
Move duplicate nodes in Specifies whether MapInfo looks for duplicate nodes when you move a node by using Reshape. Since the nodes of various objects are often adjacent to one another, this features ensures boundaries are not accidently corrupted. None of the layers The same layer Highlight Control Selected Objects Target Objects Specify the color, pattern and size of lines and the color and pattern for selected objects in selectable layers. Specify the color, pattern and size of lines and the color and pattern for target objects in selectable layers. Do not look for duplicate nodes when moving a node. Move connected nodes in the same layer when an adjacent node is moved.
322
MapInfo Reference

Snap tolerance Specify a tolerance within which Snap operates. If the tolerance is set to 3 pixels, whenever you move a node within 3 pixels of another node, that node will snap to the other node (become the other node), is snap to node is active. If you work in a Map window that contains many closely positioned objects you want a tight snap tolerance (1,2 or 3) to draw close to another node without snapping to it. See Snap to Node. Display new maps in kilometers and area in square kilometers. Otherwise, maps are displayed by using miles and square miles. This option has no effect on already open Maps. Use Map > Options to change existing Map units. Choose to display window scroll bar.
Metric distance & area units
Scroll Bars Warn Prior to Loss of Cosmetic Objects Map Labels Thematic Labels OK Cancel Help
Check to have dialog display asking you to save cosmetic objects to a table before closing. Check to have dialog display asking you to save labels to a workspace before closing. Check to have dialog display asking you to save thematic layers to a workspace before closing. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Legend Window Preferences Dialog Legend Window
Title Pattern: Designates the text that displays at the top of each frame. The first occurrence of a # character will be replaced with the name of the map layer on which the frame is based. For example, # Legend for layers States, will produce the title States Legend. If you prefer to have Legend precede the layer name, enter Legend of #. This will produce Legend of States. Subtitle Pattern: Designates subtitle text; uses the # symbol in the same manner as described in Title Pattern. Style Name Pattern: Designate the text that displays next to each symbol in a frame. The % character will be replaced by the text Line, Point, Region, as appropriate. Use the # character as described in the default title pattern section. For example, %of # will expand to Region of States.Border: Check to place a border around the legend. Click the box displaying the X to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.
MapInfo Reference
323

Startup Preferences Dialog
Workspace Options Save MAPINFOW.WOR when exiting MapInfo Automatically save your work setup as a workspace when you exit.
Load this workspace whenever you start MapInfo. Load MAPINFOW.WOR when starting MapInfo Display Quick Start Dialog Check to display the Quick Start dialog each time you start MapInfo. The Quick Start Dialog offers the following options: Restore Previous Session; Open Last Used Workspace; Open a Workspace; Open a Table. See Quick Start. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Help
324
MapInfo Reference

Address Matching Preferences Dialog
House number comes before street name House number comes after street name OK Cancel Help Directories
Place the house number before the street name when specifying addresses. Place the house number after the street name when specifying addresses. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
MapInfo Reference
325

Initial Directories for File Dialogs Specify the paths MapInfo should use as default for opening and saving Tables, Workspaces, MapBasic Programs, and Import Files. To set a path, click the file type and click modify, or double click the file type. The Choose Directory dialog display; select the appropriate path. Specifies the directories MapInfo will search to find tables without fully qualified paths referenced in workspaces or MapBasic programs. Subdirectories of any search path listed are also searched. You can have up to four entries in the list. A more general path requires a longer search time. Click Modify, Add or Remove to edit the list of paths. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Search Directories for Tables
OK Cancel Help
Using Default Preferences

MapInfo stores the preference settings in the file mapinfow.prf in the windows/system or your personal home directory (directory where files such as the windows.ini file is store). If at any time you want to return to the MapInfo's default settings, rename mapinfow.prf and delete it. Then, when you use MapInfo, settings will be returned to the MapInfo defaults. If you want to return to your own settings, rename your setting file to mapinfow.prf.
326
MapInfo Reference
Previous View Command Map and Layout Menus
Previous View Command Map and Layout Menus

Use Previous View to:
D
return to the last view of a map or layout.
Previous View is available when:

D
a Map or Layout window is active and its view has been changed at least once.
Menu Path
"
Map > Previous View or
"
Layout > Previous View or
Viewing a Previous Map or Layout

By using Previous View repeatedly, you can toggle between two views of the map or layout. To return to the previous view of a map:
"
Choose Map > Previous View.
To return to the previous view of a layout:

"
Choose Layout > Previous View.
If you frequently use Previous View it is more efficient to create two maps of the same table, each with a different view. Then, you can view the two simultaneously.
See:
MapInfo Reference
327
Print Command File Menu

Use Print to:
D
print the contents of a Layout, Browse, Map, Redistrict or Graph window and set printing specifications appropriate to the type of window contents.
Print is available when:

D
a Layout, Browse, Map, Redistrict or Graph window is active.
Menu Path
"
File > Print
Using the Print Dialog

Access the Print Dialog to specify the printer, print range number of copies and display information on printer status.
Print Dialog
Printer Name Status Type Displays the current printer. Select another printer from the drop down list. Indicates if printer is currently busy. Displays printer name.
328
MapInfo Reference

Where Comment Properties Print to File Print Range Copies OK Cancel Options Displays printer path. Displays comment entered in Windows Printer Properties dialog. See your system documentation. Displays printer information; see your system documentation. Prints document to a file, not to the printer. You will be prompted for a file name and path. All: Print entire document. Pages from: to: Specify from/to range of pages to be printed. Use the drop down list to specify number of copies to be printed. Print the document using the designated settings. Cancel the printing options. Click to display settings appropriate to the type of window to be printed: map; browser; layout; redistricts; graph. See Printing Options. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Help
Printing Options
Click the Options button in the Print dialog to display dialogs appropriate to the type of window being printed.
Using the Browser Print Options Dialog

Rows
All From To OK
Print all the rows of the browser. Specify the number of the first row you want to print. Specify the number of the last row you want to print. Print the browser using the specified options.
MapInfo Reference
329

Cancel Help Cancel the dialog options. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Using the Map Print Options Dialog

Print Map Dialog
Map Size Window Size Set the printed map to the same size as the window on the screen. This size displays in the two text boxes associated with the Custom size option. Set the output to take up the full printed page, even though the window may be much smaller than the page. This size displays in the two text boxes associated with the Custom size option. Set the size of the map to be printed.
Fit to Page
Custom Map Contents Same as Window Centered on Window
Print a map that contains areas not visible in the window. Set the output to the same content and proportions as the window. Set the output to be centered on the window. Note that this setting may cause the output to print beyond the extents of the window, depending on how you set its size, scale and margins.
330
MapInfo Reference

Custom Width Height Specify the width of the printed map. Also shows width for noncustom maps. Specify the height of the printed map. Also shows height for noncustom maps. When you specify a size smaller than one page, the map is centered on the page. Custom states the size of the printed image (width and height) in the default unit set by Preferences (Options > Preferences > System Settings). You can specify a size larger than one page, and the map is automatically printed on as many pages as necessary. Print the map using the specified options. Depending on the printer configuration, the output goes to the printer you specified in the dialog. Consult the system coordinator for the configuration. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK
Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
331
Using the Graph Print Options Dialog
Size Window Size Fit to Page Print the graph exactly as it is on the screen. Print the graph with the same aspect ratio as the window on the screen (that is, the same proportions of width to height), but enlarge (or shrink) the graph to fit either the page width or height. Print the graph to completely fill one page, changing the aspect ratio to fit both the page width and height. Specify a size. When the custom size is larger than one page, MapInfo automatically spreads the graph over the correct number of pages to print the size you request. Specify the appropriate width of the printed graph. Also, show width for noncustom graphs. Specify the appropriate height of the printed graph. Also, show height for noncustom graphs. Print the graph using the specified options. Depending on the printer configuration, the output goes to the printer you specified in the dialog. Consult the system coordinator for the configuration. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Full Page Custom
Width Height OK
Cancel Help
Note: Pen Plotter Users Depending on what device driver you are using, you may see unsatisfactory results using a pen plotter to output certain line styles. In the Line Style dialog, the list of available styles ends with several styles that may not plot properly.
332
MapInfo Reference

If you do plan to do extensive map editing using patterned line styles, you may want to print or plot a small sample of the line style as a test, before you begin editing.
Printing a Map Legend

To print a map legend, place the map and its legend into a layout. You can then print the layout. or Using the utilities program, Legends.mbx, embed the legend in the map window and print the map window.
Printing in the Win 3.x Environment Use Print to:

D
print the contents of a Layout, Browse, Map, Redistrict or Graph window.
Print is available when:

D
a Layout, Browse, Map, Redistrict or Graph window is active.
Menu Path
"
File > Print
Using the Print Dialog
Printer Print Range
Display the current printer name and port. All: Print all the pages of the document. From: Specify the number of the first page you want to print. To: Specify the number of the last page you want to print. Designate the dots per inch (dpi). Print the document using the designated options.
Print Quality OK
MapInfo Reference
333

Cancel Options Help Cancel the dialog; do not print the document. Display dialog with options appropriate to the type of document being printed: map; browser; graph. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Browser Print Options
Rows All From To OK Cancel Help Graph Print Options Print all the rows of the browser. Specify the number of the first row you want to print. Specify the number of the last row you want to print. Print the browser using the specified options. Cancel the printing operation. Display the appropriate Help topic.
334
MapInfo Reference

Size Window Size Fit to Page Print the graph exactly as it is on the screen. Print the graph with the same aspect ratio as the window on the screen (that is, the same proportions of width to height), but enlarge (or shrink) the graph to fit either the page width or height. Print the graph to completely fill one page, changing the aspect ratio to fit both the page width and height. Specify a size. When the custom size is larger than one page, MapInfo automatically spreads the graph over the correct number of pages to print the size you request. Specify the appropriate width of the printed graph. Also, show width for noncustom graphs. Specify the appropriate height of the printed graph. Also, show height for noncustom graphs. Print the graph using the specified options. Cancel the printing operation. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Full Page Custom
Width Height OK Cancel Help Map Print Options
Map Size Window Size Set the printed map to the same size as the window on the screen. This size displays in the two text boxes associated with the Custom size option.
MapInfo Reference
335

Fit to Page Set the output to take up the full printed page, even though the window may be much smaller than the page. This size displays in the two text boxes associated with the Custom size option. Set the size of the map to be printed.
Custom Map Contents Same as Window Centered on Window
Print a map that contains areas not visible in the window. Set the output to the same content and proportions as the window. Set the output to be centered on the window. Note that this setting may cause the output to print beyond the extents of the window, depending on how you set its size, scale and margins. Specify the printed map scale. Specify the width of the printed map. Also shows width for noncustom maps. Specify the height of the printed map. Also shows height for noncustom maps. When you specify a size smaller than one page, the map is centered on the page. Custom states the size of the printed image (width and height) in the default unit set by Preferences (Options > Preferences > System Settings). You can specify a size larger than one page, and the map is automatically printed on as many pages as necessary. Print the map using the specified options. Cancel the printing operation. Display the appropriate Help topic.
Custom Scale Custom Width Height
OK Cancel Help
See:
Legend Button, New Browser Window Command New Graph Window Command, New Layout Window Command New Map Window Command, New Redistricter Window Command, Print Setup Command
336
MapInfo Reference
Print Setup Command File Menu
Print Setup Command File Menu

Use Print Setup to:
D
choose a printer and printer connection.
Print Setup is available when:

D
Print Setup is always available when printing in the Win 3.x environment.
Menu Path
"
File > Print Setup
Choosing a Printer and Default Options

Use the Printer Setup dialog to choose a printer and printer connection. Install printers and configure ports through the Windows Control Panel. The options in the Setup dialog box vary, depending on the printer you install. The title of the setup dialog box also changes to reflect the printer. To select a printer:
"
Choose File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialog displays.
Printer Setup Dialog Current Printer Setup Display installed printer(s). Choose a printer and printer connection. Display a dialog box that allows you to control default printer settings for the printer you select. For more information click the Help button.
For more information on installing printers and default settings, see the system documentation.
See:
Print Command
MapInfo Reference
337
Projection Button
Projection Button
Use the Projection button to:
D
specify table projection.
Menu Path:
Access the Projection Button through the following paths:
D D D D D D D
File > New Table Table > Maintenance > Table Structure Table > Maintenance > Make ODBC Table Mappable Table > Import Table > Export File > Open > Raster Image > Register Raster Image dialog Digitizer Setup
Specifying a Projection
To specify a projection:
"
Click Projection. The Choose Projection dialog displays.
Choose Projection Dialog Category Choose a projection from the Category dropdown list. See the MapInfo User's Guide, Appendix H: Creating Your Own Coordinate System and the User's Guide, Chapter 21 for further description. MapInfo displays Longitude/Latitude maps using an Equidistant Cylindrical projection. Access Map > Options to change this option. Category Members OK Cancel Choose the appropriate coordinate unit from the Category Members dropdown list. Change the table projection as specified. Cancel the dialog options.
338
MapInfo Reference
Projection Button
Non-Earth Coordinate Bounds Dialog

The NonEarth Coordinate System dialog allows you to specify coordinates for a nonearth map. You may want to create a nonearth map, such as a floor plan. Unlike those in an earth map, the coordinates of objects in the floor plan are not referenced to positions on the earth. The objects' coordinates are referenced to the floor plan itself, generally representing distance from the lowerleft corner of the floor plan. This dialog allows you to specify the bounds and units for a nonearth coordinate system. You can use positive or negative numbers to specify the minimum and maximum X and Y values. Coordinate Bounds If you want to create a floor plan that is 20 inches wide and 10 inches high, choose inches and enter the following numbers for Coordinate bounds: Min X: 0Min Y: 0 Max X: 20 Max Y: 10
When you create a nonearth map, it is important to specify bounds that are large enough to contain the objects you want to put in the map. You cannot create objects outside the bounds of a map, and you cannot increase the bounds of an existing map.
See:
User's Guide, Appendix H User's Guide: Chapter 21
MapInfo Reference
339
Quick Start
Quick Start
Use Quick Start to:
D
specify startup options for your next session.
Menu Path
Options > Preferences> Startup > Quick Start Dialog.
Quick Start Dialog

To access the Quick Start dialog:
"
Start MapInfo. The Quick Start dialog displays.
Quick Start Dialog
Restore Previous Session
Open the same windows, tables, and files that were open when you exited from your last session.
Open the workspace last used. If No Workspace displays, no Open Last Used Workspace (Workspace workspace was used in your last session. Name) Open a Workspace Open a Table OK Cancel Open a workspace. The Open Workspace dialog displays. See Save Workspace Command. Open a Table; the Open Table dialog displays. See Open Table Command. Begin session using designated option. Begin session with no tables open.
See:
Open Table Command, Open Workspace Command
340
MapInfo Reference
Radius Select Button Main Toolbar
Radius Select Button Main Toolbar

Use the Radius Select button to:
D
access the Radius Select tool. Use the Radius Select tool to select objects within a circular region.
The Radius Select Button is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Radius Select button
Searching for Objects Within a Circle

To search for objects within a given radius: 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Toolbar > Radius Select button. Position the cursor at the center of the area from which the selection will be made and press the mouse button. Keep the mouse button depressed, and drag the cursor away from the center point. As you do so, a dotted circle forms, indicating the area chosen. The exact radius displays in the StatusBar at the screen's lowerleft corner. Release the mouse button when the circle reaches the appropriate radius. The objects in the topmost selectable layer within the radius are selected.
4.
The Radius Select tool selects objects whose centroid is within the chosen area; the object does not have to be completely bounded by the radius. To select objects from another layer, you must turn off selectable in Layer Control for the upper layers. Only objects from one layer at a time are selected.

Press <SHIFT> while using the Radius Select tool to add the newly selected objects to the previous selection.
See:
Boundary Select Button Marquee Select Button Select Button The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 8
MapInfo Reference
341
Rectangle Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Rectangle button to:
D
access the Rectangle tool. Use the Rectangle tool to draw rectangles and squares in an editable map or layout.
The Rectangle button is available when:

D
a Layout or a Map window with an editable layer is active.
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Rectangle button
Drawing a Rectangle
To draw a rectangle: 1. 2. 3. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Rectangle button. Move the pointer where you want to begin creating the rectangle. Press and hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the rectangle. The shape displays and changes size and proportion as you move the pointer. 4. Release the mouse button to finish creating the shape.
Rectangles are closed figures. They are filled with the default fill pattern and/or color as specified in Options > Region Style.
Drawing a Square
To draw a square:
"
Press <SHIFT> while using the Rectangle tool.
Note: the sides of a rectangle are always true horizontal and vertical, even when you change the map's projection. If you want the sides of a rectangle to adjust when you change the map's projection, create four-sided region objects instead of rectangle objects.
342
MapInfo Reference
Specifying Rectangle Object Attributes

To specify the attributes of a Rectangle:
"
Use the Select tool and doubleclick the object. The Rectangle Object dialog displays. or Select the object. Choose Edit > Get Info. The Rectangle Object dialog displays.
Rectangle Object Dialog
Bounds X1 and X2 Center X, Y Width Height Style OK Cancel Help
Left and right boundaries. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries, respectively. Coordinate values of the rectangle's center. Left to right distance. Set the width of the object. Top to bottom distance. Set the height of the object. Display the Region Style dialog to specify the style of the object. See Region Style Command. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
As with all graphic objects, you can change the object by changing its attributes in the [Name] Object dialog. You can change these attributes when the layer is editable or view the attributes whenever the layer is selectable.
MapInfo Reference
343
Redraw Window Command Window Menu
Redraw Window Command Window Menu

Use Redraw Window to:
D
redraw the active window.
When you add a new table as the top layer of a map, only the effected portions of the map are redrawn. When switching between open windows, the map is preserved, so the entire window does not have to be redrawn. Also, use Redraw Window after pressing <ESCAPE> to interrupt the window drawing.
Redraw Window is active when:

D
a window is active.
Menu Path
"
Window > Redraw Window
See:
New Browser Window Command New Graph Window Command New Layout Window Command New Map Window Command New Redistricter Window Command
344
MapInfo Reference
Refresh ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar
Refresh ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar Refresh ODBC Table Command Table > Maintenance
Use Refresh ODBC Table to:
D
refresh a MapInfo linked table with the most recent data residing on the remote database for that linked table.
Refresh ODBC Table is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Table > Maintenance > Refresh ODBC Table
Using Refresh ODBC Table

To Refresh a table: 1. 2. 3. Choose Table > Maintenance > Refresh ODBC Table. The Refresh Table dialog displays. Choose the name of the table to be refreshed from the refresh table list. Choose OK. The specified table is refreshed.
See:
Save Table Command Unlink ODBC Table Command Open ODBC Table Command
MapInfo Reference
345
Region Style Button Drawing Toolbar
Region Style Button Drawing Toolbar Region Style Command Options Menu
Use the Region Style button and command to:
D
specify the color, pattern and outline of new or existing closed objects.
The Region Style command and button is available when:

D
The Region Style command and button is always available.
Menu Path
"
Options > Region Style or
"
Drawing Toolbar > Region Style button
Using Region Style

Region Style applies color and pattern to closed objects such as ellipses, rectangles, rounded rectangles, window frames and polygons. To change the color and pattern of existing objects, they must be editable. See Layer Control Button/Command. To change the attributes of line, text and point objects, use the Line Style, Text Style and Symbol Style options.
Specifying the Color and Pattern of New Objects

To specify the color(s) and pattern of new objects: 1. 2. Make the layer where the objects are to be created editable and deselect any selected objects. Choose Options > Region Style. The Region Style dialog displays.
346
MapInfo Reference

Region Style Dialog
Fill Pattern Choose a palette for patterns. If you do not want to use a pattern, choose the letter N, for none; the foreground and background color are disabled. If you choose the solid black pattern, the background color is disabled. Choose a color for the object(s)' foreground. The Sample box displays the pattern using the foreground color you chose. The foreground color is applied to the part of the pattern that displays as black. Therefore, to make the object a solid color, choose the solid black pattern in the Fill Pattern palette and a color from the Foreground Color palette. The color you chose displays in the Sample box as a solidcolored region. Check the box to display a background color; clear for a transparent" background. Choose a color for the object's background. The background color is applied to the part of the pattern that displays as white. Background color is grayed if you have chosen the solid black pattern.
Color
Background Color
MapInfo Reference
347

Border Style Color Width Sample OK Cancel Help Choose the border line style. Choose the border line color. Choose the border line width. Display a sample of the pattern and color selections. Apply the fill and border selections to selected objects or uses the selections when you create new objects. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Changing the Color and Pattern of an Existing Object

To change the color(s) and pattern of an existing object: 1. 2. 3. 4. Make the layer where the objects reside editable. Choose an object or multiple objects. Choose Options > Region Style. The Region Style dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description. Choose OK. The object's color and pattern changes according to the selections.
Using a Black and White Monitor

When you are using a black and white monitor (or a color monitor with a monochromatic display), MapInfo provides you with a menu of 8 color options. Although these colors appear as various shades of gray on the screen, they print in the correct color when you are using a color output device.
See:
348
MapInfo Reference
Register Raster Image

Use Register Raster Image to:
D
prepare a raster image for use with MapInfo.
Menu Path
The Image Registration dialog displays automatically the first time you open a raster image file in MapInfo. Once you have opened a raster image table, open the Image Registration dialog by choosing Table > Raster > Modify Image Registration.
Raster Images
A raster image is a type of computerized image that consists of rows of tiny dots (pixels). If you have a scanner and scanner software, you can create a raster image by scanning a paper map. After you scan a map image and store the image in a file, you can display the file using MapInfo. There are many different raster image file formats. MapInfo can read the following types of raster image files: JPEG, GIF, TIFF, PCX, BMP, TGA (Targa), and BIL (SPOT satellite images). See the MiPro User's Guide, Appendix E: Registering SPOT Images. For best results we recommend using a high resolution display.
Registering a Raster Image

When you register a raster map image, you enter map coordinates (e.g. longitude/latitude degrees), and indicate which locations on the raster image correspond to those coordinates. Register each raster image before displaying the image in MapInfo, so that MapInfo can perform geographic calculations, such as distance and area calculations, when displaying the raster map. The first time you open a raster image file, the Image Registration dialog displays. Complete this dialog to register the raster image. The raster image's registration information is stored in a table file. Therefore, you only need to register a raster image once. Raster image files provided by MapInfo are already registered. You do not need to perform the registration process when you display the sample raster data included with MapInfo. If you have not yet registered the raster image in MapInfo, perform the following:
MapInfo Reference
349

When you know the control point coordinates: 1. Open the raster file by choosing File > Open Table and Raster Image file format. Choose the raster image file and choose Open. The Image Registration dialog displays. A preview of the raster image appears in the lower half of the dialog. See the following: Image Registration Dialog. Specify the projection of the raster image by choosing the Projection button. It is important to use the proper projection for the image to minimize image distortion when overlaying vector map layers. You cannot change the projection from the Map window. Click on a point in the preview image. The Add Control Point dialog displays. Specify the coordinates from the paper map in the dialog. The points become marked on the preview image. Enter at least three control points; more if you do not know the projection or the image does not have a projection, such as an aerial photograph. Click OK to display the raster image.
2.
3.
When you don't know the control point coordinates: 1. Open the raster file by choosing File > Open Table and Raster Image file format. Choose the raster image file and choose Open. The Image Registration dialog displays. A preview of the raster image appears in the lower half of the dialog. Specify the appropriate projection for the raster image by choosing the Projection button. If you do not set the projection, MapInfo defaults to Longitude/Latitude. To begin adding control points, click on a location in the preview. The Add Control Point dialog displays showing the point's location in pixels. Click OK. The point with no X and Y coordinates is listed in the Image Registration dialog. We will specify the coordinates in a following step. Choose at least three more control points in the same way. Use the scroll bars to move to other areas of the image. Choose points that can be easily identified and selected in a Map window. Open the corresponding vector map table in a Map window. You may have to move the Image Registration dialog to access the Map window. Choose Table > Raster > Select Control Points from Map. Highlight Pt 1 in the Image Registration dialog. Click on the equivalent point in the map window. The Add Control Point dialog displays showing the map X and Y coordinates for the vector point location. Click OK to accept the coordinates. MapInfo transfers them to the Image Registration dialog. Repeat for the remaining control points by repeating step 7 for at least three control points. To ensure accurate results, enter five or six control points. Each control point that you add helps MapInfo associate earth coordinates with locations on the raster image. Ideally, you should have at least one control point at or near each corner of the image. The number of control points needed depends on the nature of the raster image. If you cannot determine the map's projection, or if you are working with an image that does not have an actual map projection, such as an aerial photograph, you may want to enter twenty or more control points. 9. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The raster image will display in the Map window under the vector layer.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
Remember that any location west of the Prime Meridian has a negative longitude, and any location south of the Equator has a negative latitude. Thus, 73 degrees West corresponds to the X value 73.
350
MapInfo Reference

If you are entering coordinates in degrees, you must enter decimal degrees, as opposed to degrees/minutes/seconds. For a discussion of converting d/m/s to decimal degrees, see the following: Converting Degree/Minutes/Seconds Coordinates into Decimal Degrees. When you complete the Image Registration dialog, the registration information is saved in a table (.tab) file. In later MapInfo sessions, you can reopen the table by choosing File > Open Table without repeating the registration process, and without having to choose Raster Images as the File Type in the Open Table dialog.
Determining Map Coordinates

If the raster map image shows a graticule (a grid of longitude/latitude lines), you can determine map coordinates by noting the longitude/latitude labels along the graticule. If the map does not show a graticule, you may be able to determine map coordinates by locating prominent map features, e.g. the NorthWest corner of a region, and then using another MapInfo table as a reference to determine the coordinates of those prominent features. For a discussion of this process, see the following: Choosing Control Points from an Existing Map.
Choosing Control Points from an Existing Map

Another method of adding control points is by displaying a Map window next to the Image Registration dialog, and then adding control points by clicking on the Map window. To choose control points by clicking on an existing Map window: 1. Open a Map window. Ideally, this Map window should contain a nonraster MapInfo table which covers roughly the same area as the raster image. For example, if the raster image shows a map of Australia, the vector Map window should also show Australia. The Map window does not need to contain any raster images. Open a raster image file as described above: choose File > Open, set File Format to Raster, choose the image file that you wish to open, choose a Projection for the image. The Image Registration dialog displays. Choose Table > Raster > Select Control Point From Map. This action puts MapInfo in a special mode which allows you to select control points by clicking on a Map window. Move the Image Registration dialog off to the side of the screen, so that you can see the Map window. Do not close the dialog; move it to the side. Move the cursor over the Map window, to a prominent map feature (e.g. the northeast corner of a region). Choose a map feature that appears in both the Map window and the raster image. Click on the prominent feature in the Map window. The Add Control Point dialog displays, showing you the longitude/latitude coordinates of the location where you clicked on the Map. Enter a Label (e.g. Northeast") to help you remember where you clicked on the Map. At this point, the Image X and Image Y fields are set to zero; you do not need to fill these fields in at this time. Choose OK.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
MapInfo Reference
351

7. 8. Move the Image Registration dialog back to the center of the screen. Select the control point you just added (Northeast") by clicking on the list at the top of the dialog. Move the cursor over the image preview in the lower half of the dialog, so that the cursor is over the same prominent feature where you clicked on the Map window. Click on the prominent feature in the image preview. The Edit Control Point dialog displays. Notice that the Image X and Image Y fields are no longer set to zero. When you clicked on the image preview, MapInfo assigned X and Ycoordinates to the selected control point. Choose OK. 9. Choose the New button to deselect the control point. You are now ready to add another control point by returning to step 4.
Editing Control Points by Pointing and Clicking

The preceding steps describe how you can add control points by pointing and clicking. You can also edit existing control points by pointing and clicking. If you select a control point (by clicking in the list at the top of the dialog), and then click on the map or the preview, MapInfo repositions the selected control point. If you click while no control point is selected, MapInfo adds a new control point.
Converting Degree/Minute/Second Coordinates into Decimal Degrees

If you are entering map coordinates in degrees, you must enter decimal degrees as opposed to degrees/minutes/seconds. For example, to specify the coordinates 40 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 40.5 degrees. MapInfo includes a MapBasic application, DMSCNVRT, which converts d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees. To use the DMSCNVRT program: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose File > Run MapBasic Program. Choose the DMSCNVRT program and choose OK. The program runs and a DMSCNVRT Toolbar displays. Choose the A button from the DMSCNVR Toolbar. The Coordinate Conversion dialog displays. Enter degrees/minutes/seconds coordinates into the dialog. Choose the Convert button. MapInfo converts the coordinates into decimal degrees, then displays the converted coordinates in the dialog and prints the coordinates to the Message Window.
The following formula describes how to convert d/m/s coordinates to decimal degrees: decimal_degrees = degrees + (minutes/60) + (seconds/3600)
Thus, 40 degrees, 30 minutes is equal to 40 + (30/60) + (0/3600), or 40.5 degrees.
352
MapInfo Reference

Image Registration Dialog
Control Points
The list at the top of the dialog shows all control points that have been assigned to the raster image. Each control point has a label, indicating the name of the control point. The label is optional; if you do not specify a label, MapInfo assigns a default label, such as Pt 1." To enter a new control point, choose the New button, then click on the image preview in the lower half of the dialog, at a location in the map image where you know the map coordinates. When you click on the image, MapInfo displays the Add Control Point dialog (described below). Once you have entered three control points, an error calculation for each control point displays. An error value of zero indicates that the control point is placed correctly relative to other control points. An error value greater than zero indicates that the control point's placement seems incorrect, given the placement of the other control points. The numeric error code indicates the control point's distance, in pixels, from where MapInfo calculates the control point should be placed.
Edit. . .
Enabled when you choose a control point. Choose Display the Edit Control Point dialog. Use this dialog to edit the name, map coordinates, or raster image coordinates of the selected control point. For a description of this dialog, see the following: Using the Add Point Dialog and and Edit Control Point Dialog.
MapInfo Reference
353

Remove Goto Enabled when you choose a control point from the Control Points list. Choose to delete the selected control point. Enabled when you choose a control point from the Control Points list. Choose to see the selected control point in the preview window. MapInfo scrolls the preview window so that the window shows the portion of the image containing the selected control point. Choose to unselect the currentlyselected control point. If no control point is currently selected, the New button has no effect. Remember to choose the New button before you add new control points. If a control point is selected, and you forget to choose the New button, and you click on the image preview, you will not be adding a new control point, you will be editing the selected control point. Specify the map projection represented by the raster image. The default projection is longitude/latitude. Set the coordinate units you want to use when entering control points. When you choose Units, a dialog with a list of coordinate units displays. The list of available units depends on the map projection you are using. For example, if you have specified a Lambert map projection, the Units dialog lets you choose between degrees longitude/latitude and meters (the unit of measure normally associated with Lambert maps). Choose + to get a closer look at the raster image. Choose - to zoom back out. Register the image. Cancel the registration. Display appropriate Help topic.
New
Projection Units
+ Button, Button OK Cancel Help
354
MapInfo Reference
Using the Add Control Point Dialog and the Edit Control Point Dialog
If no control points are selected, and you click on the image preview area of the Image Registration dialog, the Add Control Point dialog displays. If you select a control point, then click on the image preview, the Edit Control Point dialog displays. Both dialogs contain the same options, as described below. You can also add or edit control points by choosing Table > Raster > Select Control Point From Map, and then clicking on a Map window while the Image Registration dialog is displayed. Label Map X, Map Y latitude Enter an optional label in this field. Enter the x and ycoordinate values, such as longitude. If you are entering coordinates in degrees (the default), any location west of the Prime Meridian has a negative xcoordinate, and any point south of the Equator has a negative ycoordinate. Thus, 73 degrees West is represented by the X value 73. These fields represent the position of the control point, in on the raster image. An Image X value of zero represents the left edge of the image, and an Image Y value of zero represents the top edge of the image.
Image X, Image Y pixels
See:
Adjust Image Styles Command Modify Image Registration Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 15
MapInfo Reference
355
Rename Table Command Table > Maintenance

Use Rename Table to:
D
rename a table and its component files.
Rename Table is available when:

D
a table is open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Maintenance > Rename Table
Renaming a Table
A MapInfo table consists of several component files; use the Rename Table command to rename each of the table's component files. If you rename a table by using the Windows File Manager, be sure to rename all of the component files. When you rename a table, any workspaces containing that table are effected. When you want to continue using those workspaces, you should edit the workspace file so that it uses the new table name. You can edit a workspace file in any text editor or word processor. When you rename a raster image, MapInfo renames its associated .tab file (MapInfo Registration File) without renaming the actual raster image file. To rename a table:
"
Choose Table > Maintenance > Rename Table.
When more than one table is open, a dialog with a dropdown list of all open tables displays. Rename Table Dialog Rename table Rename Cancel Help Choose the table to rename. Display the Rename Table dialog. Cancel the rename operation. Display appropriate Help topic.
356
MapInfo Reference

Rename Table Dialog
Save in: File name Save as type: Save Cancel Help
Select the directory where you want to store the table. Enter the new table name. Designate file type. Rename the table and its component files. Cancel the dialog options. The dialog box closes without renaming the table. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
Save Copy As Command User's Guide: Chapter 18
MapInfo Reference
357
Reshape Button Drawing Toolbar
Reshape Button Drawing Toolbar Reshape Command Edit Menu

Use the Reshape button and command to:
D
toggle in and out of Reshape mode. Use reshape to edit regions, polylines, lines, arcs, and points by moving, adding, and deleting nodes that define line segments. You also can copy and paste selected nodes to create new points, lines and polylines.
Reshape is available when:

D
a single region, polyline, line, arc or point is selected from an editable map layer or Layout window.
Menu Path
"
Edit > Reshape or
"
Drawing Toolbar > Reshape button
Changing the Shape of Objects

Regions and polylines are created by joining lines. The lines which make up these objects have nodes at their endpoints. Change the shape of regions and polylines by moving, adding or deleting these nodes. Select as many object nodes as you want, however, the nodes must be contiguous, belong to the same region and reside in an editable map layer or layout. The maximum number of nodes for regions and polylines is 1,048,572 nodes for a single polygon region or polyline. The limit drops by seven nodes for every two additional polygons. If an object with more than 32K nodes is saved and the table is read in a version of MapInfo prior to version 4.5, the object(s) will not be visible. Objects in the table that do not exceed the 32K limit will be visible.
Displaying and Selecting an Objects Nodes

To display an object's nodes: 1. 2. Select the object to be reshaped. Choose Edit > Reshape or Choose Drawing Toolbar > Reshape button. Small, filled boxes display at each node in the object.
358
MapInfo Reference

To select a single node:
"
Click on a node.
To select the shortest range between two nodes:

"
Click on a node to select it and Shiftclick on another node.
To select the longest range between two nodes:

"
Click on a node to select it and Controlclick on another node.
To select all the nodes in an object:

"
Click on a node and Controlclick on the same node.
Moving and Deleting an Objects Nodes

To move a node:
"
Click and drag a selected node to the new location. All other selected nodes will also move.
To prevent accidental moving of nodes, MapInfo does not move them until you hold down the mouse button for one second. To delete a node: 1. 2. Select a node(s). Choose Edit > Clear or Edit > Cut (to remove the nodes and place them on the clipboard) 3. Press <DELETE> or <BACKSPACE>. The selected nodes are deleted. If all nodes are deleted, the region or polyline is deleted. If only some nodes are deleted, the region or polyline is redrawn to reflect the deletion(s). When nodes are deleted from a region, the resulting object is still a region. To create a polyline, use Convert to Polylines on the resulting region, or Copy/Paste nodes that you want to retain.
MapInfo Reference
359
Adding a Node
Nodes can be added only to lines, polylines and regions. To add a node: 1. 2. 3. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button. Move the cursor to the point on the segment where you want to add a node. Click to add the node.
360
MapInfo Reference
Copying and Pasting an Objects Nodes

If you copy and paste a single node, a point object is created. If you copy and paste multiple nodes, a polyline object is created. To copy and paste nodes: 1. 2. 3. Select the nodes to be copied. Choose Edit > Copy. The selected nodes are copied to the clipboard as a point or polyline. Choose Edit > Paste to paste the nodes as a point or polyline.
The tabular data is not copied to the clipboard. When you paste the nodes, the resulting object has an empty tabular row.
Changing a Regions Centroid

Labels created using the automatic labeling option, thematic mapping bar and pie graphs and point objects created by geocoding, are drawn at an object's centroid. To move the label, or point, move the object's centroid. If you move a region's centroid (you cannot move the centroid of any other objects) it will affect where future labels, thematic mapping bar and pie graphs and points are placed. It will not affect the location of existing labels, thematic mapping bar and pie graphs and points. To move existing labels and points, select them and drag them. To display centroids:
"
Choose Map > Layer Control > Display > Show Centroids.
To move an object's centroid: 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Select the object whose centroid will be moved. Choose Edit > Reshape or Choose Drawing Toolbar > Reshape button. 4. Click on the centroid and drag it to another location within the object.
See:
Add Node Button Snap To Node The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 13
MapInfo Reference
361
Revert Table Command File Menu
Revert Table Command File Menu

Use Revert Table to:
D
to access a previous version of a table when you have made changes that you do not want to make permanent and haven't saved yet.
Revert Table is active when:

D
a table has been edited, but not saved.
Menu Path
"
File > Revert Table
Reverting to a Previous Version

Revert Table replaces the selected table currently in memory with the last version saved. To revert to a previous version: 1. 2. Choose File > Revert Table. A dialog displays. If necessary, choose the table to revert. Click Discard. The changes you have made to the selected table are discarded.
See:
Save Copy As Command Save Table Command
362
MapInfo Reference
Rounded Rectangle Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Rounded Rectangle button to:
D
access the Rounded Rectangle tool. Use the Rounded Rectangle tool to draw rounded rectangles and squares.
The Rounded Rectangle button is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Rounded Rectangle button
Drawing Rounded Rectangles and Squares

To draw rounded rectangles: 1. 2. 3. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Rounded Rectangle button. Move the pointer where you want to begin creating the rectangle. Press and hold down the mouse button, dragging the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner of the rectangle. The shape appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you move the pointer. 4. Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the size you want.
To draw rounded squares:

"
Press <SHIFT> while using the Rounded Rectangle tool.
Rounded Rectangles are closed figures filled with the default fill pattern and/or color. Patterns and colors are set from the Region Style option. Change the settings by choosing Options > Region Style. See Region Style Command.
MapInfo Reference
363
Specifying Rounded Rectangle Object Attributes

To specify rounded rectangle attributes:
"
Use the Select tool and doubleclick the object. or
"
Select the object and choose Edit > Get Info.
The Rounded Rectangle Object dialog displays. Rounded Rectangle Object Dialog
Bounds Center X, Y Height Width Corner Radius Style
X1 and X2 are left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries, respectively. Coordinate values of the rectangle's center. Top to bottom distance. Set the height of the rounded rectangle field. Left to right distance. Set the width of the rounded rectangle field. Corner radius is measured in units appropriate to the object represented. Choose to display the Region Style dialog where you can specify the fill and pattern of rounded rectangles. See Region Style Button. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK Cancel Help
364
MapInfo Reference
Ruler Button Main Toolbar
Ruler Button Main Toolbar

Use the Ruler button to:
D
determine the distance between two points. a Map window is active.
The Ruler button is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Ruler button
Measuring the Distance Between Two Points

To measure the distance between two points: 1. Click at the point where you want to start measuring. The Ruler window displays: Distance The distance the ruler is currently measuring. Total The total of all the distances measured during the current use of the Ruler tool. As you move the cursor, you will see the distance measurement change in the Ruler window. Position the Ruler window anywhere on the screen. 2. Click a second point. MapInfo adds that distance to the total distance. If you are only measuring the distance between two points, doubleclick to terminate the measurement, or If you are measuring the length of a path containing more than one segment continue this process to keep a running total of the length of a multisegment path. 3. Doubleclick the mouse button when you have completed the measurement. You can now start another measurement or choose a new tool. When you choose a new tool, you may want to close the Ruler window. To close the Ruler window, click the Controlmenu box. To change the units of measure, choose Map > Options.
Ruler Tool Measurements

The Ruler tool measures greatcircle distances along the earth. A greatcircle is a circle whose center is at the center of the earth. A greatcircle distance between two points is the distance along the greatcircle which connects those two points. A greatcircle distance is the shortest distance between two points. The Ruler tool measures the shortest distance between two points.
MapInfo Reference
365
Run MapBasic Program Button Tools Toolbar
Run MapBasic Program Button Tools Toolbar Run MapBasic Program Command File Menu
Use the Run MapBasic Program button or command to:
D
run a MapBasic application.
Run MapBasic Program is available when:

D
The Run MapBasic Program button or command is always available.
Menu Path
"
File > Run MapBasic Program or
"
Tools Toolbar > Run MapBasic Program button
Running a MapBasic Program

MapBasic is a programming language which you can use to customize or automate Maplnfo. To create MapBasic applications, you need the MapBasic compiler, which is a separate product. However, you do not need the MapBasic compiler to run a completed MapBasic application. To run a MapBasic program:
"
Choose File > Run MapBasic Program or
"
Choose Tools Toolbar > Run Mapbasic Program button.
The Run MapBasic Program dialog displays.
366
MapInfo Reference

Run MapBasic Program Dialog Look in: File Name Designate the search path. Type or select the filename you want to run. This box lists files with the extension you select in the Files of Type box. To see a list of files with a particular extension. type an asterisk (*), a period and the three character extension. For example if you want to see all files with a .mbx extension in a directory, type *.mbx. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.mbx Files of type: Open Cancel Help Display all available MapBasic applications in the specified drive and directory. Select All Files (*.*) to list all available files in the specified drive and directory. Run the selected MapBasic application. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Sample MapBasic Utilities Provided with MapInfo

MapInfo comes with an assortment of sample MapBasic utilities, which simplify some common tasks. Some of the sample applications are described below:
D D D D D D D D D
Concentric Ring Buffers (r_buffer.mbx): Create concentric buffers in one step. For example, the first buffer ring goes 0-50 miles, the next ring goes 50-100 miles, etc. AutoLabel (autolbl.mbx): Creates map labels as text objects stored in the Cosmetic layer. Use this application if you need to create map labels that can be saved to a permanent table. COGOLine (cogoline.mbx): Draw a line of a specific length, at a specific angle (e.g. specifying zero degrees makes the line go due East). DMS Convert (dmscnvrt.mbx): Converts between degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees for an entire table. GridMaker (gridmakr.mbx): Draw a graticule (a grid of longitude/latitude lines). InstallW (installw.mbx): Installer utility for street data. Legend Manager (legends.mbx): Manage legend windows. This application allows you to create more than one legend, or embed a legend within a map. MapInfo ODBC Catalog (miodbcat.mbx), ODBC Upload (miupload.mbx), BuildSQL: Utilities to aid database administrators. MapWin (mapwin.mbx): Control a Map window's title, and turn autoscroll on or off.
MapInfo Reference
367

D D D D D D D
Named Views (nviews.mbx): Assign a description to the current map view (center point and zoom). Later, you can return to the view by choosing the name from a dialog. OverView (overview.mbx): Open a second map window that displays an overview of the current map (also referred to as an area detail map). Scale Bar application (scalebar.mbx): Annotate a map with a distance scale. Seamless Manager (seammgr.mbx): Create and manage seamless tables. Search and Replace (srchrepl.mbx): Perform a searchandreplace operation on a column in your table. Symbol application (symbol.mbx): Create custom symbol shapes. Table Manager (tablemgr.mbx): Display information about your tables, such as the table's full directory path.
After you run one of the sample applications, look on the Tools menu for related commands. Tip: To display instructions for the sample applications, choose About... from the Tools menu. Within the About box there is also an AutoLoad button. Click this button if you want the application to load automatically, every time you start MapInfo. (Automatic loading of applications is managed through the workspace Startup.wor.)
Running Older MapBasic Applications

MapInfo 5.0 can run older MapBasic applications (i.e. applications created and compiled using version 3 of the MapBasic compiler). However, some older MapBasic applications may not be fully functional in MapInfo 5.0. For example, applications that customize the MapInfo menus may produce different results in MapInfo 5.0, because MapInfo 5.0 provides menu items that were not available in earlier versions. Some MapBasic applications use Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs). Note that the 32bit version of MapInfo cannot run MapBasic applications that use 16bit DLLs. If you have a MapBasic 3.0 application that uses 16bit DLLs, you may need to obtain 32bit versions of the DLLs before you can run the application with 32bit MapInfo. If you encounter problems when running an older MapBasic application in MapInfo 5.0, ask the application developer about whether the application is fully compatible with MapInfo 5.0.
See
The MIPro User's Guide, Chapter 20
368
MapInfo Reference
Save Copy As Command File Menu

Use Save Copy As to:
D
save an existing table, including a query table or a linked table, under a new name, with a designated projection, in MapInfo, Microsoft Access, or dBASE DBF file format.
Save Copy As is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
File > Save Copy As
Saving a Copy of a Table as a New Table

A new table can be created from any open table. The original table remains unchanged and open for further edits. The new table does not open immediately after it is created; use the Open Table command to open the table. When you save a copy of a raster image, MapInfo saves another copy of the .TAB file (MapInfo Registration File), without copying the actual raster image file. Both the old and new copies refer to the same raster image. Another .tab file is useful since it is where brightness and contrast settings are stored. When you save a copy of a linked table, the newly created is no longer linked to a remote database table. To save a copy of a table as a new table:
"
Choose File > Save Copy As. The Save Copy of Table As dialog displays. If more than one table is open, choose the appropriate table from the dropdown list.
MapInfo Reference
369

Save Copy of Table As Dialog
Save in: File Name
Specify the path where the table is to be saved. Type the new name of the file. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab
Save as type:
Choose MapInfo, MapInfo 2.x (save to MapInfo 2.0 or 2.1 format) or dBASE DBF. When saving to dBase, the data file is saved to both DBF and MapInfo format. If you want only a DBF file, use the Export command (Table > Export). Save a copy of the table with the specified name and format in the specified path. If the file format is dBASE DBF, the dBASE DBF dialog displays. Specify the appropriate character set. Cancel the operation.
Save Cancel
370
MapInfo Reference
Saving a Copy of Access and MapInfo Tables

Help Projection Display appropriate Help topic. Display the Choose Projection Dialog. To save a table with a different projection, click the projection button and choose the appropriate projection. See Projection Button.

You can save a MapInfo table as an Access table, save an Access table as a MapInfo table, and save an Access table as an Access table using the File > Save Copy As menu command. Note: Access file format created is version 7.0.
Saving a MapInfo Table as an Access Table

1. 2. Choose File > Save Copy As. The Save Copy of Table As dialog displays. In the Save in field, specify the location where you want to save the MapInfo table definition of your Access file. The MapInfo table definition is the .tab file. It is used by MapInfo to keep information about an Access file registered in MapInfo. In the Save As Type field choose Microsoft Access Database. Choose Save to display the new Save Access Table dialog.
3. 4.
5. 6.
Enter the name of the new Access table. If you wish to save this table to a new Access database, click OK. MapInfo creates a new Access database with the same name as the table you are saving, and saves the table in Access format to that database.
MapInfo Reference
371

If you wish to save this table to an existing Access database, choose Database to display the Select Access Database dialog, and follow steps 7, 8 and 9.
7. 8.
Specify the location of the existing Access database where you want to save the table. Choose Save to display the Save Access dialog where you can save the table to the specified database.
9.
Choose OK to save the table.
372
MapInfo Reference
Saving an Access Table as a MapInfo Table
Saving an Access Table as a MapInfo Table

Use the Save Copy As command as you normally would to save the Access table as a MapInfo table.
Saving an Access Table as Another Access Table

This option is used to save an Access table to a different database. The process is similar to saving a native MapInfo table. Use the Save Copy of Table As dialog to specify the database path and name, then the new Save Access Table dialog to specify the table name of the new table.
See:
Rename Table Command
MapInfo Reference
373
Save Cosmetic Objects
Save Cosmetic Objects

Use Save Cosmetic Objects to:
D
prevent data loss when you are closing a mapper window or table.
Save Cosmetic Objects is available when:

D D D D D D
you select Close Table and there is only one table left open in your mapper window. you select Close All. you select Table > Maintenance >Pack Table. you select File > Exit. you select Close from the Windows System menu. you select Map > Save Cosmetic Objects.
If you have a mapper window with cosmetic objects open and you select any of the close actions listed above, the Save Cosmetic objects dialog will display.
Save Cosmetic Objects allows you to:

D
save cosmetic objects to a table.
Using the Save Cosmetic Objects Dialog
Transfer Cosmetic Objects to Layer Save Cancel
Select the layer to which the cosmetic objects should be saved. Select New to save objects to a table not currently open, or to a new table; the Save Objects to Table dialog displays. Saves the cosmetic objects to the designated table. Cancels the operation; cosmetic objects are not saved.
Disabling the Save Cosmetic Objects Dialog

To disable the Save Cosmetic Objects dialog: 1. 2. Select Options > Preferences > Map Window. The Map Window Preferences dialog displays. In the Warn prior loss of: section, uncheck Cosmetic Objects.
374
MapInfo Reference
Save Query File Menu
Save Query File Menu

Use Save Query to:
D
save a query created using the SQL Select or Select command as MapInfo Query tables.
Save Query is available when:

D
you have created a query using the Select or SQL Select command.
Menu Path
"
File > Save Query
Save Query
The Save Query command, a major usability improvement to the querying functionality as of MapInfo Professional 4.5, is enabled when you have created a query using the Select or SQL Select command. Save Query is available only for queries created using Select or SQL Select commands. Queries against other queries may not be saved using this feature. Queries can be saved using a new MapInfo table type. These tables consist of two files; a .TAB and a .QRY. Once a query has been saved in one of these tables, it may be reexecuted by simply opening the table. To use Save Query: 1. 2. Create a query using the SQL Select or Select command. Choose File > Save Query. Complete the dialog to save the query as a MapInfo table file. When you open this table, the tables on which the query is based are reopened and the query is reexecuted.
Save Query and Workspaces

To activate the Save Query option when using a workspace, you must activate the Save Queries in Workspaces option in the Startup Preferences dialog. Choose Options > Preferences > Startup Preferences and check the Save Queries in Workspaces option. This is the default setting. If you have selected this option and open a workspace, the associated query(ies) will be executed, and any windows created by the query(ies) will be regenerated. A separate .tab file for the query(ies) is not created. Only queries created using the SQL Select and Select commands are saved in a workspace. Queries against other queries may not be saved using this feature.
See:
Save Template
MapInfo Reference
375
Save Table Command File Menu

Use Save Table to:
D
save changes made to a MapInfo local table, or to a remote database table.
Save Table is available when:

D
at least one table has been edited (i.e., information added, records deleted or modified, etc.).
Menu Path
"
File > Save Table
Saving Changes Made to a Table

The Save Table dialog allows you to save changes made to more than one table. To save changes:
"
Choose File > Save Table. The Save Table dialog displays.
Save Table Dialog
Save Tables Save Cancel Help
Display a list of open tables with edits pending. Choose the table that you want to save. Save the table with any changes. MapInfo saves the edits and leaves the table open for continued use. Cancel dialog options. Access online help.
376
MapInfo Reference
Saving Changes Made to a Linked Table

The Save Table dialog allows you to save changes made to a linked table. A linked table is one that has been downloaded from a remote database into MapInfo using the File > Open ODBC Table menu option. The records in the table maintain links to their respective records on the remote database. As a result, saving the table updates these records on the remote database. But before MapInfo allows these records to be updated, it evaluates the records in a process called conflict resolution.
Conflict Resolution
Because the records in a linked table are from a remote database, it is possible that other users may have changed or deleted them on the remote database since the table was downloaded into MapInfo. As a result, conflicts may exist between the data residing on the remote database and the new data that you want to upload to the remote database. When saving a linked table, if MapInfo finds conflicts between the data on the remote database and any records in the linked table since it was downloaded, the Resolve Conflicts dialog automatically appears. Use this dialog to resolve conflicts as explained below. This process will be invoked whenever an attempt to save a linked table detects a conflict in an update. The dialog allows the user to choose which fields from the conflicting records will be used to update the database. Three instances of the record being updated must be considered:
D
The original server state of the record (the record as it appeared when initially extracted from the database). The current local state of the record (the record as it appears in the session of MapInfo making the update, possibly after editing by the user). The current server state of the record (the record as it appears in the database at the time of the update).
A conflict exists when the original state of the record does not match the server state. This implies that another user has updated this database since it was extracted by MapInfo. The conflict resolution dialog will appear once for each conflicting record. At any point in this process, the user may choose to leave this interactive mode and have the rest of the conflicts resolved automatically. The user may choose to use all local values or all server values. For each conflict found during a commit, the user will be presented with a modal dialog box. This box will display enough information for the user to decide which data values to use to update the row in question.
MapInfo Reference
377
Type of conflict
Value changed on server, local value unchanged Value changed on server, local value changed
Default resolution
Use server value Use local value
378
MapInfo Reference

Resolve Conflicts Dialog
Column
Shows the name of the column in the record that has data which is in conflict and needs to be resolved. If the column name is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value is displayed in the Column field, below.
Original ODBC
Shows the original data as it appeared when extracted from the database. If the original data is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the Original field, below.
Current MapInfo
Shows the data as it appears in the MapInfo linked table you are trying to save. The MapInfo field will be blank if the record has been deleted from the MapInfo database. If the data from the MapInfo linked table is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the MapInfo field, below.
MapInfo Reference
379

Current ODBC Shows data as it appears in the remote database at the time of the update. (This data might have been changed by another user since it was downloaded into a MapInfo linked table.) The Current field will be blank if the record has been deleted on the remote database, after being downloaded into a MapInfo linked table. If the current data from the remote database is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the Current field, below. Current MapInfo Check this box to update the remote database with the value from the MapInfo linked table. If the current record on the database, or the MapInfo record was deleted, then this check box is not available. Instead, you must use the MapInfo or Current button, below. Current ODBC Check this box to retain the current value on the remote database. If the current record on the database, or the MapInfo record was deleted, then this check box is not available. Instead, you must use the MapInfo or Current button, below. MapInfo button This button selects all the MapInfo values. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the MapInfo database, selecting the MapInfo button will delete the record from the remote database. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the remote database, selecting the MapInfo button will insert the new record into the remote database. Current button This button selects all the current ODBC values. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the MapInfo database, selecting the Current button will ignore the deletion and retain the current record in the remote database. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the remote database, selecting the MapInfo button will insert the new record into the remote database.
380
MapInfo Reference

Column Original ODBC Current MapInfo Current ODBC OK Stop Commit Help Automatic Shows the full name of the column highlighted in the list box. Shows the full value of the original data highlighted in the list box. Shows the full value of the MapInfo data highlighted in the list box. Shows the full value of the current remote database data highlighted in the list box. Causes the selected values to be used for the update of this record. The Stop Commit button terminates the entire update. A second dialog box will pop up to confirm that this is what the user really wants. Accesses online help. The Automatic button causes the interactive conflict resolution to end. A dialog displays which allows the user to select which of the automatic conflictresolution modes will be used for the remainder of this update. One of two automatic modes can be selected from the dialog. You can accept MapInfo values, or the values currently residing on the remote database.
See:
New Table Command Revert Table Command Save Copy As Command Open ODBC Table Command
MapInfo Reference
381
Save Template in the Select and SQL Select Dialogs

Use Save Template to:
D
save a query statement for later reuse.
Save Template is available when:

D
always available.
Menu Path
"
Query > Select Query > SQL Select
Using Save Template

In the Select and SQL Select dialogs, the options Save Template and Load Template display. These options allow you to save a query statement, and to reload the query statement. You may want to save a query statement and use it with an updated version of the table on which it was created or use it with a table containing the same fields as the table on which the query statement was created. The query does not need to be complete or syntactically correct to be saved. When you save the query, a .QRY file is created. The .QRY file is saved in the directory specified in Options/Preferences/Directories.
382
MapInfo Reference

To use Save Template: 1. Choose Save Template from either the SQL Select or Select dialogs. The Save Dialog to Query File dialog displays. The Save Template option is enabled even if the query is not complete or syntactically correct. 2. 3. Designate a file name for the query, and a folder destination. The Select or SQL Select dialog redisplays; choose OK to execute the query.
See:
Save Query
MapInfo Reference
383
Save Thematic Settings
Save Thematic Settings

Use Save Thematic Settings to:
D
prevent thematic layer data loss when you are closing a mapper window, table, or workspace.
Save Thematic Settings is available when:

D D D D D D
you select Close Table Interactive and there is only one table left open in your mapper window. you select Close Table. you select Close All. you select Table > Maintenance >Pack Table. you select File > Exit. you select Close from the Windows System menu.
Save Thematic Settings allows you to:

D
save thematic settings to a workspace.
The Save Thematic Settings dialog offers the following options:

D D D
Save: Saves your thematic settings to a workspace. Discard: Discards your thematic settings, without saving them. Cancel: Cancels the Close action.
If you have a mapper window with a thematic layer in it and you select any of the close actions listed above, the Save Objects dialog will display. You must choose Save, Discard, or Cancel to leave the dialog.
Turning Save Objects and Map Labels Dialog Off:

1. 2. 3. Select Map Window Preferences. Uncheck the Thematic Layer box. Uncheck the Map Labels box.
384
MapInfo Reference
Save Window As Command File Menu

Use Save Window As to:
D
capture the active window and save it as a bitmap (.BMP) or a Windows metafile (.WMF). You can then use the exported file with other applications.
Save Window As is available when:

D
at least one of the following is open: Browser, Map, Graph, or Layout window.
Menu Path
"
File > Save Window As
Saving a Window as a Bitmap or Metafile

To save a window as a bitmap or metafile:
"
Choose File > Save Window As. The Save Window As dialog displays.
Save Window As Dialog
Image Size Same as Window Default Width and Height of the image automatically display. When you choose this setting, the image is saved with the default dimensions. Set the window size. When you want to make the image larger or smaller, scale the image by either entering the width or height or resize the window manually. When you change either the height or the width, MapInfo changes the other dimension to preserve the image's proportions. Access the Save Window to File dialog where you can specify a file name, and path. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Custom Size
Save Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
385

Save Window to File Dialog
Save in: File name:
Choose a directory where you want to save the image. Type a file name. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.bmp
Save as type:
Choose the file format for the exported image. Bitmap (.BMP) is the default format. You can also choose Windows Metafile (.WMF); JPEG File Interchange Format; Portable Network Graphics Format; Tagged Image File Format; Photoshop 3.0. Before you choose the WMF format, read the information on window metafiles which follows. Save the window with the specified options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Save Cancel Help
386
MapInfo Reference
Cropping Images and Saving as Bitmaps and Metafiles

Windows metafiles and bitmaps are complex images. The way they behave in other applications depends on those applications. The way that images are clipped or cropped can vary according to the target application. When MapInfo exports a window, it does not crop objects that extend beyond the edges of the windows. However, it does export information about where the cropping occurs. For example, if you are exporting a map that displays part of Germany, the exported file contains the entire image of Germany. It also contains information about where MapInfo clipped that image in its map. When you open the exported window in the target application such as a drawing package, the image of Germany may not be cropped. Other applications always accommodate the cropping or clipping of bitmaps done by MapInfo. However, clipping of metafiles can vary between applications. Many drawing applications explode the metafile into individual objects. For example, if a metafile contains several county boundaries, they explode into several polygon objects, one for each county. These types of applications usually ignore the cropping information that MapInfo stores in the metafile. Other applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets, usually open metafiles as one compound object, without trying to explode it into component objects. The programs usually honor the MapInfo clipping information and clip the contents appropriately. For consistent and predictable results, use the Map Clipping feature to predefine a clip region. See Set Clip Region.
Exporting Maps and the One-Pixel Border

Except for ProServer, MapInfo products export the black border by default. To change the border display in MapInfo Professional, modify the registry. Add the following key: \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\MapInfo\MapInfo\Common\ExportBorder This is a DWORD; 0 indicates no border; nonzero indicates that a border should export. In the 16bit version MapInfo, the key is in MAPINFO.INI; [MapInfo Common] section; ExportBorder=0; nonzero indicates that a border should export.
See:
Set Clip Region
MapInfo Reference
387
Save Workspace Command File Menu

Use Save Workspace to:
D
save information about the tables and windows used in the current session.
Save Workspace is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
File > Save Workspace
Saving a Work Session

To name and save the tables and windows used in the current session as a workspace:
"
Choose File > Save Workspace. The Save Workspace dialog displays.
Save Workspace Dialog
388
MapInfo Reference

Save in: File name Designate path to store the workspace file. Type a name for the workspace. MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one ." in them. When using more than one .", you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.wor Save as type: Cancel OK List all files in the current directory that were saved with a .wor extension. All files (*.*) lists all the files in the current directory. Workspaces (*.wor) is the default. Close the dialog box without saving the workspace. Save the workspace. If editing an existing workspace, choose OK to overwrite the existing workspace and replace the existing workspace with the current one. Query tables, symbol size and SQL dialog entries are not saved with a workspace. You can also save a workspace that will open each time you start MapInfo. See Startup.wor. Display appropriate Help topic.
Help
See:
Open Workspace Command Startup.wor The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 5
MapInfo Reference
389
Select All Command Query Menu
Select All Command Query Menu

Use Select All to:
D
select all objects from the top selectable layer in a map, all objects in a layout or all rows in a browser.
Select All is available when:

D
a Browser window is active or a Map window is active, and at least one layer is selectable or a Layout window is active.
Menu Path
"
Query > Select All
Selecting All Objects from a Table, Browser or Map Window

To select all objects:
"
Choose Query > Select All.
In a browser, all the records are selected. In a map, all the objects in the topmost selectable layer are selected. In a layout, all objects in the layout are selected.
See:
Layer Control Button/Command
390
MapInfo Reference
Select Button
Select Button
Use the Select button:
D
access the Select tool. Use the Select tool to select one or more objects or records for analysis or editing in a Map, Layout or Browser window.
The Select button is available when:

"
The Select button is always available.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Select button
Selecting Objects
Making selections is a basic MapInfo operation. Using the Select tool is only one way of making selections. When you activate the tool by clicking on its button, the cursor becomes a pointer. If you are editing records in a Browser window, the cursor becomes an Ibeam.
Selecting a Single Object from a Map or Layout

To select a single object from a map or layout: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Click the object.
The layer where the object is located must be selectable in the Map window. When an object is selected it is highlighted according to the settings you specified in Options > Preferences > Map > Highlight Control. If the layer is editable, the selected object is surrounded by edit handles. When you select another object, the first object is unselected. When you want to select more than one object, press <SHIFT> while selecting.
Selecting Multiple Objects from a Map or Layout

To select multiple objects from a map or layout:
"
Press <SHIFT> while using the Select tool to continue to make selections.
Select multiple objects as long as they reside in the same layer. Each time you select additional object(s), the newly chosen object(s) is added to the current selection.
MapInfo Reference
391
Select Button
Removing Objects from the Selection

To unselect an object or remove it from the selection:
"
Press <SHIFT> while using the Select tool and click the object.
When you click, the object is removed from the selection. To unselect all objects:
"
Choose Query > Unselect All. or
"
Click on the Map or Layout window where there are no objects.
Hot Spots for Point Objects

When selecting a point object, position the Select tool in the center of the symbol. However, some symbols have a hot spot that you select. For example, the hot spot for the small flag on a pole (like those used to mark the hole on a golf course) is at the base of the pole. For arrows, the hot spot is the point.
Selecting the Next Selectable Object Beneath the Current Object

Press and hold <CONTROL> while using the Select tool to select the next selectable object beneath the current object. When several objects are overlapping in the same layer, the next object down is selected. When there are no more objects left in the current layer, MapInfo selects objects from the next selectable layer.
Moving a Single Object

To move a single object: 1. 2. 3. Click the title bar of the map or layout to make it active. Make the layer where the object is located editable (Map > Layer Control). Hold the mouse button down until the cursor changes to a four way arrow. Click on the object you want to move and hold down the mouse button for one second. This one second delay prevents you from moving objects accidentally. Keep the mouse button down; drag the object. The actual shape of the object is shown while you drag. When you reach the new location, release the button.
4.
You can move several objects at a time. However, when moving multiple objects, a dotted rectangle displays instead of the object's shape. Once you have chosen multiple objects, place the cursor on any one of them and continue as if you were selecting a single object. When you move the rectangle all of the objects move at once and maintain their positions relative to one another.
392
MapInfo Reference
Select Button
Using the Select Tool in a Browser

Editing a Table Use the Select tool in a Browser window to select a row, add a row to the selection or remove a row from the selection. Selecting a Row To select a row in a browser:
"
Click in the box preceding the first field.
To select multiple rows

"
Press Shiftclick and drag to select multiple rows.
Adding a Row to the Current Selection To add a row to a current browser selection:
"
Press <SHIFT> while selecting another box.
That record is added to the current selection. Removing a Row from the Current Selection To remove a row from the current browser selection:
"
Shiftclick an already selected row.
The row is removed.
See:
Boundary Select Button Marquee Select Button Radius Select Button User's Guide: Chapter 8
MapInfo Reference
393
Select Command Query Menu

Use Select to:
D
query a database, select records and objects from a table according to certain criteria and create a results table that you can view as a map, browser or graph. To query remote database tables, see the Open ODBC Table command.
Select is available when:

"
Menu Path
"
Query > Select
Making Queries Using the Select Command

MapInfo has two commands for selecting objects through querying: Select and SQL Select. Use Select to highlight objects in a Map or a Browser window that meet certain criteria and create a results table that you can browse, map or graph as you would any other table. Use to to perform the following:
D D D
Highlight the records meeting the criteria of the query in a browser . Highlight the graphic objects of the chosen records are highlighted in a map. Highlight both the objects and the records if both a Map and Browser window are open.
In all cases, a selection results in a working table called Selection. This table contains the results of the query. Map or graph this table or save it as a separate table with by using Save Copy As. To make a query:
"
Choose Query > Select. The Select dialog displays.
Select Dialog
394
MapInfo Reference

Select records from table That satisfy Choose the table you will query. Type the query expression or click the Assist button to display the Expression dialog. This dialog will help you build the query expression See Expression Dialog. Name the temporary table that holds the query results. Selection" is the default value. If you choose Selection," MapInfo names the table Query1, Query2, etc. Sort the query by the value in some column. By default, the query is unsorted. Sort a table into some appropriate order by using Select and specifying a sort without using a query expression. MapInfo then selects all records in the table and sorts them according to their values in the specified column. Choose when you want to display a Browser window of the query results, leave it checked. Otherwise, the table is named according to the specifications entered into Store results in table. Execute the query. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Store results in table (optional) Sort results by column (optional)
Browse results
OK Cancel Help
See:
The MIPro User's Guide, Appendix F SQL Select Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 9
MapInfo Reference
395
Select Control Point From Map Command Table > Raster
Select Control Point From Map Command Table > Raster

Use Select Control Point From Map to:
D
add control points to a raster image by clicking on a Map window.
Select Control Point From Map is available when:

D
a Map window is open and the Image Registration dialog displays.
You do not need to close the Image Registration dialog before choosing the Select Control Point From Map command. Choose menu items while the Image Registration dialog is on the screen.
Menu Path
"
Table > Raster > Select Control Point From Map
Selecting Control Points

The Select Control Point From Map command works in conjunction with the Image Registration dialog. The first time you open a raster image file in MapInfo or if you choose Table > Taster > Modify Image Registration, the Image Registration dialog displays. The Image Registration dialog provides an image preview; you can click on the image preview to add control points to the image. The Select Control Point From Map command gives you an alternate way of adding control points. If you choose Select Control Point From Map and click on a Map window, a control point is added to the raster image. For a discussion of adding control points to raster images, see Register Raster Image. Choosing Select Control Point From Map activates a special mode that allows you to add control points by clicking on the map. To cancel that mode, choose a tool, such as the Zoomin button, from the Main Toolbar. This special selection mode is canceled automatically when you close the Image Registration dialog.
See:
Adjust Image Styles Command Modify Image Registration Command Register Raster Image The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 15
396
MapInfo Reference
Send Mail
Send Mail
Use Send Mail to:
D
send a Windows metafile (.wmf) version of the currently active map, browser, graph or layout window using a MAPI (Messaging Application Programmers Interface) compatible mail service, such as MS Mail. send a .wor version of a MapInfo workspace using a MAPI compatible mail service, such as MS Mail.
Send Mail is available when:

D
available when MAPI .dlls are installed.
Menu Path
"
File >Send Mail
Using Send Mail

Use the Send mail feature to send a Windows metafile of the currently active window, or a .wor workspace file. To use Send Mail: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose File > Send Mail. Choose Current Window or Workspace. Complete the dialog to logon to your mail service, if you are not already logged on. Complete the addressing information for your mail service. Send the message; you will be returned to MapInfo.
MapInfo Reference
397
Send to Back Command Layout Menu
Send to Back Command Layout Menu

Use Send to Back to:
D
change the order of objects in a layout by positioning the current selected object, or objects, behind other existing objects.
Send to Back is available when:

D
a Layout window is active and an object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Layout > Send to Back, or Display Shortcut Menu
Changing Objects to the Back of a Layout

All objects in a layout are ordered from front to back. Consider frames and other graphic objects as being stacked in the layout. When you draw a new object it is automatically the frontmost object. The object overlaps any other object in the layout. Use the Send to Back and Bring to Front commands to change the ordering of objects in the stack. Use Send to Back in conjunction with Bring to Front to reorder overlapping objects. You can move any number of objects simultaneously. The selected objects maintain their relative fronttoback ordering, and are placed behind all other objects. If you have added a dropped shadow to an object, select both the object and its dropped shadow when you want to send the object to the back. Otherwise, the object goes behind its dropped shadow. To move an object to the back of a layout: 1. 2. Choose the object or objects you want to move. Choose Layout > Send to Back.
To move an object when it is behind other objects:

"
Press <CONTROL> while using the Select tool and choose the objects. The Select tool cycles through overlapping objects starting with the topmost one.
See:
Bring to Front Command New Layout Window Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 17
398
MapInfo Reference
Series Command Graph Menu

Use Series to:
D
customize the appearance of graphs.
Series is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Graph > Series or
Customizing Area, Bar, Line and X-Y Graphs

Use the Graph Series dialog to specify the name of the series and the color and pattern of series elements for all graph types. To customize graphs:
"
Choose Graph > Series. The Graph Series dialog displays.
Graph Series Dialog
Data Column
Choose the column you want to customize in the current graph.
MapInfo Reference
399

Draw Using Title Area/Bar Enter a title other than the column name. Access the Region Style dialog where you can choose a color, fill pattern, and border line style for bars (on bar charts), and areas (on area graphs). See Region Style Button. Access the Line Style dialog where you can specify drop lines for a line graph, XY graph, and an area graph. See Line Style Button. Access the Symbols Style dialog where you can specify the symbol style used to represent data points in line and XY graphs. See Symbol Style Button. Check to use color defaults. Clear to use black and white defaults. The customizing choices you make in this dialog override the defaults. However, if you have created a custom scheme for a pie chart and want to return to the defaults, click on this box twice. The defaults are restored when you leave the dialog. Redraw the graph with the specified options. Cancel the dialog and leaves the graph unchanged. Display appropriate Help topic.
Line Symbol
Use color defaults
OK Cancel Help
Customizing Pie Graphs

To customize a Pie Graph Series:
"
Choose Graph > Series. The Graph Series dialog displays.
Graph Series Dialog
400
MapInfo Reference

Data Value Pie Wedge Use color defaults Display the data value of the wedge you want to customize. Access the Region Style dialog. Use this dialog to choose the wedge color, fill and line style. See Region Style Button. Use color defaults to graph. Clear to use black and white defaults. The customizing choices you make in this dialog override these defaults. However, if you have created a custom scheme for a pie graph and want to return to the defaults, click on this box twice. The defaults are restored when you leave the dialog. Cancel the dialog and leaves the graph unchanged. Redraw the graph with the specified options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Cancel OK Help
See:
Graph Type Command New Graph Window Command
MapInfo Reference
401
Set Clip Region Command Map > Set Clip Region

Use Set Clip Region to:
D
clip a designated portion of a map for use in printing and presentations.
Set Clip Region is available when:

D
a map window is active and a selection has been made.
Menu Path
"
Map > Set Clip Region or
"
Main Toolbar >Clip Region Button
Using Clip Region

Use Clip Region to isolate a region of a map for display and/or printing. Designate the region to be clipped using the Select tool; the region may be a predefined map region, such as a state, or one you define using a drawing tool. Thematic maps and seamless layers, labels, and points displayed on the map will be included in the clipped region. Raster tables (registered or unregistered) cannot be clipped. To use Clip Region: 1. Use the Select Tool to select the region of the map you want to clip. Only one region can be selected. If you select another clip region, you will be prompted to replace or retain the current clipped region. 2. Choose Map > Set Clip Region. or Click the Set Clip Region button in the Main Toolbar. The map redraws; only the clipped region displays. 3. To redisplay the entire map, choose Map > Clip Region Off or Click the Clip Region On /Off button in the Main Toolbar. To toggle between the map and the clipped region, you may find it useful to use the Clip Region On /Off button. After defining a map clipping object to use as a cutter, you may wish to save the object for reuse.
402
MapInfo Reference

To save a map clipping object in the cosmetic layer: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Layer Control button and make the Cosmetic Layer editable. Also, make sure each of the layers you want to clip are visible. Use a Drawing Tool to draw the map clipping object. Click the Select Tool and select that object. Choose Map > Set Clip Region. The prompt Retain the object used for clipping in the Cosmetic Layer" displays. 5. Select OK to leave the map clipping object in the Cosmetic Layer. The selected map clipping object displays in the Cosmetic Layer. 6. To view the map region associated with the map clipping object choose Options > Region Style and choose None from the Pattern dropdown list. The layers that comprise the clipped region display.
See:
Clip Region Off The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 6
MapInfo Reference
403
Set Target Command Objects > Set Target
Set Target Command Objects > Set Target

Use Set Target to:
D
prepare a selected object to accept subsequent editing commands: Combine, Erase, Erase Outside, Split and Overlay Nodes.
Set Target is available when:

D
a Map window is active and a layer in the current Map window is editable and at least one object in the layer is selected.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Set Target or
Setting a Map Object as a Target

Setting a map object as a target allows you to perform a variety of editing operations on the object, including Combine, Erase, Erase Outside, Split, and Overlay Nodes. Setting the target tells MapInfo to apply any of these editing operations to the target object. MapInfo's editing model is based on first setting the target, then creating an object to act as the cutter that overlays the target and performs the editing action on the target. Use Set Target on editable lines, polylines, arcs, ellipses, rectangles, and rounded rectangles. You cannot use Set Target to edit point or text objects. To set a map object as a target: 1. 2. Select the object(s) to be the target for editing. Choose Objects > Set Target.
You can now create a cutter object and perform an editing operation. For a full discussion of each editing operation, see Combine, Erase, Erase Outside, Split, Overlay Nodes.
See:
Clear Target Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 16
404
MapInfo Reference
Set Target District From Map Button Main Toolbar
Set Target District From Map Button Main Toolbar Set Target District From Map Command Redistrict Menu
Use Set Target District From Map button and command to:
D
make the selected object's district the new target district.
Set Target District From Map is available when:

D
a redistricting session is active and one map object is selected.
Menu Path
"
Redistrict > Set Target District from Map or
"
Main Toolbar > Set Target District from Map button
Using Set Target District from Map

The Set Target District from Map command changes which district is the target district. This command is only available during a redistricting session. For more information on Redistricting, see New Redistrict Window Command. To change which district is the target district: 1. 2. Select one map object. Choose Redistrict > Set Target District from Map. or Main Toolbar > Set Target District from Map button. The district which owns the selected map object becomes the new target district. You also can choose the target district by checking the box of the appropriate row in the Districts Browser window.
See:
Assign Selected Objects Button/Command New Redistrict Window Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 16
MapInfo Reference
405
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut Menus
Use Shortcut Menus to:
"
display command menus for the window in which you are working.
Shortcut Menus are available when:

"
a graph, map, browser, MapBasic, redistricter, or layout window is open.
Displaying Shortcut Menus

To display a shortcut menu from the window in which you are working:
"
press and hold the right mouse button. The shortcut menu for that window displays.
Customize shortcut menus by editing the .mnu file using MapBasic language syntax. Each window displays the appropriate shortcut menus. The following lists the options available in each window:
Browser window
D D
New Row Pick Fields
Graph window
D D D D
Graph Type Label Axis Value Axis Series
Layout window
D D D D D D D D
Change Zoom View Actual Size View Entire Layout Previous View Bring to Front Send to Back Align Objects Create Drop Shadows
406
MapInfo Reference
Shortcut Menus
Map window
D D D D D D D D
Layer Control Clear Cosmetic Layer Change View Clone Mapper Previous View View Entire Layer Edit Objects > Objects menu displays Get Info
MapBasic window
D D D D
Undo Cut Copy Paste
Redistricter window
D D D D
Assign Selected Objects Set Target District from Map Add District Delete Target District
MapInfo Reference
407
Show Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu
Show Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu

Use Show Theme Legend Window button and command to:
D
display the legends associated with thematic maps or graphs.
Show Theme Legend Window is available when:

D
a Legend Window is not displayed.
Menu Path
"
Options > Show Theme Legend Window
Displaying a Legend
To display a theme legend window: 1. 2. Choose Options. Choose Show Theme Legend Window. The Legend window displays or disappears from the screen.
Close the Legend window by clicking on the window's Control menu box. or Choose Options > Hide Legend Window.
Legend for a Thematically Shaded Map

The legend is a summary presentation of the thematic shading. When you have one or more layers shaded by value (thematically mapped), you can choose to display a legend identifying the ranges and their colors/symbols. When the Map is not shaded, the legend displays No active Legend".
Legend for a Graph

The legend indicates what each data series represents.
See:
Create Thematic Map Hide Legend Window Command New Graph Window Command Modify Thematic Map Command
408
MapInfo Reference
Show MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar
Show MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar Show MapBasic Window Command Options Menu
Use the Show MapBasic Window button and command to:
D
display the MapBasic window.
Show MapBasic Window is available when:

D
a MapBasic window is not displayed.
Menu Path
"
Options > Show MapBasic Window or
"
Tools ButtonPad > Show MapBasic Window button
Displaying the MapBasic Window

To display the MapBasic window:
"
Choose Options > Show MapBasic Window. The MapBasic Window displays or
"
Choose Tools Toolbar > Show MapBasic Window button
Issuing Commands Through the MapBasic Window

You can perform many tasks by typing statements into the MapBasic window. Those same tasks could also be performed by choosing items from menu options. At times it is easier to type commands into the command window. When you issue a command through the MapBasic window, you must use the correct syntax. When you choose menu options, its associated command displays in the MapBasic window. Use this feature to learn the syntax of commands by observing them in the window.
MapInfo Reference
409
Show MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar

To issue a command through the MapBasic window: 1. 2. Type the command. Press <ENTER>.
MapInfo executes the command. When the command does not produce the expected result, edit the command statement by deleting items, adding new items or rearranging items. To reissue a command that you have previously issued: 1. 2. Position the cursor anywhere within the command statement. Press <ENTER>. Use this feature to issue a command several times with small changes each time. To reissue a series of commands: 1. 2. Choose the series by dragging the cursor over them to highlight them. Press <ENTER>.
410
MapInfo Reference
Show Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar
Show Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar Show Statistics Window Command Options Menu
Use Show Statistics Window command and button to:
D
show the Statistics window.
Show Statistics Window is available when:

D
a Statistics window is not displayed.
Menu Path
"
Options > Show Statistics Window or
"
Main Toolbar > Statistics button
Displaying the Statistics Window

To display Statistics:
"
Choose Options > Show Statistics Window. The Statistics window displays. or
"
Choose Main Toolbar > Statistics button
The Statistics window shows the number and tallies the sum and average of all numeric fields for the currently selected objects/records. As the selection changes, the data is retallied, and the Statistics window is updated automatically. To obtain statistics for an entire table, use Query > Select All to select all records in a table.
See:
Calculate Statistics Command Hide Statistics Window Command
MapInfo Reference
411
Show StatusBar Command Options Menu
Show StatusBar Command Options Menu

Use Show StatusBar to:
D
display the StatusBar.
Show StatusBar is available when:

D
a StatusBar is not displayed.
Menu Path
"
Options > Show StatusBar
Displaying the StatusBar

To control the StatusBar display:
"
Choose Options > Show StatusBar. The StatusBar displays.
See:
Hide Status Bar Command StatusBar
412
MapInfo Reference
Smooth Command Objects Menu
Smooth Command Objects Menu

Use Smooth to:
D
smooth a polyline, making it into a continuous curve.
Smooth is available when:

D
a Map window is active and a layer is editable and a polyline is chosen.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Smooth
Smoothing a Polyline
Smooth is available when any object is chosen, however, it only smooths a polyline. It does not smooth a polygon or a rectangle. To smooth a polyline: 1. 2. Select a polyline in an editable layer. Choose Objects > Smooth. The polyline is smoothed.
See:
Unsmooth Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 13
MapInfo Reference
413
Snap to Node Options > Preferences >Map Window

Use Snap to Node to:
D
specify the number of pixels at which a node will align (snap") to another node.
Snap to Node is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Options > Preferences > Map Window
Using Snap to Node

Nodes can be used to reshape an object, and to align objects to one another. Use the Map Window Preferences option: Snap tolerance, to designate the pixel distance between nodes before snap to node occurs. If the tolerance is set to 3 pixels,when you move a node within 3 pixels of another node, and activate snap to node, the node will snap to the other node. When active, snap to node affects the nodes of lines, points, polylines, arcs, regions, and rectangles in all selectable layers. To activate snap to node:
"
Press the S" key.
The S" key is a toggle; to deactivate snap to node, press S" again. When snap to nodes is active SNAP" displays in the StatusBar.
Autotrace
Use autotrace to easily trace multiple nodes of a polyline or polygon when using the Polyline or Polygon tools. Autotrace is available when Snap mode is activated and can be used with the mouse or digitizing puck.
414
MapInfo Reference
Using Autotrace
To use Autotrace: 1. 2. 3. Activate Snap mode by pressing the "S" key. Click on a node of the polyline/polygon you want to autotrace. Move the mouse to another node of the same object. To trace the shortest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Shift key and click. To trace the longest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Ctrl key and click. Pressing the Shift or Control keys highlights the autotrace path. Click to automatically trace the segments between the nodes and add them to the polyline/polygon you are drawing. To autotrace more than one polygon, click on a node common to both polygons. The autotraced border(s) are placed in the editable layer. To see the autotraced object, select it and drag it away from the existing object. You may also find it helpful to autotrace a border and place it in the Cosmetic Layer. To do so, make the Cosmetic Layer editable before you begin the autotrace process. Autotrace the polygon(s) or polyline(s) and save the Cosmetic Objects to a new layer.
See:
Reshape Polygon Button The MIPro User's Guide Chapters 13 and 22.
MapInfo Reference
415
Split Objects Menu
Split Objects Menu

Use Split to:
D
break map object(s) into smaller parts using the currently selected object(s) as the cutter.
Split is available when:

D
a Map window with an editable layer is active and at least one object is set as the target and the object(s) that will act as the cutter is selected.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Split
Splitting an Object
Use split to split closed objects (regions, ellipses, rectangles, or rounded rectangles) or open objects (polylines, lines and arcs). You cannot use Split on points or text objects or to cut objects that are not in editable layers. To use Split: 1. 2. Choose Objects > Split. The Data Disaggregation dialog displays. Choose the appropriate Data Disaggregation function (discussed below) to split the data. Click OK. The target object(s) will now be split into smaller map objects. Choose whether the data associated with the target object is carried over to the new objects or is proportioned among them.
416
MapInfo Reference
Split Objects Menu

Data Disaggregation Dialog
Field Name Method
Show the headings contained in the table. Show the disaggregation method (blank, value, or area proportion) that will be applied to the corresponding field.
Disaggregation Method Data disaggregation splits the data associated with a map object into smaller parts to match the new map objects. For example, you may want to split a state into regions and have the data previously associated with the entire state proportioned for each new region. Blank The value contained in the data field of the target object is deleted in the new object. For example, choose Blank for the state name field if you do not want the new object to be named with the state name. A Browser window of the new objects shows text and numeric fields alike to contain blank values. The value is retained in the new object. For example, the name of the state in the target object will be carried over to the new object(s). Numeric values of the target object are proportioned for each new object, based on the area of the new objects. For example, if you split California into three new regions and choose Area Proportion for its population, each region now contains the population for its region based on its area.
Value
Area Proportion
MapInfo Reference
417
Split Objects Menu

No Data Data will not be carried over into the new objects. This is appropriate if you are only editing Data an object for presentation purposes and do not need the data attached to the new objects. By choosing No Data the field names and data disaggregation choices in the dialog are grayed. A Browser window of the new objects shows zeroes where numeric data was and blank for text fields. Perform the dialog options. After splitting the target object(s), MapInfo deletes the original target from the table. The new objects are appended to the end of the table. For subsequent split operations, the dialog retains the previous disaggregation status for a field. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
OK
Cancel Help
Disaggregating Multiple Rows

To apply the same disaggregation function to consecutive rows of a field:
D
select the first row and Shiftclick to select subsequent row and choose the appropriate function.
To apply the same disaggregation function to nonconsecutive rows:

D
select the first row and Controlclick. select subsequent row and choose the appropriate function.
You must choose or accept a disaggregation method (blank, value or area proportion) for each field.
See:
Combine Command Set Target Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 16
418
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command
SQL Select Command

Use SQL Select to:
D
generate query tables (using one or more base tables to make selections based on certain criteria), join tables, create derived columns or as combinations of these. To query remote database tables, see the Open ODBC Table command.
SQL Select is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Query > SQL Select.
Making Queries Using the SQL Select Command

MapInfo has two commands for selecting objects through querying: Select and SQL Select. Select is simpler and SQL Select is more powerful. Use SQL Select to specify selection criteria that is used to create a table of records. To create this table, data is combined from one or more tables, data is aggregated and records are sorted.
Overview
Before you start querying, it is helpful to understand the concepts involved in the SQL Select process: Derived Information, Joining Tables and Assembly.
Derived Information
Derived information is information that can be calculated from information in a table but that is not directly present in the table. For example, the states table that comes with MapInfo has a column for 1990 population (POP_1990) and another column for the total area (TOTAL_AREA) of the state. That information is explicit. When you divide the 1990 population by the total area, you get the 1990 population density. Population density is derived. You cannot read density values in the table, but you can calculate them from explicit information. Continuing with the example of the states table, we can derive information about population change from information that is explicit in the table, which contains information about 1980 population (POP_1980) and 1990 population (POP_1990). If you are interested in population change between 1990 and 1980, you could subtract 1980 population from 1990 population to compute the absolute difference in population. You could also divide 1990 population by 1980 population, that would give you the ratio between the population values. Either way, the information about population change is derived information.
MapInfo Reference
419
SQL Select Command

SQL Select allows you to to take one or more tables and create a new table containing derived information. This derived information is based on information that is explicit in the source tables.
Joining Tables
Use SQL Select to create relational joins that can bring information from various databases together into a single table. For example, you may have a table of counties that has demographic informationthe population of people in various age ranges, ethnic groups, and occupational categories in each county. You also have a database containing information about customer orders. You want to examine these two tables and see if certain kinds of orders come from counties having certain demographic characteristics. Perhaps you want to select counties according to combinations of orders and demographic characteristics. First, you have join the two tables. One way to join two tables is to use a column that contains matching information. The counties table contains the name of the county. Similarly, one of the columns in the order table contains the name of the county in which the order originated. These two tables have one field in common, the county name. MapInfo uses that common field to match information in the customer table to the objects in the geographic table.
When you use SQL Select, you tell MapInfo to match the information in the County column of the counties table with the County column of the orders table. Given that clue, MapInfo is able to link other information about orders to information about county demographics. You can also specify joins geographically. When the two tables have graphic objects, MapInfo can match records on the basis of the spatial relationship between those objects. For example, you could match cities and counties such that records for cities are joined to those of the counties containing them.

County Table
Pop_1980 23,789 35,456
Order Table
Customer Francis James
County Foster
Pop_1990 27,135 34,846
Order # 478001 478002 478003
County Foster Foster
Williamette Mason
147,101
151,201
Wickwire
Mason
Assembly
The concept of assembly is straight forward: create a new table by assembling explicit or derived information from one or more existing tables. You can use SQL Select to assemble existing information into substantially different databases. You can use MapInfo's SQL Select command to create one table that is a subset of another table or quite different from any of its source tables.
420
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command
Specifying Query Options

To make a query, you need to perform the following:
D D D D D
Specify tables Select columns Formulate the where condition Group by columns to create subtotals Order by Columns
Select Columns
To select columns:
"
Choose Query > SQL Select. The SQL Select dialog displays.
In the first box, the Select columns box, list the columns (i.e., fields) you want to appear in the query table. If you want to use all of the columns, leave the (*) asterisk in the select box or place one there if it is not already there. You cannot select any columns until you specify what tables to use. The Columns menu is empty until you fill in the From tables box.
D
Use the column name or column position (i.e. col2, for second column in table).
You can have two kinds of columns in the list:

D D
Columns that are from one of the base tables you are using. Derived columns columns that are based on expressions.
When you are using more than one table, a column name should be preceded by the name of its table, with the two separated by a period. STATES.ABBR" refers to the ABBR column in the states table, and STATES.POP_1990" refers to the POP_1990 column in the states table. When you choose the columns from the menu, MapInfo automatically attaches the table name to the column name. Derived columns are defined by expressions, such as:
D D D
sum(ORDER_AMOUNT) avg(RECEIVEDSHIPPED) POP_1990/POP_1980
MapInfo evaluates the expression and places the result in the derived column. The name of the column is the expression itself. However, you can specify an alias for any column named in Select Columns. An alias is simply an alternative name for a column. When you specify an alias, the alias appears as the column name in the results table.
MapInfo Reference
421
SQL Select Command

To specify an alias:
D D
Type a blank space after the column name or expression. Type the alias enclosed in double quotes.
For example, you might specify aliases for the derived columns in the example as follows:
D D D
sum(ORDER_AMOUNT) Total_Amount" POP_1990/POP_1980 Population_Change" avg(RECEIVEDSHIPPED) Avg_Processing"
When you place object" (or obj") into a column, MapInfo lists the type of object attached to that row (line, polyline, polygon, etc.). Finally, you cannot have an asterisk followed by column names. You might be tempted to do this when you are working from several tables. You might, for example, want all the columns from one table, and only one or two columns from another table (or tables). In that case you must list all of the columns. There is no way you can use the asterisk to designate all columns from only one of the tables.
Formulating the Where Condition

The Where condition specifies what records (rows) from the table, or tables, are to be included in the query table. This is comparable to the That Satisfy line in a query using the Select command. The condition is formulated in the standard way, using variables (columns) and relations between variables (operators). You can use any column in the table (or tables), whether or not it is listed in the Select Columns box. Columns can be referred to by name You must have a Where condition when you're selecting from more than one table. In this situation, the condition tells MapInfo how to join the two tables. The Where condition can be as simple as asserting that the values in one field of one table equal the values of one field in the other table: TABLE_A.SERIAL_NUM = TABLE_B.PART_NUM. Notice that, because we're dealing with a multitable query, the column name is preceded by the table name.
Order of Fields
The order of fields used in the Join does not matter. Either of the following syntax is acceptable:
Select * from A,B where A.field1 = B.field1 Select * from A,B where B.field1 = A.field1 However, keep in mind that when you switch the order of geographic operands, the geographic operator must also change. The following statements will produce identical results:
422
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command

Select * from states, cities where states.obj contains cities.obj Select * from states, cities where cities.obj within states.obj
Order of Clauses
The order in which Join clauses are performed does not matter. For example, each of the following are valid clauses: Select * from Us_custg,States,City_125 where Us_custg.state = States.state and States.state = City_125.state and Us_custg.order_amt > 10000 Select * from Us_custg,States,City_125 where States.state = City_125.state and States.state = City_125.state and Us_custg.order_amt > 10000 Select * from Us_custg,States,City_125 where Us_custg.state = States.state and Us_custg.order_amt > 10000 and States.state = City_125.state
Error Handling
If an invalid Where condition that uses an OR as a logical operator is detected, MapInfo will indicate an error has occurred. Usually this error will display whenever MapInfo cannot find a join between two tables. For example, if you have specified the following incorrect condition: Select * from A,B where A.field1 = B.field1 or A.field1 = B.field2
The error No join specified between A and B. Invalid join condition in Where clause displays. You cannot use aggregate functions in a Where condition.
Using Group By Columns to Create Sub-totals

Use Group by columns to create subtotals for a table. Group by columns groups rows in the query table so that all rows with the same values for the specified columns are grouped together. When used in conjunction with aggregate functions (count, sum, avg, min, max), rows with the same value on all grouping columns are treated as a group, duplicate rows are suppressed, and aggregate values are reported for derived columns based on aggregate functions. All columns in the Select box that are not based on aggregate functions can be listed in Group by columns. MapInfo examines these columns to determine the groupings. Each set of unique data values on these columns has a single row in the query table. Derived columns should be designated by numbers indicating relative position, 1," 2," 5," for first, second, and fifth column, respectively.
MapInfo Reference
423
SQL Select Command

For example, you might want to figure out the total amount of sales and number of customers per state. Since the customers are listed individually in the table, per state" determines the grouping level. All customers in New York should be grouped together in one group, counted, and the sales amounts totaled.
When using Group by columns keep in mind that the table resulting from a Group is not mappable.
D D D D D

Select columns from tables State, Count(*), Sum(Sales) My_cust State group by columns If you aren't using a join, you can use regular field names.
Refer to columns by their name or by a number. The resulting table from Group by is not mappable. If you are grouping by the value of a derived column or if you are joining tables, you must use a numerical designator. When referring to columns by number, do not prefix the number by col." Use the numbers alone. You can list more than one column. MapInfo first groups records by the first column you list. Within those groupings, it groups records by the second column, and so forth. For each resulting row, the query table contains aggregate values for all columns based on aggregate functions. Columns in the Select Columns box that are based on aggregate functions cannot be listed in Group by column. However, all other columns should be listed in Group by columns.
Using Order By Columns

Use an Order by columns clause to specify the order in which MapInfo lists or sorts the records in the query table. By default, MapInfo orders records by their ascending value (alphabetical order for character fields). When you list more than one column, MapInfo first orders the records by the first column. Records with identical values in the first named column are ordered by their values in the second column. Records with identical values in the second column are ordered by their values in the third column. There is no limit to the number of columns you can use. However, the sum of the length of the columns must be less than 255 bytes. In Order by columns, you should refer to columns by their name or by a number. When you aren't using a join, you can use regular field names. When you are ordering by the value of a derived column or if you are joining tables, you must use a numerical designator. When referring to columns by number, do not prefix the number by col." Use the numbers alone. You can also order the result by a field that isn't in Select columns. When you want to have columns ordered in descending order, place the keyword desc" after the column designator:
424
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command

order by columns: order by columns: order by columns: STATE desc POP_1990 desc 3 desc
The first statement orders the records by state name, starting with Wyoming and ending with Alabama. The second statement orders records by 1990 population, listing the record with the highest population value first. The third statement orders the records in descending order by the values in the third column. Notice that desc" is separated from the column name (or number) by a single blank space. You can also use the asc" keyword to have a column sorted in ascending order. You use asc" the same as you would desc". By using desc" and asc" you can sort by one column in ascending order, by another in descending order, then back to ascending order, and so forth. SQL Query Dialog
Select Columns
List the columns (i.e., fields) you want to appear in the query table. Click the Columns dropdown list to display a list of available columns. The columns are inserted into the box at the cursor. If you want to use all of the columns, leave the asterisk in the select box, or place one there if it is not already there. Choose from a list of tables available for making the query. Click the Tables dropdown list to display a list of available tables. You cannot use query tables in multitable SQL Selects When you are doing a multitable join, the tables must be base tables. Specifies what records (rows) from the base table, or tables, are included in the query table. See the preceding: Formulating the Where Condition.
from Tables
where Condition
MapInfo Reference
425
SQL Select Command

Group by Columns Create subtotals for a table. Group by columns groups rows in the query table so that all rows with the same values for the specified columns are grouped together. Specify the order in which MapInfo lists or sorts the records in the query table. By default, MapInfo orders records by their ascending value (alphabetical order for character fields). Name the query table. When you don't type in a name, MapInfo puts the results in the temporary table selection, and windows based on that selection are designated Query1", Query2", etc. When you want a more descriptive name, enter it here.
Order by Columns
into Table Named
The table is still only temporary. To make it a permanent base table, use the Save Copy As command in the File menu. Also, if you want to work with the new base table, open it using File > Open. See: Expression dialog for a list of available operators and Functions for a list of functions.
Aggregate Functions
Use aggregate functions when you want to summarize data. You place an aggregate function in the Select columns box in the SQL Query dialog. Imagine that you have a table of customer orders. Each row in the table represents a single order. One column in the table contains the name of the sales representative who booked the order, another contains the name of the customer, and yet another contains the order amount. You want to find out:
D D D
How many orders were booked by each sales representative The average amount of the orders The total value of the orders
The following SQL Select provides that information: Select columns from tables
Notice the three aggregate functions in Select columns and the Group by columns. What MapInfo does is:
D D D D

Sales_Rep, count(*), avg(AMOUNT), sum(AMOUNT) Orders Sales_Rep group by columns Find all the rows for a particular sales representative. Count the number of rows: count(*). Calculate the average value of orders for the sales representative: average(AMOUNT). Calculate the total value of the orders for the sales representative: sum(AMOUNT)
426
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command

MapInfo does this for each representative and produces a results table that has a single row for each sales representative. The aggregate functions aggregated the data values for all of the rows having the same value for Sales_Rep. Consider this SQL Select: Select columns from tables
This query is essentially the same query as the previous one, except that we are grouping by Customer rather than by Sales_Rep. This SQL Select finds the count, average, and sum of orders for each customer rather than for each sales representative. The following example illustrates using multiple group by columns: Select columns from tables

Customer, count(*), avg(AMOUNT), sum(AMOUNT) Orders Customer group by columns Sales_Rep, Customer, count(*), avg(AMOUNT), sum(AMOUNT) Orders Sales_Rep, Customer
We have specified two columns in Group by columns. In this case, MapInfo groups rows first by sales representative and then by customer. The result table for this query has one row for each different customer/sales representative combination. When a particular customer has ordered through two or more sales representatives, there is a row summarizing that customer's business with each sales representative. The rows are grouped first by sales representative and then, for each representative, by customer.

group by columns
Joining Two Tables

When you are joining tables where there is a onetoone correspondence between the rows in the tables, the result table has the same number of rows as the tables being joined. When there is a manytoone correspondence between the tables, several results are possible depending on the order of the tables in the SQL Select. When you are joining tables together, the result table, will use the object from the join table, that is listed first in the from table box.
Geographic Operators
Geographic operators allow you to select objects on the basis of their spatial relationship to some other object. MapInfo has a special keyword you use with geographical operators: obj" or object". This
MapInfo Reference
427
SQL Select Command

keyword tells MapInfo that it has to get values based on the graphical objects in the table rather than the tabular data. The geographic operators go between the objects being specified. Select the geographic operators from the Operators menu. The following are geographic operators: Contains
The difference between Contains and Within and Contains Entire and Entirely Within, hinges on how the geographic comparison is made. For Contains and Within, the comparison is based on object centroids. For Contains Entirely and Entirely Within, the comparisons are based on the whole object. The following graphic illustrates this point:

Object A Contains object B if B's centroid is anywhere within A's boundary. Object A Contains Entire object B if B's boundary is entirely within A's boundary. Object A is Within object B if its centroid is inside B's boundary. Contains Entire Within Entirely Within Intersects Object A is Entirely Within object B if A's boundary is entirely within B's boundary. Object A Intersects object B if they have at least one point in common or if one of them is entirely within the other.
In each case, object A contains object B because the centroid of object B is inside the boundary of object

objectA contains objectB objectB within objectA objectA Intersects objectB objectB Intersects objectA objectA contains entire objB objectB entirely within objA
A. However, in the cases at the left and in the middle, part of object B is outside the boundary of object A. Only in the case to the right is all of object B inside object A. Only in this case could we assert object A Contains Entire object B" or object B Entirely Within object A." Further, if A contains entire B, then A contains B, and If A is entirely within B then A is within B. However, MapInfo can perform a simple Contains or Within comparison more rapidly than a Contains Entire or Entirely Within. Therefore, unless you must be absolutely sure that objects are completely
428
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command

inside other objects, you should use Contains and Within rather than Contains Entire or Entirely Within. Geographic operators are useful in working with multiple tables. When there are no columns in the tables on which you can base the join, you can use a geographical operator to specify the join (in the Where condition). When you are working with a table of cities and a table of states, you could use either of the following: city.obj within state.obj state.obj contains city.obj In either case, MapInfo finds the cities within each state and then associates a row for a city with the row for the state that contains it. You could use aggregate functions to count the number of cities per state or to summarize citybased data on a statewide basis. When you have a table of counties and one of customers, where counties are polygons and customers are points, you could specify a geographic join with: customer.obj within county.obj county.obj contains customer.obj Geographic operators are particularly useful in conjunction with subselects.
Subselects
MapInfo allows subselects in an SQL Select. A subselect is a select statement that is placed in the Where condition of the SQL Select dialog. MapInfo first evaluates the subselect and then uses those values to evaluate the main SQL Select. For example, imagine you want to select all states whose population is greater than the average for 1990. In effect , you want to use the following statement in the Where condition: Pop_1990>Average However, you do not know what that average is. But you know that MapInfo can calculate that average using the following aggregate expression: avg(Pop_1990) What you can do is use that aggregate function in a subselect to calculate the average population per state. You would fill in the SQL Select dialog as follows: Select columns from tables *

states where condition Pop_1990>(select avg(Pop_1990) from states)
MapInfo Reference
429
SQL Select Command

The subselect is in the Where condition following the greaterthan (>) operator. Note that you have to type words such as select" and from" the subselect into the Where condition. You will not find them on a menu. Finally, the subselect must be enclosed in parentheses. The most useful subselects contain a select clause, a from clause, and a where clause, as follows: select one column from some tables where some condition As noted above, you must type select", from" and where" into the subselect. Consider the following SQL Select, which selects all cities in states with more than 4,000,000 people: Select columns from tables *
The subselect gets the graphic object for all states with a 1990 population greater than 4,000,000. The that the main Select statement uses a geographical operator (within) to do this. Notice also that, while we are working with both the States table and the Cities table, we have only
main Select statement then gets all the cities that are in any of the states chosen in the subselect. Notice

cities where condition obj within any (select obj from states where POP_1990 > 4000000)
specified the Cities table in From tables. That is because we are not joining the two tables. We are only using States in the subselect. In the next example, we select all states that intersect Tennessee, that is, all states touching it. Select columns: from tables *
The main Where condition has the form: obj intersects obj. The second object is, in turn, specified by the subselect: select obj from states where obj="TN". MapInfo uses the subselect to find the graphic

states where condition obj intersects (select obj from States where ABBR = TN")
object for Tennessee and then uses the main Where condition to find those objects that intersect with it. You could use a similar query to select all street segments that cross some given street. Now consider this example: Select columns from tables
This query finds all counties containing a dealer. The main Where condition has the form: obj contains obj. The second object is chosen by the subselect: select obj from Dealers. MapInfo selects the row for any county object that contains a dealer object.

* county where condition county.obj contains any (select obj from dealers)
430
MapInfo Reference
SQL Select Command
Notes on subselects:
D D D
You can use tables in the subselect that aren't listed in From tables for your main Select. You must, of course, list these tables in the From clause of your subselect. All subselects must return one column. The following example is not valid: any(select abbr, pop_1990 from states) When the subselect is not used with any", all", or in", one and only one value can be returned. The following example is not valid: obj within (select obj from states where POP_1990 >4000000) You cannot have nested subselects. You can have only one subselect per SQL Select statement.
See:
The MIPro User's Guide, Appendix D The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 9
MapInfo Reference
431
Standard Toolbar
Standard Toolbar
Use the Standard Toolbar to:
D
choose tools providing standard Windows options including cut, paste, and copy, as well as options unique to MapInfo; creating a new mapper, browser, graph, layout, redistricter.
Standard Toolbar is available when:

D
a Map, Layout or Browser window is active and the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the Standard Toolbar.
Using the Standard Toolbar

For an onscreen button description, click and hold the mouse button to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars. To choose an action from the Standard Toolbar:
"
The Standard Toolbar contains these tools:
New Table Open Table Save Table Print Cut Copy Paste
Undo New Browser New Map Window New Graph Window New Layout Window New Redistricting Window Help
For more information, see the appropriate button entry.
432
MapInfo Reference
Standard Toolbar
Autoscrolling
When you use a tool in the Map or Layout window, the window scrolls if you drag the tool outside of the window boundaries. The window will continue to scroll until you release the mouse or move the cursor back into the window. Press Esc to stop scrolling; the tool remains active. To cancel the tool, press Esc after the scrolling has stopped. Autoscrolling works with any tool that can be dragged; it does not work with singleclick tools, such as the Grabber or Info tools.
See:
Toolbars Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 4
MapInfo Reference
433
Startup.wor
Startup.wor
Use Startup.wor to:
D
start MapInfo using a particular workspace that opens various tables and windows.
Using Startup.wor
Name a workspace startup.wor when you want to start MapInfo with particular windows and tables already loaded. MapInfo will performs the startup actions as specified by startup.wor regardless of what you did in your previous MapInfo session or how you have set preferences. To create a startup workspace: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start MapInfo. Open the tables and windows and size and position them as they should display whenever you start MapInfo. Choose File > Save Workspace. The Save Workspace dialog displays. Type startup in the File name box. At the Save in:box, specify the MapInfo program directory or the home directory (directory where windows configuration files such as win.ini are stored).
Running MapBasic Applications

You also can use a startup workspace to run a MapBasic application. When you want to run a MapBasic application in your startup workspace, create the workspace by creating the following ASCII file with a text editor: 1. Type the following into an ASCII file: !workspace !version 400 run application someprog.mbx where someprog.mbx is the name of the MapBasic application you want to run whenever MapInfo starts. 2. 3. Name this file startup.wor. Place this file in the MapInfo program directory or in your home directory (directory where windows configuration files such as win.ini are stored).
434
MapInfo Reference
Startup.wor
Starting MapInfo
When you start MapInfo: 1. 2. If startup.wor is found in the MapInfo program directory, MapInfo will start by displaying the specified workspace. Again, if there is a startup.wor in your home directory, MapInfo will start by displaying the specified workspace. (If there is a startup.wor in both the MapInfo program directory and the home directory, both will be run.) If any file names are given on the command line (from the Windows File Manager or Program Manager, those file(s) will be loaded. MapInfo supports adding workspaces (.wor), running applications (.app), and opening databases (.tab) from the command line. If MapInfo did not add a workspace or run a program from the command line it then checks the Startup Preferences setting. If Load mapinfow.wor when starting MapInfo is checked, the workspace mapinfow.wor (in the user's home directory) is run. Finally, if MapInfo didn't load a workspace or run an application from the command line, and it didn't load mapinfow.wor, the Quick Start dialog displays.
3.
4.
5.
MapInfo Reference
435
StatusBar
StatusBar
Use the StatusBar to:
D
display information about the active window.
The StatusBar is available when:

D
the StatusBar is set to display by using Options > Show/Hide StatusBar.
Using the StatusBar

The StatusBar displays at the bottom of the main MapInfo window, and provides information that helps you use MapInfo. The following displays in the StatusBar: Map Window: Cursor coordinates Map Scale Zoom Level You can customize the StatusBar display when a map is the active window; select Map > Options to display dialog. Browser Window: Number of records currently displayed and Total number of records in the table Layout Window: Zoom displays as a percentage of what is on screen Redistricter Window: Target District Help messages: when a menu item or button is highlighted, its description displays in the Status Bar.
See:
Hide StatusBar Command Show StatusBar Command
436
MapInfo Reference
Status Bar Popups
Status Bar Popups

Use Status Bar Popups to:
D
display and change the current editable layer or change the StatusBar display to indicate Zoom level; map scale; cursor location.
Status Bar Popups are available when:

"
always available for the active Map window.
Using Status Bar Popups

Editable Layer Popup: The current editable layer displays in the StatusBar. To change the editable layer from the StatusBar:
"
click on the layer name; a list of layers displays. Choose the layer you wish to make editable. Choose None to deactivate editability for all layers.
Zoom Popup: Click the Zoom area of the StatusBar to display a popup allowing you to choose from the following map options: zoom level; map scale; cursor location.
See:
StatusBar Command
MapInfo Reference
437
Symbol Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Symbol button to:
D
access the Symbol tool. Use the Symbol tool to place symbols on a map.
The Symbol button is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Symbol button
Adding Symbols to a Map

To add symbols to a map: 1. 2. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Symbol button. The cursor changes to a cross when it is over the Map window. Click on the map where you want to place the point symbol. The symbol displays at that location.
Changing the Location of Symbols

To change the location of symbols: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Click on the object and drag it to the new location.
438
MapInfo Reference
Specifying Symbol Attributes

If the object is editable you can change the attributes. If it is not editable, you can only view the attributes. To specify symbol attributes: 1. Choose a symbol and choose Edit > Get Info. or Doubleclick the symbol. The Point Object dialog displays. Point Object Dialog Location X Location Y Style OK Cancel Help Location of the point on the X axis. Location of the point on the Y axis. Display the Symbol Style dialog to change symbol attributes. See Symbol Style Button. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
See:
Symbol Style Button
MapInfo Reference
439
Symbol Style Button Drawing Toolbar
Symbol Style Button Drawing Toolbar Symbol Style Command Options Menu
Use Symbol Style to:
D
specify symbol attributes (symbol font type, size, color, rotation angle, and special effects) for new or selected symbols.
Symbol Style is available when:

D
Symbol Style is always available.
Menu Path
"
Options > Symbol Style or
"
Drawing Toolbar > Symbol Style button
Using Symbol Style

Use Symbol Style to set the symbol font type, character size, color, rotation angle and special effects of symbols for point objects you create, or change the attributes of existing symbols. MapInfo Professional supports the following fonts:
D D D D D
MapInfo Cartographic MapInfo Transportation MapInfo Real Estate MapInfo Miscellaneous MapInfo 3.0 Compatible Symbols (vector symbols, available as a True Type font in MapInfo Professional ): the 36 shapes from the MapInfo symbol set offered in versions prior to MapInfo Professional. MapInfo Oil & Gas MapInfo Weather MapInfo Arrows installed font symbols: symbols available from the installed fonts that offer a symbol set custom symbols: usercreated bitmap symbols saved to the CUSTSYMB directory created during MapInfo Professional installation.
D D D D D
To change symbol attributes, the symbols must reside in an editable layer or in a layout window. Symbol Style applies only to symbols. To change the attributes of other types of objects, see Region Style Button, Line Style Button and Text Style Button.
440
MapInfo Reference
Setting Symbol Style for New Symbols

To set symbol type, size and color for new symbols: 1. 2. Make the layer where the symbols are to be created editable. This is not necessary in a layout window. Choose Options > Symbol Style or Drawing Toolbar > Symbol Style button. The Symbol Style dialog displays. Symbol Style Dialog
Font
Choose a font from the dropdown list. In addition to the symbol sets provided by MapInfo, the list displays any fonts installed on Windows. The Custom Symbols category lists those bitmaps you have created and saved to the CUSTSYMB directory. Choose a size or type a different point size. The maximum size is 48 points. Choose a symbol type from the symbol palette. Custom Effects: Show Background: display the custom bitmap symbol with the background with which it was created; this background is white. Apply Color: Replace all nonwhite bitmap pixels with the color designated from the Color palette. Reload: reloads Custom symbols from disk.
Size Symbol
MapInfo Reference
441

True Type Fonts Background: None: no background displays. Halo: Outline symbol with a white border. Border: Outline symbol with a black border. Effects: Bold: Draw the symbol in boldface. Drop Shadow: Draw a drop shadow under the symbol. Color: Display the color palette and choose a color for the symbol. Rotation Angle: Specify number of degrees symbol should be rotated; 0-360. Sample OK Cancel Help Display a sample of the symbol using the designated selections. Apply the selections. Sets style for new symbols and changes the style of any selected symbols. Cancel the settings made during the dialog session. Display appropriate Help topic.
Creating a Custom Symbol

Create your own custom symbol and save it as a bitmap in the CUSTSYMB directory in the program directory. This directory is created during the installation process. Note the following limitations:
D D D
if using the 16 bit version of MapInfo, the bitmap should be under 64K in size. if using MapInfo Professional, the bitmap should be under 128K in size. Save as a 256 color bitmap.
When creating custom symbols, smaller bitmaps (32 x 32 pixels) print better with smaller font sizes; larger bitmaps (64 x 64 pixels) print better with larger font sizes.
442
MapInfo Reference
Changing Symbol Style

To change the type, size, and color of existing symbols: 1. 2. 3. Make the layer where the symbols are to be created editable. This is not necessary in a layout window. Select one or more symbol objects. Choose Options > Symbol Style or Drawing Toolbar > Symbol Style button. The Symbol Style dialog displays. 4. 5. Choose a symbol, and its attributes. See the preceding: Symbol Style Dialog description. Choose OK. The symbol's attributes change according to the dialog selections.
See:
MapInfo Reference
443
Table Structure Command Table > Maintenance

Use Table Structure to:
D
change the structure of a table. Add, remove, rename or reorder fields, add and remove indexes, make a table mappable or ungeocode a table.
Table Structure is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Table > Maintenance > Table Structure
Modifying a Table
All tables must have at least one field. You cannot modify the structure of a readonly table, you can view it. If the table is readonly, the View Structure dialog displays. To modify a table's structure:
"
Choose Table > Maintenance > Table Structure.
If more than one table is open, the View/Modify dialog displays. Select the table you want to view. The Modify Table Structure dialog displays. Modify Table Structure Dialog
444
MapInfo Reference

Fields Type Contains the names of the fields (columns) in the table from top to bottom. Indicates the type of field with the number of characters in the field listed in parentheses (where applicable ). See the following: Field Information: Type. An X in this column indicates the field is indexed. When the column is blank, the field is not indexed. Move the selected field up or down one position in the list box. The file structure is reorganized accordingly. When a table displays in a Browser window, the first field becomes the leftmost column, the second field becomes the second column from the left, and the last field becomes the rightmost column. Moving a field up or down has the effect of moving it left or right in a Browser window. Add a new field at the bottom of the list. This field has a default name of Field1, Field2, Field3, etc., depending on the order in which the field was created. Remove the selected field from the table. Check to modify the table so you can map it and create graphical objects. If you have a table that is geocoded and want to ungeocode it, clear the box. When you click the OK button, the table is ungeocoded. Displays the map's Projection. To change the projections, use the Save As command. See Projection Button and Save As. Display appropriate Help topic.
Indexed Up/Down
Add Field
Remove Field Table is Mappable
Projection Help
MapInfo Reference
445

Field Information Name Displays the field name in the Name box. You can also enter new field names. Defaults are Field1, Field2, etc. A field name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters long. Use letters, numbers, and the underscore. Do not use spaces; instead, use the underscore character (_) to separate words in a field name. Use upper and lower case; MapInfo is not casesensitive. Displays the field type. The following types are available: Character: Stores up to 254 alphanumeric characters. You cannot perform arithmetic operations on numerals in a character field. You should store ZIP Code information in character fields, otherwise leading zeros are dropped. Decimal: Stores numbers in fixedpoint decimal form. Do not put commas in decimal Integer: Stores integers (numbers without a decimal). The range is from 2 billion to +2 billion Small Integer: Integers between 32,768 and +32,768. Float: Stores numbers in floatingpoint decimal form. Date: Contains a date in the format specified by the Window's Control Panel Regional Settings, Short Date Format. Exceptions: the month and day will always display a leading zero and the year will always display the century. During data entry, it is not necessary to enter the century. Additionally, if the date format is month, day, year, it is not necessary to enter the year. Logical: Can contain only true/false or yes/no information, stored as T for true/yes and F for false/no. Decimal, integer, small integer, and float can only contain numeric symbols. These fields do not accept any characters besides numbers, the minus sign, or decimal points for decimal and floatingpoint numbers. Create an index on the selected field. To use Query > Find, the table must be mappable and have at least on indexed field. You can index as many fields as you want (click index box). Indexing does not change the order of records. Also, indexes speed up queries containing numerical and alphabetic comparisons and joins. Type the number of characters in the field (character and decimal fields only). Maximum field width is 250 for character fields and 19 for decimal fields. Enter decimals in fixed point decimal form. Modify the existing structure using the specifications designated in the dialog box. Cancel the dialog options; close the dialog without modifying the table. Display appropriate Help topic.
Type
Indexed
Width
Decimals OK Cancel Help
446
MapInfo Reference
Viewing the Structure of a Read-Only Table

To view the table structure: 1. Choose Table > Maintenance > Table Structure. If more than one table is open, the View/Modify dialog displays. Select the table you want to view. The View Table Structure dialog displays. 2. See preceding Modify Table Structure dialog description. You cannot modify a readonly table.
See:
New Table Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 18
MapInfo Reference
447
Text Button Drawing Toolbar

Use the Text button to:
D
access the Text Tool. Use the Text tool to annotate maps, tables and layouts.
The Text button is available when:

D
a Map, Browser or Layout window is active with an editable layer.
Menu Path
"
Drawing Toolbar > Text Tool button
Entering Text
Use the Text tool to create single and multiline text objects. To enter text: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Text Tool button. The cursor becomes an Ibeam when inside an active Map, Browser or Layout window. Click the cursor at the place on the map or layout where you want the text to be drawn. A flashing cursor displays. Type the text. The text displays at the flashing cursor as you type. To move to a new line of text, press <ENTER>. A text object is limited to 255 characters. Press <ESCAPE> or click the mouse on the map or layout when you are finished typing.
The settings used are designated in the Text Object and Text Style dialogs. To change the attributes of new or existing text, see Text Style Button.
Displaying Text in a Map Window

In a Map window, text size is specified relative to the screen. When you zoom in and out on a map window, the size of the text on the screen will change as well as its specified point size. If you zoom in, text will appear larger, as will all visible elements of the map, and the point size of the text, as indicated in its attributes box, will be appropriate to the text displayed on screen.
Displaying Text in a Layout Window

In a Layout window, the point size of the text is specified relative to the actual size of the page, that is, the size in which it will print (as it is in word processing and desktop publishing programs). When you zoom in and out on a layout, the text will be larger or smaller on the screen, but its specified point size, as indicated in its attributes box, remains the same.
Using the Text Object Dialog

Access the Text Object dialog to designate text spacing, justification, label lines, and to access the Text Style dialog,where you can change font, color, background and effects of text.
448
MapInfo Reference

Text Object Dialog
Text Style Start X Y
Displays text. Add or edit text here. Display the Text Style dialog to specify text attributes. See Text Style Button. Designate the XY coordinates of the upper left corner of the text object. Change coordinates to reposition text.
Line Spacing (applies to multiline text only) Single 1.5 Double Display no blank lines between text. Display half a blank line between text lines. Display a full blank line between each line of text.
Justification (applies to multiline text only) Left Center Right Left justifies text; justification is based on the point at which you clicked to place the label. Default setting. Center multiline text. The center is based on the length of the longest line. Rightjustifies text; justification is based on the point at which you clicked to place the label.
MapInfo Reference
449

Label Line No line Simple line No line displays extending to the label. Create a callout by using a simple line that connects the label to the object's centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created. Create a callout by using an arrow and line that connects the label to the object's centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created. Set the style for simple or arrow lines. See the Line Style Button. Enter degrees to rotate label. Angles are measured starting at horizontal proceeding counterclockwise. Apply the selections. Sets style for new text and labels and changes the style of any selected text or labels. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Arrow line
Line Style Rotation Angle OK Cancel Help
Rotating Text
The Text tool allows you to rotate text objects by using the Select tool to grab an editing handle and rotate the text. To rotate text by dragging: 1. 2. Select the text with the Select tool. The text region is highlighted and bound by four edit handles at the corners and a fifth handle below the lower right corner. Grab the fifth handle and rotate the highlighted box to the appropriate angle.
To specify a rotation angle:

"
Doubleclick on the text object. The Text Object dialog displays.
Editing Text
To edit text created with the Text tool: 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Doubleclick on the text. The Text Object dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description. Click OK.
To change the text style of multiple text objects: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Shiftclick on the each text object you want to change. Choose Options > Text Style or press F8. The Text Object dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description. Click OK.
450
MapInfo Reference
Creating Callouts
To create callouts (labels with pointers to the objects they designate): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Text button. Position the Text tool where you want the arrow or line to point and type the text you want as the callout. Doubleclick on the text with the Select tool. The Text Object dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description. Choose Simple Line or Arrow line for the line that connects the label with the object. Click OK. Select the text object move it to its new position. A line is drawn from the new text position to its original position.
Editing Text in a Browser Window

Use the Text tool to enter and edit text in Browser windows one field at a time. To use the Text tool in a Browser window: 1. 2. 3. Open a table in a Browser window (cannot be a readonly table). Click on the field you want to edit. The field displays outlined with a black border and the text highlighted. Edit the text in the box. Press <TAB> to move from field to field. 4. Choose OK. Save changes to the table by using File > Save.
MapInfo Reference
451
Text Style Button Drawing Toolbar
Text Style Button Drawing Toolbar Text Style Command Options Menu
Use the Text Style button and command to:
D
access the Text style dialog where you can set font, color and attributes for text you enter using the Text Tool. a map, with an editable layer, is active.
Text Style is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Options > Text Style.
Setting Text Style for Text Entered Using the Text Tool
When you use the Text Tool to enter text, the font, color and attributes for the text are determined by the settings designated in the Text Style dialog. To change the settings, access the Text Style dialog. Text settings including label line, justification and line setting are designated in the Text Object dialog. See Text Tool. To access the Text Style dialog: 1. 2. Make the layer containing the text editable. Choose Options > Text Style or Drawing Toolbar > Text Style button. or Double-click on the text object; the Text Object dialog displays. Select the Style button. The Text Style dialog displays. Text Style Dialog
452
MapInfo Reference
Text Style Button Drawing Toolbar

Font Text Color Background None Halo Box Effects Color Bold Italic Underline All Caps Shadow Expanded Sample OK Cancel Help Display the color palette; select a color to halo or box the text. Check to display text in boldface. Check to display text in italic. Check to display text underlined. Check to display text in all upper case letters. Check to display a grey drop" shadow under the text. Check to insert double spaces between each letter in the text. Displays sample text using the selected options. Accept dialog options. Cancel dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic. Do not halo or box the text. Display the text outlined in a designated color. Surround the text with a box in a designated color. Choose a font from the font dropdown list. Choose a point size from the point size dropdown list. Display the color palette; choose a text color.
See:
MapInfo Reference
453
Tile Windows Command Windows Menu
Tile Windows Command Windows Menu

Use Tile Windows to:
D
organize the windows on the screen and/or expose windows that have become hidden under other windows. Windows are placed next to each other.
Tile Windows is available when:

D
at least one of the following is open: Browser, Map, Graph, Layout or MapBasic window.
Menu Path
"
Windows > Tile Windows
Tiling Windows
The Window resizes and arranges all the windows next to one another so that each window is visible on the screen. The windows that are currently open are numbered and listed at the bottom of the Window menu.
See:
Cascade Windows Command
454
MapInfo Reference
Toolbars Command Options Menu

Use Toolbars to:
D D
display or hide the Main, Drawing, Tools or Standard, or Custom Toolbars. Additionally, display or hide the ODBC Toolbar, if ODBC functionality is enabled. specify if the Toolbars are docked under the menu bar, or are allowed to be moved (float) on the screen.
Toolbars is available when:

D
Toolbars is always available.
Menu Path
"
Options > Toolbars
Toolbars Options
To display or hide any of the Toolbars or to specify their location:
"
Choose Options > Toolbars. The Toolbars Options dialog displays.
Toolbars Dialog
MapInfo Reference
455

Toolbar Lists the Toolbars: Tools, Drawing, Main, Standard and any Custom Toolbars. Highlight the Toolbar whose status you want to modify. If it is currently displaying on screen, the Show option is checked. If the Toolbar is not currently displaying, the Show option is clear. If the Toolbar is currently displaying on screen, the Show option is checked. If the Toolbar is not currently displaying, the Show option is clear. Check to display the selected Toolbar. Clear to hide the selected Toolbar. Check to designate the selected Toolbar as floating. A floating Toolbar can be moved on the screen. If this option is not checked, the Toolbar will display (dock) under the menu bar. To reshape a Toolbar, click and drag on its borders. To move a Toolbar, drag the Toolbar title area, and release. Color Buttons Large Buttons Show ToolTips Check to display buttons in color. Check to display large buttons. Check to display Tooltips. ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar, display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. Display the specified Toolbar configuration when you run MapInfo. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Show
Floating
Save as Default OK Cancel Help
456
MapInfo Reference
Docking a Toolbar
If you have not checked Floating, Toolbars display docked under the menu bar. Change these toolbars to floating by clicking on the background of the Toolbar, and dragging it onto the screen. The Toolbar assumes a rectangular shape and becomes a floating Toolbar. You can change the location of a docked toolbar by clicking on the background of the Toolbar, and dragging it to a new position below the menu bar. Only entire Toolbars can be moved; you cannot remove individual buttons from the Toolbars for placement. The maximum number of ToolBar rows is six.
See:
Drawing Toolbar Main Toolbar Tools Toolbar The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 4
MapInfo Reference
457
Tool Manager
Tool Manager
Use Tool Manager to:
"
access the Tool Manager dialog. Run a tool from the dialog, and/or add, edit, remove a tool from the list of currently registered tools in the Tools menu. Additionally, configure a tool to run automatically when MapInfo starts.
Tool Manager is available when:

"
always available unless disabled during Custom Installation.
Menu Path
"
Tools > Tool Manager
The Tool Manager Dialog

If you installed MapInfo Professional 5.0 using the Standard Installation process, many tools are installed and registered with the Tool Manager. By performing a Custom Installation and unchecking the appropriate combination of options, it is possible to install no tools. In this case, the listbox in the Tool Manager dialog will be empty. Register tools manually using the Add Tool option in the Tool Manager dialog. Use the Edit Tool option to modify information about an existing tool. Use the Remove Tool option to unregister a tool; unregistering a tool will not delete any files associated with the tool. Some of the installed tools may be configured to AutoLoad when MapInfo starts. AutoLoad status is indicated in the Tool Manager dialog listbox; the tool will have a corresponding menu item in the Tools menu. Each tool that is currently running will have the Loaded box checked.
Tools:
ArcLink AG*Link AutoLabeler Concentric Ring Buffer Translates MapInfo files to and from ArcLink export file format. Translates Atlas format geographic, attributes, and data point files to MapInfo for Windows files. Places text object style labels in the Cosmetic Layer of the active mapper. Creates concentric ring buffers around one or more map objects. The tool also computes aggregated values for underlying data that occur within each ring. Therefore, it can be used to count how many customers occur within each ring and their total sales. You can graph the results. Draw a line in the Cosmetic Layer of a specific length and angle. Converts a column of data containing DMS coordinates to Degree Decimals and Decimal Degrees to degrees/minutes/seconds. Disperses points located at the same position. Points can be dispersed systematically or randomly.
Create Line by Length Degree Converter Disperse Points
458
MapInfo Reference
Tool Manager
Tools:
GeoSet Open and read a MapX Geoset into a MapInfo Professional map window: Open specified tables; order them as layers in a new map window; pan and zoom map window; apply display, zoom, and label settings to each layer. Write and save a MapInfo Professional map window into a MapX Geoset: Write map window settings: pan and zoom. Write table names for each layer. Write individual layer settings: display, zoom, and label settings. There is not a onetoone match between MI Professional map window and MapX Geoset capabilities. Certain MapInfo Professional table types are not supported in MapX: XLS (Excel spreadsheets); WKS (Lotus 123 spreadsheets). Certain raster file formats are not supported: BMP; WMF; MIG. Seamless Map Sheets are not supported. Other MapInfo Professional map window contents are not supported in MapX Geosets: Cosmetic layer contents; Thematic maps; Custom labels. Drill-down tables are not supported in MI Professional. Draws a graticule: a grid of latitude/longitude lines. Transfer Layer's labels into permanent text objects; label current selection; use label tool and individual label objects into permanent text objects. Take control of how MapInfo displays Legend windows. Includes the ability to have multiple legend windows open, and associate each legend with a specific map window. Designate the title of a map window and default table view. Save a map window's current zoom and center as a named view. Return to that view by selecting the view name from a dialog. Allows a DBA to create a MapInfo Map Catalog table in a remote database. The catalog is needed for downloading coordinate information to MapInfo from a remote database. Allows you to connect to an SQL database server, build queries and execute SQL statements. Additionally, issue queries to preview data and download query results to a local MapInfo table. Upload a MapInfo table to a remote database. Also, upload coordinate information from a mappable table to a remote database. Opens a new Map window to provide an overview of another map window.
Grid Maker Labeler
Legend Manager
Map Window Manager Named Views ODBC Catalog
ODBC SQL Builder
ODBC Upload
Overview
MapInfo Reference
459
Tool Manager
Tools:
Rotate Map Window Rotate Map Window enables you to rotate the contents of the current map window a specific number of degrees. Rotate Map Window calculates and sets an Affine transformation for the map window. It does not change any of the tables displayed there. Affine transformations do not rotate raster images or grid files. Symbols and text are also not rotated by Affine transformations. Create a custom distance scalebar to annotate a mapper. Creates and manages seamless map sheets. Search a character column for a specific string and replace it with another string. Draw decorative frames around text objects. Create, edit, delete MapInfo symbols. These symbols become part of the standard MapInfo symbol set. Get information about all currently open tables, including table metadata. Import and export MapInfo data to and from other popular mapping files formats.
ScaleBar Seamless Table Manager Search and Replace Shields Symbol Table Manager Universal Translator
460
MapInfo Reference
Tool Manager
Using the Tool Manager

To use the Tool Manager:
"
Choose Tools > Tool Manager. The Tool Manager dialog displays: Tools: Displays the list of registered tools. Loaded: If the box is checked the tool is loaded and a corresponding menu item displays in the Tools menu. Check the box to load a tool that is not currently running. Clear the box to unload the tool. Tools load and unload when you click OK to exit from the dialog box. Autoload: Check to run the tool at startup. You must exit MapInfo after checking this box for the first time for the Autoload feature to work. Add Tool: Choose to display the Add Tool dialog. Add tools from the MapInfo Tool directory or tools you have created. Using the Add Tool dialog: Title: Enter the name of the tool. Location: Enter the complete path for the tool. Click the . . . (browse) button to display the Select MapBasic Program dialog. Description: Enter an optional description of the tool's function. Choose OK to enter the tool in the Tool Manager listbox. Edit Tool: Choose to display the Tool Definition dialog. Edit the name; path; description of
the highlighted tool.
MapInfo Reference
461
Tool Manager
Using the Edit Tool dialog: Title: Display the highlighted tool. You can edit the name of the tool. Location: Display the path of the highlighted tool. Edit the path; if the path is invalid, an error message displays. Click the . . . (browse) button to display the Select MapBasic Program dialog. Description: Display the current description of the highlighted tool. Enter/edit an optional description of the tool's function. Choose OK to enter the tool to the Tool Manager listbox. Remove Tool: Display a dialog that allows you to remove the highlighted tool from the tool table and update the list of available tools. This action takes effect when you exit from MapInfo.
See:
Tools Menu
462
MapInfo Reference
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Use the Tools Menu to:
D
access the Tool Manager and display a list of loaded MapBasic tools.
Tools Menu is available when:

D
always available.
Using the Tools Menu

Use the Tools menu to access the Tool Manager dialog to add, edit and remove MapBasic tools, as well as designate tools to be autoloaded at startup. Additionally, the menu displays a list of currently loaded tools, and their submenus.
See:
Tool Manager
MapInfo Reference
463
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar
Use the Tools Toolbar to:
D
choose MapBasic tools.
Tools Toolbar is available when:

D
a Map, Layout or Browser window is active and the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the Tools Toolbar.
Using the Tools Toolbar

For an onscreen button description, click and hold the mouse button down to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars. To choose an action from the Tools Toolbar:
"
The Tools Toolbar contains two tools for working with MapBasic.
Run MapBasic Program
Access the Run MapBasic Program dialog.
Show MapBasic Window
Display or hide the MapBasic window.
For a full button description, see the appropriate button entry.
Autoscrolling
When you use a tool in the Map or Layout window, the window scrolls if you drag the tool outside of the window boundaries. The window will continue to scroll until you release the mouse or move the cursor back into the window. Press Esc to stop scrolling; the tool remains active. To cancel the tool, press Esc after the scrolling has stopped. Autoscrolling works with any tool that can be dragged; it does not work with single-click tools, such as the Grabber or Info tools.
See:
Toolbars, User's Guide: Chapter 4
464
MapInfo Reference
ToolTips
ToolTips
Use ToolTips to:
D
display text describing the behavior of a button on a Toolbar.
ToolTips is available when:

D
ToolTips is always available.
Text Style
Using ToolTips
As the mouse tracks over a button, text describing the purpose or action of the button displays. The text continues to display until the mouse is moved or clicked.
See:
Toolbars Command
MapInfo Reference
465
Universal Translator
Use the Universal Translator to:
D
import and export MapInfo data to and from other mapping formats.
The Universal Translator is available when:

D
always available, unless disabled during Custom Installation, or unloaded using the Tool Manager dialog, or Tools > Universal Translator > Exit.
Menu Path
"
Tools > Universal Translator > Universal Translator
Using the Universal Translator

To use the Universal Translator:
"
Choose Tools > Universal Translator > Universal Translator. The Universal Translator dialog displays:
Source Format Select the format of the file to be translated. Click to display a dropdown list of formats. If the source is Intergraph MicroStation Design, a Settings button displays. Click this button to display the Design File Input Settings dialog. Choose the appropriate coordinate units: Master; Sub; UOR.
466
MapInfo Reference
Files Enter the file(s) to be translated or click . . . to display the Select Input Files dialog. Choose the file(s) from the Select Input dialog. You can select more than one file of the same type for translation. AutoCAD defaults to DWG format. When translating a TAB or a MIF/MID file whose name is greater than 8 characters long to DWG/DXF, the resulting file's name is longer than 8 characters. Since AutoCAD cannot open a file whose name is longer than 8 characters, an error message: Invalid Input File" displays. For example, boundary_usa.TAB translates to boundary_usa.DWG; AutoCAD cannot open this DWG file. Rename the DWG file to a shorter name. Projection If you have selected a MapInfo Tab file, Coordinate system will be read from source" displays since MapInfo Tab files contain coordinate system information. If you have selected Shape, AutoCAD or Intergraph files, the Projection button displays. MapInfo.prj is used. Custom projections can be added. Click this button to designate the coordinate system. If you choose the wrong coordinate system, erroneous results may occur. If you do not know the coordinate system, select nonEarth. If you do not designate a coordinate system, the Universal Translator defaults to nonEarth meters. Category: a list of available categories displays. Category Members: displays the projection choices for the selected category. Destination Format Select the format of the translated file. When translating into MapInfo TAB or MIF/MID, the translation creates version 3.0 MapInfo tables; if the translation encounters a feature unique to later versions of MapInfo Professional, (such as the expanded maximum node limit) the version is designated with an edited version. The version number corresponds to the version containing the first instance of the feature. The files then can only be edited in this version of MapInfo Professional. The file can be viewed in previous versions of MapInfo, however, it cannot be edited in those versions and the feature may not display.
MapInfo Reference
467
Directory Enter the destination of the translated file. Click . . . to display the Select Directory dialog. The output file name is based on the contents and format of the input file. See Additional Notes. If the Source file is MapInfo format, and the destination file is AutoCAD, a Settings button displays. Click to display the AutoCAD Output Settings dialog: Select the version of AutoCAD that should be used. Universal Translator reads and writes any version of AutoCAD DWG/DXF version up to and including version 14. Log Log to File Universal Translator automatically creates a log file documenting the translation process. Specify a file name and location for the Log file. The default is C:\temp\mutlog.txt, where C:\temp\mutlog.txt is an environment variable. Click . . . to designate another name/path for the log file. Add each log file to the previous file, rather than beginning a new file for each translation process.
Append to Log Additional Notes
MapInfo Professional 5.0 includes these AutoCAD 14 enhancements: AutoCad data attributes are translated. AutoCad Z value is translated as a data attribute named 'elevation'. Intergraph DGN MSLink is supported. The Universal Translator does not officially support 3-dimensional Intergraph DGN or 3 dimensional AutoCAD DWG/DXF files; the translation results using these files are unpredictable. The Universal Translator does not perform coordinate transformations. When translating DWG/DXF to TAB/MIF, the Universal Translator does not translate AutoCAD meshes. When translating DWG/DXF or DGN, the translator does not attempt to match display attributes, including line color, font type. When translating from SHAPE to TAB, Universal Translator defaults empty fields to the following: empty numeric field with a width of one translates to a 0 (zero) empty numeric field with a width of two translates to 9 empty numeric field with a width of three translates to 99 empty numeric field with a width of four translates to 999 empty numeric field with a width of five or greater translates to 9999
468
MapInfo Reference
A single file translation may result in multiple files depending on file types. DGN to TAB - MIF/MID : name of original file appended to geometry type. Example: original file: CANADA.DGN translated TAB files: CANADA_ELLIPSES.TAB CANADA_POINTS.TAB CANADA_TEXT.TAB DWG/DXF to TAB - MIF/MID: name of original file appended to layer name. AutoCAD organizes drawing entities by user named layers. Example: original file: SWEDEN.DWG translated TAB files: SWEDEN_FORESTS.TAB SWEDEN_RIVERS.TAB SWEDEN_ROADS.TAB SHAPE to TAB - MIF/MID : One shape file creates one TAB/MIF/MID file. Example: original file: STATES.SHP translated file: STATES.TAB TAB - MIF/MID to SHAPE : name of original file appended to geometry type. Example: original file: USHIGHWAY.TAB translated file: USHIGHWAY_POLYLINE.SHP USHIGHWAY_POINT.SHP TAB - MIF/MID to DWG/DXF or DGN: One TAB - MIF/MID file creates one DWG or DXF or DGN files. Example: original file: STATES.TAB translated file: STATES .DGN STATES.DWG Since DGN, DXF, DWG, and Shape files do not share coordinate system information, you must specify the correct coordinate system. Designating the wrong coordinate system will give erroneous results.
MapInfo Reference
469
Virtual Memory: when translating to or from DWG/DXF, it is possible to encounter a lack of virtual memory. An error message displays indicating this; to resolve this problem, increase the virtual memory. After adjusting the Virtual Memory designation, the computer must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. See your operating system documentation for information on increasing the virtual memory.
470
MapInfo Reference
Undo Command Edit Menu
Undo Command Edit Menu

Use Undo to:
D
undo the last edit operation.
Undo is available when:

D D
a Map window is active and Reshape is activated. Undo is active when an undoable" operation such as adding, moving, or deleting objects or adding and deleting records has been performed. (Redo is enabled if an Undo has been performed)
Menu Path
"
Edit > Undo.
Undoing Your Last Action

If you perform an action that produces an unwanted result, you sometimes can reverse or undo" the action. The actual name of this command changes to let you know exactly what operation you will be undoing. After a Paste, for example, the name of this command changes to Undo Paste. Once you have undone something, the name of this command changes to Redo, for example, Redo Paste. You cannot undo the following; Revert, Save, Save As, or Modify Table, or any operations whose effects are primarily cosmetic. Undo is affected by the Number of Undo Objects option in the System Preferences (Options > Preferences > System Settings). Set the undo number from 0, which deactivates the Undo system, to 800 undo records; the default is 10 undo records. For example, if you set the undo number to 120 and attempt to undo 121 records, the undo menu is unavailable. There is a memory limit for the Undo command. If you are editing extremely complex graphic objects, the number of reversible records may drop below the designation set in Preferences.
See:
Clear Command Preferences Command
MapInfo Reference
471
Unlink ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar
Unlink ODBC Table Button ODBC Toolbar Unlink ODBC Table Command Table > Maintenance
Use Unlink ODBC Table to:
D
to unlink a table which was downloaded from a remote database and linked to a MapInfo table with the Open ODBC Table command.
Unlink ODBC Table is available when:

D
Menu Path
D
Table > Maintenance > Unlink ODBC Table
Using Unlink ODBC Table

Unlinking a table removes the link to the remote database. This command doesn't work if edits are pending on the linked table. You must first update any pending edits with the Save Table command. The table linkage is removed. Fields that were marked noneditable are now editable. The end product is a normal MapInfo base table. To unlink a table: 1. 2. 3. Choose Table > Maintenance > Unlink ODBC Table. The Unlink Table dialog displays. Choose the name of the table to be unlinked from the Unlink table list. Choose OK. The specified table is unlinked.
See:
Save Table Command Refresh ODBC Table Command Open ODBC Table Command
472
MapInfo Reference
Unselect All Command Query Menu
Unselect All Command Query Menu

Use Unselect All to:
D
unselect the currently selected objects in a Map or Layout or rows in a Browser window.
Unselect All is available when:

D
an open Map, Layout, Browser window contains a selection.
Menu Path
"
Query > Unselect All
Unselecting Objects
To unselect the currently selected objects in any open window:
"
Choose Query >Unselect All.
Other ways of unselecting include:

D D D
When in a map or layout with selected objects, click the Select tool where there are no objects. When a row in a browser is selected, press <SHIFT> while selecting the row again. Choose File > Close Table and specify Selection.
MapInfo Reference
473
Unsmooth Command Objects Menu
Unsmooth Command Objects Menu

Use Unsmooth to:
D
revert a smoothed polyline to its original state.
Unsmooth is available when:

D
an Map window with an editable layer is active and a polyline object is selected from the editable layer.
Menu Path
"
Objects > Unsmooth
Unsmoothing a Polyline
To unsmooth a polyline: 1. 2. Select a smoothed polyline in an editable layer. Choose Objects > Unsmooth.
See:
Smooth Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 13
474
MapInfo Reference
Update Column Command Table Menu

Use Update Column to:
D
assign values to a column, add a new (temporary) column using data from another table, move values between columns and enter graphics information into columns for descriptive data.
Update Column is available when:

D
at least one MapInfo table that isn't readonly is open.
Menu Path
"
Table > Update Column
Assigning Values to Columns

Update Column allows you to change a column's value by updating a table based on its own data values or by updating a table based on data from another table. To update an existing column's value:
"
Choose Table > Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays.
Update Column Dialog
Table to Update
Choose the table that contains the column you want to update. If adding a temporary column, this table will store the temporary column. Choose the column to update. If the Table to update is different from the Get value from table, choose Add new temporary column to add a temporary column to the update table.
Column to Update
MapInfo Reference
475

Get Value from Table Choose the table from which MapInfo should retrieve the update information. If you are updating a column by applying only a mathematical expression, and do not need data from another table, this table should be the same as Table to update. Display the Join dialog. The Join button is active when the data table is different than the table to update. When updating a column using data from another table or when adding a temporary column using data from another table, use the Join dialog to specify how records in the two tables are matched. See Join. Displays if you are working with one table only. Enter an expression, or use Assist button to access the Expression dialog to create an expression. The choice of options is dictated by the table from which you are retrieving the data. When you update one table based on its own data values, MapInfo automatically chooses the Value option. When you update one table based on data from another table, specify Value, Min, Average, Sum, Max, Count, Proportion Sum, WtAvg, Proportion Avg or Proportion WtAvg. Calculate the average of the values in expression for all records in a group. See Join Command for information on grouping. Count the number of records in a group. Takes * as its argument because it applies to the record as a whole and not to any particular field in the record. Find the highest value in expression for all records in a group. Find the lowest value in expression for all records in a group. Calculate the sum of the expression values for all the records in the group. MapInfo adjusts the calculation of averages so that the values from each selected object are weighted more or less heavily. For a more detailed explanation, see Combine Command, Weight by section. Aggregate data into a polygon. Accounts for the area of the polygons that overlap the polygon receiving the aggregation. For example, if a third of an object's area falls within a polygon the proportion sum aggregate will put one third of the overlapping object's data value in the polygon.
Join
Value
Calculate
Avg (expression) Count
Max (expression) Min (expression) Sum(expression) WtAvg
Proportion Sum
476
MapInfo Reference

Proportion Avg Compute the average based on the proportion of values from the covered areas (weighs the averages according to area). For example, if 80% of a new object's area is from Object A having a mortality rate of .8%, and 20% of the new object's area is from object B having a birth mortality rate of .6%, then the birth mortality rate of the new object would be equal to .8 x .8 + .6 x .2 = .76. Compute the average based on the proportion of values from the covered areas (weighs the averages according to another field whose value is proportioned). For example, continuing the example from above, Population of Object A that is in the new object = 34,000, Population of Object B that is in the new object = 26,000. The birth mortality rate of the new object is (.8 x 34000 + .6 x 26000) /60000 = .713. Specify values stored in a single column or a mathematical expression based on values in the data table. Specify the field or build an expression by choosing Expression and using the Expression dialog. Expressions or fields are evaluated according to the selected Aggregate Function or Value. Value is automatically selected when you update one table based on its own data values. See Expression Dialog. Displays if updating a column in one table with a value. Choose to display the Expression dialog and build a Value expression that will be applied to the column values. See the Expression Dialog. Check to display an updated table. Display the update column expression created by the previous update column dialog options. Build multiple updates using the same update and data tables. Available if update column is selected. Select the update column expression you want to remove from the list. Accept the dialog options. Cancel the dialog options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Proportion WtAvg
of
Assist
Browse results Add Column to List
Remove from List OK Cancel Help
MapInfo Reference
477
Adding a Temporary Column

Add a new (temporary) column(s) to a table by using data from another table. To add a temporary column: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open at least two tables. Choose Table >Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays. Choose the table to which the new temporary column will be added. Choose the table from which MapInfo will retrieve the update information. To add temporary columns, you must specify updating one table based on data from another table. Accept Add new temporary column at the Column to Update option. If necessary, specify the information MapInfo will need to associate the data (join) in the two tables by using their common tabular or graphic data. See Join. 6. Choose how to produce column data by specifying how to calculate the information based on columns or an expression at the Calculate and of boxes. See the preceding: Update Column Dialog. Check the Browse Results box to display the table with its new temporary column. Click OK. The temporary column is added based on the specified information.
7. 8.
When you make changes to the data table, the new temporary columns(s) are automatically updated. To save the table with its new temporary columns use the File > Save Copy As command. Temporary columns will also be saved in a workspace when you use save a workspace by choosing File > Save Workspace, if the two tables are both base tables.
Updating Information in a Subset of a Table

Use Update Column to update information in a subset of a table. For example, you could marquee the southeast of the United States, then use Update Column to set the sales rep" field to the name of your sales representative for the selection table. You can update all the rows in a table or a selection of rows. To update a selection of rows you need to select the rows using Select, SQL Select, the Select tool, the Boundary Select tool, Marquee Select tool or the Radius Select tool and then update the selection.
Updating an SQL Select Query Table

Use Update Column on the result of an SQL Select multitable join, if the SQL Select didn't have a Group By clause. To update a column in one table with information from another table: 1. 2. Join the tables with SQL Select. Use Update Column on the selection table. The update will automatically take effect in the appropriate base table.
478
MapInfo Reference
Placing Graphic Information into Visible Columns

Use Update Column to place graphic information into visible columns. Tables containing graphic objects (maps) store graphic information that is not visible in tables. You can place some of that information into columns and view it in a Browser window. You cannot create a temporary column using data from the same table. Create empty columns using Table > Maintenance > Modify Structure; fill with Update Column and Save.
Tables You Cannot Update

You cannot update:
D D D D D
ASCII files Excel and Lotus files StreetInfo main tables. You can update component files. See Chapter 18 of the User's Guide, Editing Street Maps, for information on editing street maps. Tables formed using SQL Select with a Group By clause Readonly tables
Although you cannot update these tables, you can use Update Column to add temporary columns.
See:
Join Table Structure Command The MIPro User's Guide: Chapter 18
MapInfo Reference
479
Value Axis Command Graph Menu

Use Value Axis to:
D
change the labels, tick marks, and grid lines of the value (y) axis of a graph.
Value Axis is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Graph > Value Axis or
Specifying Value Axis Options

To specify value axis options:
"
Choose Graph > Value Axis. The Value Axis dialog displays.
Value Axis Dialog
Axis Values Auto Minimum Value Auto Maximum Value Auto Cross At Specify the lowest value to appear along the Value/Label axis. Specify the highest value to appear on the Value/Label axis. Specify the place on the label axis where it is crossed by the Value/Label axis.
480
MapInfo Reference

Auto Major Unit Auto Minor Unit Major Tick Marks Minor Tick Marks Axis Labels Specify the increment between major ticks. Specify the increment between minor ticks. Set major tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis. Set the tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis. Choose no labels (None) or to have the labels appear At Axis. Click the text Aa" button to display the Text Style dialog where you specify the size, font, style, and color of the labels. See Text Style Button. Specify a title for the axis. The title appears adjacent to the axis. Click the text Aa" button to display the Text Style dialog where you specify the the size, font, style, and color of the title. See Text Style Button. Choose to have gridlines drawn at major ticks. The Major Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display. Choose to have gridlines drawn at minor ticks. The Minor Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display. Choose to display the Line Style dialog where you specify the width, style and color of the axis lines. See Line Style Button. Cancel the dialog. Redraw the graph with the specified options. Display appropriate Help topic.
Axis Title
Major Gridline
Minor Gridline
Axis Line Cancel OK Help
See:
Label Axis Command New Graph Window
MapInfo Reference
481
View Actual Size Command Layout Menu
View Actual Size Command Layout Menu

Use View Actual Size to:
D
display the layout so that objects appear at their actual size (sets the zoom to 100%). An object's actual size is the size of the objects when printed.
View Actual Size is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Layout > View Actual Size or
See:
Change Zoom Command View Entire Layer Command
482
MapInfo Reference
View Entire Layer Command Map Menu
View Entire Layer Command Map Menu

Use View Entire Layer to:
D
zoom and display an entire layer or all layers in a map.
View Entire Layer is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Map > View Entire Layer or
Displaying the Entire Map or a Map Layer

Use this option if the map contains layers that cover different amounts of territory. For example, you have a map containing New York counties, highways, ZIP Codes and streets for Utica. If you choose All Layers, MapInfo will zoom out to display the entire map. But if you are only interested in viewing Utica streets, choose the Utica streets layer. MapInfo will zoom to display those streets. To display an entire map or map layer:
"
Choose Map > View Entire Layer. The View Entire Layer dialog displays.
View Entire Layer Dialog View entire layer Cancel OK Choose a specific layer or All layers to display. Cancel the dialog. View the layer(s).
Since redraw speed on large maps, such as MapInfo's StreetInfo maps, can be slow, we suggest you interrupt the display when using View Entire Layer. Since redraw can be slow when using large maps, such as MapInfo Street maps, interrupt redraw by pressing <ESCAPE> or the right mousebutton during redraw. Then, use the Zoomin button to view the appropriate section.
See:
MapInfo Reference
483
View Entire Layout Command Layout Menu
View Entire Layout Command Layout Menu

Use View Entire Layout to:
D
zoom out so all pages in the layout window display. Chooses a zoom that allows the entire layout to display in a window. If the window is too small it selects a minimum zoom (6.25%).
View Entire Layout is available when:

D
Menu Path
"
Layout > View Entire Layout or
See:
Change Zoom Command View Actual Size Command
484
MapInfo Reference
Zoom-in Button Main Toolbar
Zoom-in Button Main Toolbar

Use the Zoom-in button to:
D
access the Zoomin tool. Use the Zoomin tool to get a closer area view of a map or a layout.
The Zoom-in button is available when:

D
a map or layout is active.
Menu Path
D
Main Toolbar > Zoomin button
Magnifying a Map or Layout

To zoomin: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoomin button. Click the Zoomin cursor on the center of the area you want to zoom in on, magnifying the area by a linear factor of two.
This point will be at the center of the map in the zoomedin view. Repeat this procedure until you have the appropriate level of enlargement. To zoomin on a rectangular area: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoomin button. Draw a marquee around an area by dragging the Zoomin tool diagonally across it. The selected area is enlarged to fill the Map window.
See:
Change Zoom Command Grabber Button Previous View Command View Entire Layer Command View Entire Layout Command Zoomout Button
MapInfo Reference
485
Zoom-out Button Main Toolbar
Zoom-out Button Main Toolbar

Use the Zoom-out button to:
D
access the Zoomout tool. Use the Zoomout tool to get a wider area view of a map or a layout.
The Zoom-out button is available when:

D
a map or layout window is active.
Menu Path
"
Main Toolbar > Zoomout button
Zooming Out on a Map or Layout

To Zoomout: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoomout button. Click the Zoomout cursor on the center of the area from which you want to zoom out. The visible area of the map is increased by a linear factor of two. The map is redrawn, placing the point at the center of the Map window in the zoomedout view.
To Zoomout a rectangular area: 1. 2. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoomout button. Draw a marquee in the map or layout by diagonally dragging the Zoomout tool. The area within the marquee is reduced, allowing more of the map to display.
See:
Change Zoom Command Grabber Button Previous View Command View Entire Layer Command View Entire Layout Command Zoomin Button
486
MapInfo Reference
Index A
Abbreviations, 152 About MapInfo command, 13 Add District command, 14 Add Node button, 15 Adding a column, 310 Adding a tool, 458462 Address matching, preferences, 325 Adjust Image Styles command, 1618 Aggregate functions redistricting column expres sions, 260 SQL Select, 426 Update Column dialog, 475 Align Objects command, 1920 Append Rows To Table com mand, 22 Arc objects Arc button, 23 converting to polylines, 6364 converting to regions (poly gons), 65 drawing, 23 modifying, 23 specifying attributes, 24 splitting, 416 Area graph, 171 Area of detail map, 368 Arrange Icons command, 26 ASCII deleting table, 115 exporting to, 137142 opening as a table, 287290 Assign Selected Objects button/ command, 27 Assist button. See Expression Auto labels, 205 AutoCAD exporting to, 137142 importing. See DXF, import ing importing file to, 180 Autoflip, 185 Autolabels, moving, 361 Automatic geocoding, 165 Autoscroll, turning off, 367 Autoscrolling, 130, 231, 433, 464 Autotrace, 21, 414 Average proportional, 477 proportional weighted, 477 record values, 476 weighted of column values, 476 Averaging, column values, 58 Browse window, StatusBar dis play, 436 Browser, printing, 329 Browser Print Options Dialog, 329 Browser window See also Columns in a table; Rows in a table adding text, 245 cascading, 36 closing, 50 copying from, 6667 cutting to clipboard, 113 deleting a selection, 42 display, 244 editing, 451 editing text, 245 entering text, 448 finding field information, 149152 finding selected objects, 153 grid display, 293 Info button data, 189190 layout display, 157 modifying column display, 309312 opening, 244247 opening multiple, 244 saving with new attributes, 385387 scrolling, 246 Select button, 393 selecting from, 391393 text style, 245246 tiling, 454 Buffering objects Buffer command, 3133 concentric buffers application, 367 convert to polylines, 63
B
Bar chartmap, graph, 171 Bitmaps exporting a window to, 385 raster images, 349355 Borders, displaying, 387 Boundary Select button, 2829 Bring To Front command, 30
Index
C
Calculate Statistics command, 3435 Callouts, 212, 451 Cartographic Legend, 70 Cascade Windows command, 36 Centroids defining, 209 displaying, 207, 209 moving, 361 Change View button/command, 3940 Change Zoom command, 41 Character strings in expressions, 145 operators, 146 table field type, 265 Charts. See Graph Circle objects drawing, 131 specifying attributes, 131 Clear command, 42 Clear Cosmetic Layer com mand, 43 Clear Custom Labels, 202 Clear Map Objects Only com mand, 44 Clear Target command, 45 Clip Region, 46, 402 Clip Region Off command, 46 Clipboard copying to, 6667 cutting to, 113114 pasting from, 308 specify behavior, 114 Clone View, 48 Close All command, 49
Close Table command, 5052 closing multiple tables, 50 Color customizing, 112 defaults, 320 region style setting, 346 Columns in a table adding fields, 444447 adding graphic information, 479 adding using expressions, 311 adding/removing text, 245 averaging, 58 calculating statistics, 3435 clearing all, 310 combining objects using a col umn, 6162 field display, 246 finding information, 149152 indexed, 266 indexing, 444447 joining, 193 modifying display, 309312 removing fields, 444447 removing from display, 310 removing indexes, 444447 renaming display, 311 renaming fields, 444447 reordering, 246, 444 resizing, 247 selecting, 421 temporary columns, 478 totaling with SQL, 423 types, 265 weighted averaging, 58 Combining data. See Map ob jects, combining; Objects, modifying Combining objects Combine command, 5360 Combine Objects Using Col umn command, 6162 combining closed objects, 54
combining selected objects, 5360 Comparison operators, 146 conflict resolution, 377 Connecting to a data source, 270 Continuous surface map, 84 Control points adding to a raster image, 355 digitizing, 119 editing raster image, 355 raster image, 351352 raster images, 396 Convert To Polylines command, 6364 Convert To Regions command, 65 Converting Coordinates, 367 Copying Copy command, 66 drag button, 128 object nodes, 361 objects, 6667 pasting information, 308 specify behavior, 67, 320 Cosmetic layer deleting objects, 43 editable, 207 selectable, 207 Create Drop Shadows com mand, 6869 Create Points command, 8081 Create thematic map command, 82110 Creating a new column, 311 Cropping images, 387 Crystal Reports, 111 Custom Colors command, 112 Custom symbol shapes, 368 Custom symbols, 440
488
MapInfo Reference
Index Custom Toolbar, displaying, 455 Cut command, 113114 tables, 115 Digitizer mode digitizer cursor, 122127 using the mouse, 121122 using tools, 121 Digitizer setup, configuring digi tizer buttons, 121 Digitizing, 117127 Digitizer Setup command, 117127 projection settings, 338 Directory, preferences, 325 Displaying fields, 310 Districts browser. See Redistrict ing Drag Button, 128 Drawing arc objects, 23 circle objects, 131 curved lines, 316317 editable cosmetic layer, 207 ellipses, 131132 lines, 223224 polygons, 313 polylines, 316318 rectangles, 342 squares, 342 Drawing ButtonPad, Frame but ton, 154157 Drawing interchange file, im porting. See DXF, importing Drawing Toolbar Add Node button, 15 Arc button, 2325 defined, 129130 displaying, 455457 Ellipse button, 131132 Line button, 223224 Line Style button, 225226 Polygon button, 313315 Polyline button, 316361 Rectangle Button, 342 Rectangle button, 342343 Region Style button, 346 Reshape button, 358361 Rounded Rectangle button, 363364 Symbol button, 438 Text button, 448451 Text Style button, 452 Drawing toolbar, line width, 227 DXF autoflip, 182 exporting, 141 importing, 182
D
Data aggregation combining map objects, 55, 62 dialog options, 57 Data disaggregation erasing objects, 133 erasing outside of objects, 135 splitting, 417 data source, connecting, 270 Database catalogs, 367 Date functions current date, 158 day of month, 158 day of week, 158 month, 158 year, 158 Dates, in expressions, 145 Dates table field type, 265 dBase deleting table, 115 exporting tables to, 137142 importing table to, 180 opening as a table, 286290 saving tables to, 369 Decimal field type, 265 Degrees, converting from DMS, 367 Delete Table command, 115 Delete Target District com mand, 116 Deleting cosmetic objects, 43 districts, 116 map objects, 133 objects from a table, 44 selected text/objects, 42
E
Editable layer popup, 437 Editable layers, 205 Editing a column, 310 Editing a tool, 458462 Editing objects. See Arc, Ellipse, Frame, Line, Symbol, Poly gon, Polyline, Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, Text Objects; Reshape, Resize, Get Info Ellipse objects converting to polylines, 6364 converting to regions (poly lines), 65 drawing, 131 Ellipse button, 131132 specifying attributes, 131 splitting, 416 Embedding a map legend, 333 Erase command, 133 Erase Outside command, 134135 Excel. See Microsoft Excel Exit command, 136 Exporting ASCII, 139
MapInfo Reference
489
Index Autocad, 140 dBase, 142 Export command, 137142 MIF, 139 projection settings, 338 Expressions creating labels, 216 editing column display, 311 Expression dialog, 143148 modifying, 312 modifying column display, 311 specifying, 143 thematic maps, 9194 Geographic objects. See objects Geographic operators, in the Expression dialog, 147 Geographical functions area of object, 159 distance, 159 object perimeter, 159 x coordinate centroid, 159 y coordinate centroid, 159 Get Info command, 167 Grabber button, 168 Graph window cascading, 36 closing, 50 copying from, 66 customizing, 173, 399400 customizing the value axis, 480 displaying, 248249 exporting, 385387 Graph Type command, 169174 label axis options, 197198 layout display, 156 legend display, 178, 222, 408 printing, 332333 tiling, 454 type, 169174 Grid map, 84 GridMaker application, 367 Group by tables, 423 GTCO digitizers, 117 Hide Statistics Window com mand/button, 176 Hide StatusBar command, 177 Highlight control, 322
I
Importing DXF files, 182 IMG files, 181 Import command, 179188 MIF files, 181 projection settings, 338 Indexed columns, finding infor mation, 149152 Indexed fields, 266 removing, 444447 reordering, 444447 specifying, 444447 Info button, 189190 Info tool window, 189 closing, 50 InfoTips, 191 Integer field type, 265 Interactive geocoding, 165 Interleaved line styles, 192 International character sets, 142
F
Fields. See Columns in a table Files. See Tables Finding Find command, 149152 Find Selection command, 153 indexed fields, 266 objects, 149 street addresses, 149 street intersections, 152 Fonts, 452453 Frame objects See also Layout window drop shadows, 68 Frame button, 154157 modifying, 155 specifying attributes, 157 Functions. See Aggregate func tions
J
Joining tables, RowID, 193 Joining tables Join button, 193 SQL Select command, 420 Update Column command, 193196, 475479 with thematic maps, 194 JPEG File Interchange Format, 385
G
Geocoding creating points, 80 Geocode command, 161166 moving points, 361 ungeocoded records, 166
H
Help, MapInfo Help Topics, 236 Hiding Hide theme legend command, 178 Hide MapBasic Window but ton/command, 175
K
Keywords in expressions, 147148
490
MapInfo Reference
Index
L
Label expression, 191 Labels creating callouts, 451 customizing graph label axis, 197, 480 deleting, 202, 215 Label Axis command, 197198 Label button, 199202 modifying, 199 moving, 202, 215 moving autolabels, 361 rotating, 202, 215 rotation, 212 saving to a table, 367 specifying attributes, 452 using expressions, 216 using the Text button, 448451 Layer Control button/command, 203221 Layer Control dialog auto label icon, 205 editable icon, 205 selectable icon, 205 visible icon, 205 Layers. See Map layers Layout, paper size, 295 Layout window aligning objects, 1920 cascading, 36 closing, 50 copying from, 66 creating, 250 cutting selections to the clip board, 113114 deleting objects, 42 description, 251 drop shadows, 6869 exporting, 385387 frame display, 295 frame objects, 154157 labeling, 448451
magnifying, 485 map proportion, 156 modifying objects, 167 moving objects to the front, 30 object size, 482 ordering objects, 251, 398 page breaks, 294 positioning, 168 previous view, 327 rulers, 294 scale, 156 selecting objects, 391393 StatusBar display, 436 symbols, 438439 tiling, 454 unit settings, 320 viewing a larger area, 486 viewing pages, 484 zoom level setting, 41 zoom setting, 251252 Legend window closing, 50 Legend button, 222 legend manager application, 367 map display, 156 modifying a thematic map, 243 printing, 333 thematic map, 96, 99, 102, 104, 105, 109 theme, displaying, 178 Legend Window Preference dia log, 323 Line graph, 172 Line objects adding nodes, 15 converting to polylines, 6364 converting to regions (poly gons), 65 drawing, 223224 Line button, 223224 specifying attributes, 223 specifying length, 367 specifying style, 225226
splitting, 416 Line Style button/command, 225226 Line styles, interleaved, 192 Line width, 227 Linked table, closing, 51 Linked tables defined, 269 saving, 377 Logical operators, 147 Logical table field type, 265 Longitude/Latitude lines, 367 Lotus spreadsheets deleting table, 115 opening as a table, 288
M
Mailing a MapInfo window, 397 Mailing a workspace, 397 Main ButtonPad, Grabber but ton, 168 Main Toobar, Info button, 189190 Main Toolbar, 229231 Assign Selected Objects but ton, 27 Boundary Select button, 2829 Change View button, 3940 clip region, 46 displaying, 455457 Label button, 199202 Layer Control button, 203221 Legend button, 222 Marquee Select button, 238 Radius Select button, 341 Ruler button, 365 Select button, 391393 Set Target District From Map button, 405
MapInfo Reference
491
Index Zoomin button, 485 Zoomout button, 486 Map layers controlling, 203221 cosmetic layer, 207 editable, 205 modifying a thematic map, 243 reorder, 206 reordering, 217218 seamless, 207 searching, 29 specifying attributes, 207209 StatusBar display, 436 thematic maps, 205 viewing, 483 zoom layering, 209 Map objects See also Objects cutting to the clipboard, 113114 polygons, 313 polylines, 316 selecting, 390 splitting, 416418 Map Print Options Dialog, 330 Map window centering, 40 changing the view, 3940 clipping a region, 46 clone view, 48 closing, 50 copying from, 66 exporting, 385387 finding selected objects, 153 labeling, 448451 legend display, 178 opening, 253 positioning, 168 printing, 330 redrawing, 344 scroll bar display, 297 scrolling, 255 selecting from, 391393 sizing, 322 StatusBar display, 255 theme legend display, 408 turning off autoscroll, 367 Map windows, projection set tings, 338339 MapBasic cascading windows, 36 copying from window, 66 cutting commands to a clip board, 113114 deleting a command, 42 displaying MapBasic window, 175 entering commands, 409 MapBasic window display, 409410 running programs, 366 running programs on startup, 434 sample utilities, 367368 tiling windows, 454 MapInfo Boundary Interchange files, 179 MapInfo for DOS importing, 181 importing images, 179 MapInfo Forum, 235 MapInfo Help Topics, 236 MapInfo Interchange exporting to, 137 importing, 181 MapInfo Map Interchange for mat, 179 MapInfo on the WWW, 237 MapInfo Online Forum, 235 Mapinfo.wor, 324 Mapinfow.abb, 150, 164 Mapinfow.prf, 326 Maps area units, 298 coordinate units, 297 creating points, 8081 digitizing, 117127 displaying multiple layers, 203221 Info button data display, 189190 legend display, 156, 222 magnifying, 485 measurement units, 297, 323 non-earth, 263 previous view, 327 putting data on a map, 161166 symbols, 438439 table display, 253 viewing a larger area, 486 zoom setting, 255 zoom settings, 207 Marquee Select button, 238 Math functions absolute value, 158 cosine, 158 integer, 158 maximum value, 158 minimum value, 158 rounding, 158 sine, 158 tangent, 158 Mathematical operators. See Operators Measuring distance, 365 Merging objects. See Combining Metafile, exporting a window to, 385 Microsoft Excel deleting table, 115 opening as a table, 288 MIF. See MapInfo Interchange format Minimizing icons, 26 Modify Image Registration com mand, 239
492
MapInfo Reference
Index Modify thematic map, 240243 Moving a label, 202, 215 Numeric table field type, 265 values in expressions, 145 pasting, 308 reshaping, 358361 selectable layers, 205 specifying color and pattern, 348 splitting, 416418 target, 404 undo, 471 unselecting, 392 Objects, selecting Boundary Select button, 2829 Browser window, 390 buffering objects, 3133 default display, 322 finding selected objects, 153 Layout window, 390 Map window, 390 Marquee Select button, 238 Radius Select button, 341 Select button, 391393 selectable cosmetic layer, 207 specify highlighting, 322 table, 390 unselecting, 473 ODBC Table, changing symbol, 3738 ODBC table, downloading, 269 ODBC Tables making mappable, 232234 opening, 269282 refreshing, 345 unlinking, 472 ODBC Toolbar defined, 268 Open ODBC Table button, 269282 Refresh ODBC Table button, 345 Unlink ODBC Table button, 472 Open ODBC Table button/com mand, 269282 Open Table, preferred view, 284 Open Workspace command, 291292
N
Named views, 368 New Browser Window com mand, 244247 New Graph Window command, 248249 New Layout Window command, 250252 New Map Window command, 253255 New Redistrict Window com mand, 256261 New Row command, 262 New Table command, 263267 Node limit, 15, 358 Nodes adding, 15, 301, 359 autotrace, 414 converting objects to polylines, 6364 converting objects to regions (polygons), 65 creating, 359 deleting, 359 displaying, 358 editing display, 209 reshaping, 358 selecting, 358 snap to, 322 snap to node, 414 Non-Earth maps coordinates, 339 creating, 263 Numbers, 265
O
Object functions buffer, 160 centroid, 160 create circle, 160 create line, 160 create point, 160 Objects, creating buffering, 31 combining, 53, 61 specifying color and pattern, 346 Objects, modifying adding nodes, 15, 301 aligning layout objects, 19 clearing a target, 45 clearing cosmetic layer ob jects, 43 combining closed objects, 54 combining objects, 5360, 6162 converting objects to polylines, 6364 converting objects to regions (polygons), 65 copying to the clipboard, 6667 cutting to the clipboard, 113114 deleting selected objects, 42, 44, 133 editable layer, 205 erasing outside of an object, 134135 Get Info, 167 location, 361 moving, 392 nodes, 360 ordering in a Layout window, 398
MapInfo Reference
493
Index Opening ASCII file, 287 dBase files, 286 multiple tables, 285 Open Table command, 283290 spreadsheets, 288 Opening an Access Table in Ma pInfo, 285 Opening multiple browers, 245 Operators comparison, 146 geographic, 427 logical, 147 mathematical, 145 precedence, 148 string. See Character strings Options command (Browse menu), 293 Options command (Layout menu), 294296 Options command (Map menu), 297298 Options command (Redistricter menu), 299300 Overlay Nodes command, 301302 Pie chartmap, graph, 172 Pin map. See Create Points com mand Points. See Symbols Polygon objects autotracing, 414 converting to polylines, 6364 converting to regions (poly gons), 65 drawing, 313 erasing outside, 134135 Polygon button, 313 snap to node, 414 specifying attributes, 314316 splitting, 416418 Polyline objects adding nodes, 15 autoracing, 414 erasing outside, 134135 modifying nodes, 358 Polyline button, 316318 reshaping, 358 smoothing, 413 specifying attributes, 317319 splitting, 416 unsmoothing, 474 Portable Network Graphics For mat, 385 Positioning. See Grabber button Preferences address matching, 325 default, 326 directories, 325 Legend Window, 323 map window, 322 Preferences command, 319326 save cosmetic objects, 374 startup, 324 system settings, 320 Preferred View, 283, 284 Previous View command, 327 Print Dialog, 328 Printing, 328336 color printer, 348 layout options, 295, 296 page setup, 305 paper size, 321 Print command, 328336 Print Map dialog, 330 Print Setup command, 337 printer setup, 337 Printing Options, 329 Projection creating, 263 digitizing, 118 exporting a map with differ ent, 142143 map options dialog setting, 297 raster images, 349 saving table with different, 369 Projection button, 338339
Q
Queries Save Template option, 382383 saving, 375 Querying closing a query, 5052 saving to a new table, 369 Quick Start dialog options, 340 preference setting, 324 Quick Start Dialog, 324 Quitting. See Exit command
P
Pack Table command, 303304 Page Margins, 296 Page Preview, 305 Page Setup, 305 Paste command, 308 Pasting, object nodes, 361 Photoshop 3.0, 385 Pick Fields command, 309361 Pie chart map, graph, 400401
R
Radius Select button, 341 Raster images adjusting image styles, 1618
494
MapInfo Reference
Index control points, 396 modifying image registration, 239 opening, 283290 opening an unregistered image, 289 projection settings, 338 registering, 349355 selecting control points, 396 Rectangle objects converting to polylines, 6364 converting to regions (poly lines), 65 drawing, 342 Rectangle button, 342343 rounded, 363364 specifying attributes, 343 splitting, 416 Redistricting adding a district, 14, 260 aggregate expressions, 260 assigning objects to a district, 27 browser display defaults, 299 changing a district name, 14 closing districts browser, 50 combining created districts, 261 deleting a district, 261 deleting the target district, 116 Districts Browser display, 299 grid line display, 299 ordering districts, 299 quitting, 261 redistrict window, 256261 renaming a district, 260 target district, 405 Redraw Window command, 344 Refresh ODBC Table command / button, 345 Region Style command, 346348 Regions. See Polygon objects, Convert to Regions com mand; Polygons Registering. See Raster images Removing a column, 310 Removing a label, 202, 215 Removing a tool, 458462 Rename Table command, 356357 Renaming a column, 311 Reshaping Add Node button, 15 adding nodes, 15 arc objects, 25 autotrace, 414 deleting selected objects, 42 moving default, 322 Reshape button, 358361 Reshape command, 358361 snap to node, 322, 414 unsmoothing a polyline, 474 Revert Table command, 362 Rotating a label, 202, 215 Rounded rectangle objects converting to polylines, 6364 converting to regions (poly lines), 65 drawing, 363 Rounded Rectangle button, 363364 specifying attributes, 364 splitting, 416 RowID, 193 Rows in a table adding, 393 appending, 22 editing through Info tool win dow, 190 new row, 262 selecting, 393 undo operation, 471 Ruler window opening, 365 Ruler button, 365 Run MapBasic Program button/ command, 366368
S
Save Copy As command, 369371 Save Cosmetic Objects Com mand, 374 Save Cosmetic Objects com mand, 207 Save Table command, 376381 Save template, 382383 Save Window As command, 385387 Saving See also Browser windows, Layout window, Map win dows, Graphs Save Workspace command, 388389 saving Access and MapInfo tables, 371 sessions. See Workspaces Saving queries, 375 Scale layout setting, 156 preferences setting, 322 scale bar, 368 setting, 3940, 207 Scatter plots, 173 Seamless Map Layers, 207 Seamless tables, seammgr.mbx application, 207, 368 Searchandreplace application, 368 Searching areas, 238 Browser window, 149152 buffering objects, 31 map objects, 149152 objects in other layers, 29
MapInfo Reference
495
Index objects within a region, 2829, 341 troubleshooting, 150 Select All command, 390 Select button, 391393 Select command, 394395 save template, 382383 Select Control Point From Map command, 396 Selectable layers, 205 Selecting by querying buffering objects, 3133 fields from a Browser window, 309361 Select command, 394395 SQL select command, 419431 unselecting, 473 Selecting from screen Boundary Select button, 2829 Marquee Select button, 238 overlapping layout objects, 30 Radius Select button, 341 Select button, 391393 unselect all, 392 Send Mail, 397 Send To Back command, 398 Series command, 399401 Set Clip Region command, 387, 402 Set Target command, 404 Set Target District from Map button/command, 405 Shade by value. See Ranged map Shortcut menus, 406 Show MapBasic Window button/ command, 409410 Show StatusBar command, 412 Show Theme Legend window command, 408 Smooth command, 413 Smoothing a polyline, 316317 Snap to node, 414 autotrace, 414 default settings, 322 snap tolerance, 322 Space, saving with Pack Table, 303304 Split command, 416418 Spreadsheets. See Lotus, Micro soft Excel SQL select, save template, 382383 SQL Select command, 419431 Squares drawing, 342 rounded, 363 specifying attributes, 343 Standard Toolbar, 432 Starting MapInfo, 324, 434 Startup.wor, 434 Statistics window displaying, 176, 411 opening, 411 Show Statistics Window but ton/command, 411 Statistics button, 176 StatusBar cursor location display, 298 display, 436 displaying, 177, 412 map scale display, 298 map window, 255 popups, 437 zoom display, 298, 436 Street intersections, 152 String functions, 159 converting strings to codes, 158 converting strings to numbers, 159 converting to lowercase, 159 first character, 159 last character, 159 number of characters, 159 numeric value, 159 part of a string, 159 proper capitalization, 159 trims spaces from start, 159 Styles frame object, 155 objects, 346348 ranges in a thematic map, 9496 Subselect, 429 Sum of record values, 476 Summagraphics digitizers, 117 Symbols creating, 438439 custom symbols, 440 customizing, 368 geocoding, 163 MapInfo 3.0 compatible sym bols, 440 modifying, 438 specifying style, 439, 440443 Symbol button, 438 Symbol Style button/com mand, 440443
T
Table, creating, 263267 Table Structure command, 444 Tables adding temporary columns, 478 appending rows, 22 closing, 49 closing selected, 5052 creating points, 8081 cutting selections to the clip board, 113114
496
MapInfo Reference
Index dBase format save, 369 deleting, 115 deleting map objects, 44 directory paths, 325 editing through Info tool win dow, 190 exporting, 137142 geocoding, 161 graphing, 248 importing, 179188 Info button data, 189190 joining, 193196 making mappable, 444447 map display, 253254 mappable, 265 multi-user editing, 190 opening, 283290, 340 opening vs importing, 289 packing a table, 303304 projection setting, 369 projection settings, 338339 readonly tables, 447 removing indexes, 444447 renaming, 356357 reverting to previous, 362 saving, 376381 saving to a new name, 369371 table structure, 444 Tables, ODBC making mappable, 232234 opening, 269282 refreshing, 345 unlinking, 472 Tagged Image File Format, 385 Target objects clearing a target, 45 combining, 53 combining objects, 5360 display default, 322 erasing, 133 erasing outside, 134135 specifying, 404 splitting, 416 Technical Support Information, 13 Territories, creating. See Redis tricting Text clearing from the cosmetic lay er, 43 editing, 450 entering, 448 pasting, 308 rotating, 450 Text button, 448451 Text Style button, 452 Text Object, rotating, 450 Text Style button/command, 452453 Thematic Map, save thematic settings, 384 Thematic maps creating, 82110 grid map, 84 joining, 194 layers, 217 legend, 105, 109 legend display, 408 legends, 96, 99, 102, 104 moving bar charts, 361 moving pie charts, 361 multivariable, 8889 one variable, 8588 Theme Legend Window, dis playing, 408 Theme legend window, 70 Tile Windows command, 454 Tool Manager, 458462 ToolBars, 455 Toolbars docking, 457 Drawing, 129130 floating, 456 Main, 229231 moving, 456 ODBC, 268 reshaping, 456 Standard, 432 Toolbars command, 455457 Tools, 464 Tools, Crystal Reports, 111 Tools ButtonPad, Hide MapBas ic Window button, 175 Tools menu, 463 Tools Toolbar, 464 displaying, 455457 Run Mapbasic Program but ton, 366368 Show MapBasic Window but ton, 409410 Tooltips, 465
U
Undoing edits Clear command, 42 specify number, 320 Undo command, 471 Ungeocoded records, 166 Ungeocoding, table structure modifications, 444447 Units of measurement area units, 297 coordinate units, 297 distance units, 297 Universal Translator, 466 Unlink ODBC Table command / button, 472 Unselect All command, 473 Unsmooth command, 474 Unsmoothing a curve, 316317 Update Column command, 475479 Update Column dialog, Join button, 193196
MapInfo Reference
497
Index
V
Value, columns, 476 Value Axis command, 480 Vector graphic files, 179 Vector Symbols. See MapInfo 3.0 compatible symbols Version MapInfo current, 13 previous MapInfo, 362 previous version MapBasic programs, 368 Video display, 321, 348 View Actual Size command, 482 View Entire Layer command, 483 View Entire Layout command, 484 Virtual tablet interface digitiz ers, 117
Windows Registry, border dis play, 387 Workspaces accessing on startup, 434 opening, 291292, 340 opening multiple, 291 saving, 388 saving queries in, 375 World Wide Web, 237
Window numbering, 453 Windows. See Browser, Districts, Graph, Info tool, Layout, Legend, Map, Ruler window Windows Registry, border dis play, 386 Workspaces accessing on startup, 433 opening, 290291, 339 opening multiple, 290 saving, 387 saving queries in, 374 World Wide Web, 236
X
X-Y graph, 173
Z
Zoom changing in a layout, 41 layering, 209 setting, 3940, 207 StatusBar display, 436 Zoom popup, 437 Zoomout button, 486 Zoomin button, 485 Virtual tablet interface digitiz ers, 116
X
X-Y graph, 172
Z
Zoom changing in a layout, 40 layering, 208 setting, 3839, 206 StatusBar display, 435 Zoom popup, 436 Zoomout button, 485 Zoomin button, 484
W
Weighted averages, 58 Window numbering, 454 Windows. See Browser, Districts, Graph, Info tool, Layout, Legend, Map, Ruler window
W
Weighted averages, 57
498
MapInfo Reference

MapInfo Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MapInfo Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Guide

MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

MapInfo Corporate Headquarters:

MapInfo Europe Headquarters:

About MapInfo Command Help Menu

About MapInfo Command Help Menu

About MapInfo is available when:

About MapInfo is always available.

Help > About MapInfo

To return to the previous window:

Add District Command Redistrict Menu

Add District Command Redistrict Menu

add a new district to an existing Districts Browser window.

Add District is available when:

a redistricting session is in effect.

Redistrict > Add District or

Display Shortcut Menu

Using Add District

Changing a Districts Name

Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar

Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar

Add Node button is available when:

Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button

Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu

Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu

Adjust Image Styles is available when:

one or more raster image tables is open.

Table > Raster > Adjust Image Styles

Using the Adjust Image Styles Dialog

Choose Table > Raster > Adjust Image Styles.

Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu Conversions

Align Objects Command Layout Menu

Align Objects Command Layout Menu

Align Objects is available when:

Layout > Align Objects or

Display Shortcut Menu

Align Objects Dialog

Align Objects Command Layout Menu

Cancel the dialog options.

trace the nodes of a polyline or polygon.

Autotrace is available when:

snap mode is activated.

Activate Snap Mode by pressing the S" key

Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu

Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu

Append Rows to Table is available when:

two tables are open.

Table > Append Rows to Table

Appending One Table to Another

Arc Button Drawing Toolbar

Arc Button Drawing Toolbar

The Arc button is available when:

a Layout window is active or a map with an editable layer is active.

Drawing Toolbar > Arc button

Using the Arc Object Dialog

Arc Button Drawing Toolbar

Arc Button Drawing Toolbar

Arrange Icons Command Window Menu

Arrange Icons Command Window Menu

Arrange Icons is available when:

Window > Arrange Icons

Assign Selected Objects Button Main Toolbar

permanently assign all selected map objects to the target district.

Activate Snap Mode by pressing the S" key